[PDF] SIMPLY CLEVER. ŠKODA Superb Owner\\\'s Manual

1 SIMPLY CLEVER ŠKODA Superb Owner's Manual2 Preface You have opted for a ŠKODA our sincere thanks for you...

SIMPLY CLEVER

ŠKODA Superb Owner's Manual

Preface You have opted for a ŠKODA – our sincere thanks for your confidence in us. Your new ŠKODA offers you a vehicle featuring the most modern engineering and a wide range of equipment. We recommend that you read this Owner's Manual carefully so that you can quickly familiarise yourself with your vehicle and all that it has to offer. If you have any questions, please do not hesitate to contact a specialist garage or your importer. National legal provisions take precedence over the information contained in the operating instructions. We wish you much pleasure with your ŠKODA and pleasant motoring at all times. Your ŠKODA AUTO a.s. (hereinafter referred to as ŠKODA)

The on-board literature The on-board literature for your vehicle consists of this “Owner's Manual” as well as a “Service schedule” and the “Help on the road” brochure. There can also be other additional operating manuals and instructions on-board (e. g. an operating manual for the radio) depending on the vehicle model and equipment. If one of the publications listed above is missing, please contact a specialist garage. The details given in the vehicle's technical documentation always take precedence over the details in the Owner's Manual. The Owner's Manual These operating instructions describe all possible equipment variants without identifying them as special equipment, model variants or market-dependent equipment. Consequently, this vehicle does not need to contain all of the equipment components described in these operating instructions. The scope of equipment for your vehicle is described in the sales documentation you were given when purchasing the car. For more information, contact your local ŠKODA retailer. The illustrations can differ in minor details from your vehicle; they are only intended for general information. The Service schedule contains:

› Vehicle data; › Service intervals; › Service proof; › Confirmation of mobility warranty (only valid in certain countries); › important information on the warranty. The confirmations of the carried out service work are one of the conditions for possible warranty claims. Please always present the Service Schedule when you take your car to a specialist garage. If the Service Schedule is missing or worn, please contact the specialist garage that regularly services your car. You will receive a duplicate, in which the previously carried out service work are confirmed.

The Help on the Road brochure The Help on the Road brochure contains the most important telephone numbers in individual countries as well as the addresses and telephone numbers of ŠKODA importers.

Windscreen wipers and washers Rear window

Table of Contents Layout of this Owner's Manual (explanations)

Abbreviations Using the system co*ckpit Overview

9 8

Instruments and warning lights Instrument cluster Multi-functional indicator (onboard computer) MAXI DOT (information display) Auto Check Control Warning lights

10 10 14 18 21 22

Unlocking and locking Vehicle key Child safety lock Central locking system Remote control Anti-theft alarm system KESSY system Emergency unlocking and locking of the driver's door Emergency locking of the doors Boot lid Electric boot lid (Combi) Electric power windows Electric sliding/tilting roof Panoramic sliding roof (Combi)

32 32 33 33 35 37 38 40 40 40 44 46 49 51

Lights and Visibility Lights Interior light Luggage compartment light (Combi) Visibility

54 54 60 63 64

Seats and Stowage Front seats Seat heaters Ventilated front seats Head restraints Rear seats Luggage compartment Variable loading floor in the luggage compartment Extendable variable loading floor with integrated aluminium strips and fastening elements (Combi) Net partition (Combi) Roof luggage rack Cup holder Ashtray Cigarette lighter, 12-volt power socket Storage compartments Clothes hooks Parking ticket holder

65 69 72 72 75 76 76 78 79 83

84 86 88 89 90 91 92 98 98

The air conditioning system Introductory information Air outlet vents Air conditioning system (manual air conditioning system) Climatronic (automatic air conditioning system) Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation)

99 99 100

Starting-off and Driving Starting and stopping the engine KESSY system Brakes and brake assist systems Shifting (manual gearbox) Pedals

109 109 112 114 118 118

100 103 105

Parking aid Park assist Cruise control system (CCS) START-STOP

118 119 122 124

Automatic gearbox Automatic gearbox

126 126

Communication Mobile phones and two-way radio systems Operating the phone on the multifunction steering wheel Symbols in the information display Phone Phonebook Universal telephone preinstallation GSM II Universal telephone preinstallation GSM IIl Voice control Multimedia

132 132 133 134 134 134 137 141 143

Safety Passive Safety General information Correct seated position

146 146 147

Seat belts Seat belts

150 150

Airbag system Description of the airbag system Front airbags Driver’s knee airbag Side airbags Head airbags Deactivating airbags

154 154 155 156 157 159 160

Transporting children safely Child seat

162 162

Table of Contents

Driving Tips Driving and the Environment The first 1 500 kilometres and then afterwards Catalytic converter Economical and environmentally friendly driving Environmental compatibility Driving abroad Avoiding damage to your vehicle Driving through water on the street

166 166 166

Towing a trailer Towing a trailer

172 172

167 169 170 170 171

General Maintenance Taking care of and cleaning the vehicle Taking care of your vehicle

174 174

Inspecting and replenishing Fuel Engine compartment Vehicle battery

181 181 183 189

Wheels and Tyres Wheels

194 194

Accessories, changes and replacement of parts Introductory information Changes and impairments of the airbag system

201 201 201

Do-it-yourself Do-it-yourself First-aid box Warning triangle Fire extinguisher Vehicle tool kit

Table of Contents

202 202 202 202 203

Changing a wheel Breakdown kit Jump-starting Towing the vehicle

203 207 209 211

Fuses and light bulbs Fuses Bulbs

214 214 217

Technical data Technical data Introductory information Weights Vehicle identification data Fuel consumption according to the ECE standards and EU guidelines Dimensions Specifications and engine oil capacity 1.4 l/92 kW TSI engine - EU5 1.8 l/112 kW TSI engine - EU5/EU4/EU2/(BS4) 1.8 l/118 kW TSI engine - EU5 2.0 l/147 kW FSI engine - EU5 3.6 l/191 kW FSI engine - EU5/EU2/(BS4) 1.6 l/77 kW TDI CR engine - EU5 2.0 l/103 kW TDI CR DPF engine - EU5, (EU4/ BS4) 2.0 l/125 kW TDI CR DPF engine - EU5 Multi-purpose vehicles (AF)

Index

223 223 223 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235

Table of Contents

Layout of this Owner's Manual (explanations) The Owner's Manual has been systematically designed in order to make it easy for you to search for and obtain the information you require. Chapters, table of contents and subject index The text of the Owner's manual is divided into relatively short sections which are combined into easy-to-read chapters. The chapter you are reading at any particular moment is always specified on the bottom right of the page. The Table of contents is arranged according to the chapters and the detailed Subject index at the end of the Owner's Manual helps you to rapidly find the information you are looking for. Sections The majority of Sections apply to all models. Since there is a wide range of different equipment and options available it is clearly unavoidable, despite dividing the contents into sections, that mention may be made of equipment which may not be fitted to your vehicle. Direction indications All direction indications such as “left”, “right”, “front”, “rear” relate to the direction of travel of the vehicle. Explanation of symbols  End of a section. £ The section is continued on the next page. Notes

WARNING The most important notes are marked with the heading WARNING. These WARNING notes draw your attention to a serious risk of accident or injury. While reading the text you will frequently encounter a double arrow followed by a small triangle with an exclamation mark. This symbol is intended to draw your attention to a WARNING note at the end of the section to which you must pay careful attention.

Layout of this Owner's Manual (explanations)

CAUTION A Caution note draws your attention to the possibility of damage to your vehicle (e.g. damage to gearbox), or points out general risks of an accident.

For the sake of the environment An Environmental note draws your attention to environmental protection aspects. This is where you will, for example, find tips aimed at reducing your fuel consumption.

Note A normal Note draws your attention to important information about the operation of your vehicle.



Abbreviations Abbreviation rpm

Definition Engine revolutions per minute

ABS

Anti-lock brake system

Multi-purpose vehicles

AHL

Adaptive headlights

Automatic gearbox

TCS

Traction control

CO2 in g/km

discharged quantity of carbon dioxide in grams per driven kilometer

DPF

Diesel particle filter

DSG

Automatic double clutch gearbox

DSR

Active driver-steering recommendation

EDL

Electronic differential lock

EPC

EPC fault light

ESC

Stabilisation control

FSI

Stratified petrol direct injection

Kilowatt, measuring unit for the engine output

Manual gearbox

MFD

Multi-functional indicator

Vehicles of this class are designed and constructed for conveying goods with a maximum weight of 3.5 tons

Newton meter, measuring unit for the engine torque

TDI CR

Diesel engine with turbocharging and common rail injection system

TDI PD

Diesel engine with injection system and unit injector injection system

TSI

Petrol engine with turbocharging and direct injection



Abbreviations

Fig. 1 co*ckpit

Using the system

20 21

co*ckpit

Overview

1 2 3 4

6 7

8 9 10 11 12

13 14 15 16 17 18

Power windows Central locking system Air outlet vents Lever for the multi-functional switch: › Turn signal light, headlight and parking light, headlight flasher › Speed regulating system Steering wheel: › with horn › with driver’s front airbag › with pushbuttons for radio, navigation system and mobile phone Instrument cluster: Instruments and indicator lights Lever for the multi-functional switch: › Multi-functional indicator › Windshield wiper and wash system Air outlet vents Regulator for front left seat heating Switch for hazard warning lights Regulator for front right seat heating Depending on equipment fitted: › Radio › Navigation system Storage compartment on the front passenger side Front passenger airbag Key switch for switching off the front passenger airbag (in front passenger storage compartment) Electric exterior mirror adjustment Light switch Bonnet release lever

46 35 100 60 122

28 29

155 133, 143 10 14 65 100 75 59 75

30 31

Regulator for the instrument lighting and regulator for the headlight beam range adjustment Storage compartment on the driver's side Lever for adjusting the steering wheel Driver’s knee airbag Ignition lock TCS switch Tyre pressure monitoring system Depending on equipment fitted: › Operating controls for the air conditioning system › Operating controls for Climatronic Depending on equipment fitted: › Gearshift lever (manual gearbox) › Selector lever (automatic gearbox) Indicator light for the deactivated front seat passenger airbag Park Assist Front and rear parking aid Depending on equipment fitted: › Ashtrays › Storage compartment

59, 59 93 110 156 111 117 28 100 103 118 126 161 119 118 90 93

Note The arrangement of the controls and switches and the location of some items on right-hand drive models may differ from that shown in » Fig. 1. The symbols on the controls and switches are the same as for left-hand drive models.

92 155 161 70 55 184

co*ckpit



Overview of the Instrument cluster

Instruments and warning lights Instrument cluster

Introduction

This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Overview of the Instrument cluster Engine revolutions counter Speedometer Coolant temperature gauge Fuel gauge Counter for distance driven Service Interval Display Digital clock Recommended gear Display in rear centre console

10 11 11 11 12 12 12 13 14 14

Fig. 2 Instrument cluster

ä 1

WARNING Concentrate fully at all times on your driving! As the driver you are fully responsible for road safety. ■ Never operate the controls in the instrument cluster while driving, only when the vehicle is stationary!

■



4 5

Valid for countries where the values are indicated in British measuring units.

Using the system

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 10.

Engine revolutions counter » page 11 Speedometer » page 11 Button for display mode: › Setting the hours/minutes › Activating/deactivating the second speed in mph or km/h › Service interval - Display of the remaining number of days, kilometres or miles to the next Inspection Service1)/Reset Coolant temperature gauge » page 11 Display: › with counter for distance driven » page 12 › with Service Interval Display » page 12 › with digital clock » page 13 › with Multi-functional display » page 14 › with Information display » page 18

6 7

Fuel gauge » page 12 Button for: › Reset trip counter for the distance driven › Resetting Service Interval Display › Set hours/minutes › Activate/deactivate display mode

Coolant temperature gauge

ä 

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 10.

Cold range If the pointer is still in the left area of the scale it means that the engine has not yet reached its operating temperature. Avoid high speeds, full throttle and high engine loads.

The red scale of the rev counter 1 » Fig. 2 indicates the range in which the engine control unit begins to limit the engine speed. The engine control unit restricts the engine speed to a steady limit value.

The operating range The engine has reached its operating temperature as soon as the pointer moves into the mid-range of the scale, for a normal style of driving. The pointer may also move further to the right at high engine loads and high outside temperatures. This is not critical provided the warning symbol  in the instrument cluster does not flash.

You should shift into the next higher gear before the red scale of the rev counter is reached, or move the selector lever into position D if your car is fitted with an automatic gearbox. Avoid high engine speeds during the running-in period and before the engine has warmed up to the operating temperature » page 166.

If the symbol  in the instrument cluster flashes it means that either the coolant temperature is too high or the coolant level is too low. The following guidelines must be observed » page 27, Coolant temperature/coolant level .

For the sake of the environment Shifting to a higher gear in good time helps to lower fuel consumption, minimises operating noise levels, protects the environment and contributes to a longer life and reliability of the engine.

The coolant temperature gauge 4 » Fig. 2 operates only when the ignition is switched on. The following guidelines regarding the temperature ranges must be observed to avoid any damage to the engine:

Engine revolutions counter

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 10.

WARNING 

Pay attention to the following instructions before opening the bonnet and inspecting the coolant level » page 183, Engine compartment.

Speedometer

CAUTION

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 10.

Additional headlights and other attached components in front of the fresh air inlet impair the cooling efficiency of the coolant. There is then a risk of the engine overheating at high outside temperatures and high engine loads.

Warning against excessive speeds An acoustic warning signal will sound when the vehicle speed exceeds 120 kilometres per hour. The acoustic warning signal is switched off when the vehicle speed falls below this speed limit.

Note This function is only valid for some countries.



Instruments and warning lights



Daily trip counter (trip) The daily trip counter indicates the distance which you have driven since it was last reset - in steps of 100 metres or 1/10 of a mile.

Fuel gauge

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 10.

Odometer The odometer indicates the total distance in kilometres or miles which the vehicle has been driven.

The fuel gauge 6 » Fig. 2 only operates when the ignition is switched on. The fuel tank has a capacity of about 60 litres. The warning symbol  in the instrument cluster lights up when the pointer reaches the reserve marking. There are now about 10.5 litres of fuel remaining in the tank. This symbol is a reminder for you, that you must refuel.

Fault display If there is a fault in the instrument cluster Error will appear continuously in the display. Ensure the fault is rectified as soon as possible by a specialist workshop.

Note

The following is displayed in the information display: Please refuel!

If vehicles which are fitted with the information display the display of the second speed is activated in mph or km/h, this driving speed is indicated instead of the counter for the total distance driven.

An audible signal sounds as a warning signal.



CAUTION Service Interval Display

Never drive until the fuel tank is completely empty! An irregular supply of fuel can lead to irregular engine running. Unburnt fuel may get into the exhaust system and damage the catalytic converter.

Fig. 3 Service Interval Display: Note

Note After filling up, it can occur that during dynamic driving (e.g. numerous curves, braking, driving downhill and climbing a steep hill) the fuel gauge indicates approx. a fraction less. When stopping or during less dynamic driving, the fuel gauge displays the correct fuel level again. This is not a fault.

Counter for distance driven

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 10.

The distance which you have driven with your vehicle is shown in kilometres (km). In some countries the measuring unit “mile” is used. Reset button Press the button 7 » Fig. 2 for more than 1 second to reset the display of the daily trip counter.



First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 10.

The display can vary depending on the equipment. Service Interval Display Before the next service interval a key symbol  and the remaining kilometres are indicated for 10 seconds after switching on the ignition » Fig. 3. At the same time, the remaining days until the next service interval are displayed. The following is displayed in the information display: Service in ... km or... days.

Using the system

The kilometre indicator or the days indicator reduces in steps of 100 km or, where applicable, days until the service due date is reached. As soon as the due date for the service is reached, a flashing key symbol  and the text Service appears in the display for 20 seconds after the ignition has been switched on. The following is displayed in the information display: Service now! Displaying the distance and days until the next service interval You can use the button 3 to display the remaining distance and days until the next service interval » Fig. 2. A key symbol  and the remaining distance appear for 10 seconds in the display. At the same time, the remaining days until the next service interval are displayed. On vehicles which are equipped with the information display, you can call up this display in the menu Settings » page 20. The following will be displayed in the information display for 10 seconds: Service in ... km or... days. Resetting Service Interval Display It is only possible to reset the Service Interval Display, if a service message or at least a pre-warning is shown in the instrument cluster display. We recommend that this reset is completed by a specialist garage. The specialist garage: › resets the memory of the display after the appropriate inspection; › adds an entry to the Service Schedule; › affix the sticker with the entry of the following service interval to the side of the dash panel on the driver's side.

Note ■ Never reset the display between service intervals, as this will result in the incorrect display. ■ information is retained in the Service Interval Display also after the battery of the vehicle is disconnected. ■ If the instrument cluster is exchanged after a repair, the correct values must be entered in the counter for the Service Interval Display. This work is carried out by a specialist garage. ■ After resetting the display with flexible service intervals, the displayed data is the same as that for a vehicle with fixed service intervals. We therefore recommend that the Service Interval Display is only reset by a ŠKODA Service Partner, who will reset the display with a vehicle system tester. ■ Please refer to the Service Plan for detailed information about the service inter vals.

Digital clock

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 10. ings

The clock is set with the buttons 3 and 7 » Fig. 2. Select the display that you wish to change with the button 3 and carry out the change with the button 7 . On vehicles that are fitted with the information display, it is also possible to set the clock in the menu Time » page 20.



Reset the service interval display by using the reset button 7 » Fig. 2. On vehicles which are equipped with the information display, you can reset the Service Interval Display in the menu Settings » page 20.

CAUTION We recommend that you do not reset the Service Interval Display yourself as this can result in the incorrect setting of the Service Interval Display, which can also cause possible problems with the operation of your vehicle.

Instruments and warning lights

Recommended gear

Display in rear centre console Fig. 4 Recommended gear

Fig. 5 Centre console at rear: Display

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 10. ings

The currently engaged gear A is shown in the instrument cluster display » Fig. 4.

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 10. ings

The time and the outside temperature is displayed on the display in the rear centre console when the ignition is switched on » Fig. 5.

In order to minimise the fuel consumption, a recommendation for shifting into another gear is indicated in the display.

The values are taken over by the instrument cluster.

If the control unit recognises that it is beneficial to change gear, an arrow B is shown in the display. The arrow points up or down, depending on whether you should shift into a higher or lower gear.

Multi-functional indicator (onboard computer)

At the same time, the recommended gear is indicated instead of the currently engaged gear A .

Using the system

Introduction

This chapter contains information on the following subjects:

CAUTION The driver is always responsible for selecting the correct gear in different driving situations, such as overtaking.



Memory Operation Outside temperature Driving time Current fuel consumption Average fuel consumption Range Distance travelled Average speed Current speed Oil temperature Warning against excessive speeds

15 16 16 16 17 17 17 17 17 18 18 18 £

The multi-functional indicator is equipped with two automatic memories. The selected memory is shown in the Display » Fig. 6.

The multi-functional indicator can only be operated when the ignition is switched on. After the ignition is switched on, the function displayed is the one which you last selected before switching off the ignition.

The data of the single-trip memory (memory 1) is shown if a 1 appears in the display. A 2 shown in the display means that data relates to the total distance memory (memory 2).

The multi-functional indicator appears in the display » Fig. 6 or in the information display » page 18 depending on the equipment fitted to your vehicle.

Switching over the memory with the help of the button B » Fig. 7 on the windshield wiper lever or with the help of the adjustment wheel D » Fig. 7 on the multifunction steering wheel.

On vehicles with an information display, there is an option to fade out some of the information.

WARNING

Single-trip memory (memory 1) The single-trip memory collates the driving information from the moment the ignition is switched on until it is switched off. New data will also flow into the calculation of the current driving information if the trip is continued within 2 hours after switching off the ignition. If the trip is interrupted for more than 2 hours, the memory is automatically erased.

Concentrate fully at all times on your driving! As the driver you are fully responsible for road safety.

CAUTION Pull out the ignition key if coming in contact with the display (e.g. when cleaning) to prevent any possible damage.

Total-trip memory (memory 2) The total-trip memory gathers data from any number of individual journeys up to a total of 19 hours and 59 minutes driving or 1 999 kilometres driven, and on vehicles which are fitted with an information display up to a total of 99 hours and 59 minutes driving or 9 999 kilometres driven. The memory is deleted when either of these limits is reached and the calculation starts all over again.

Note In certain national versions the displays appear in the Imperial system of measures. ■ If the display of the second speed is activated in mph, the current speed is not indicated in km/h on the display. ■



The total-trip memory will not, contrary to the single-trip memory, be deleted after a period of interruption of driving of 2 hours.

Note

Memory

All information in the memory 1 and 2 is erased if the battery of the vehicle is disconnected. Fig. 6 Multi-functional indicator

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 14.

Instruments and warning lights



Operation

The following readouts of the selected memory will be set to zero with the button B on the windshield wiper lever or with the button D on the multifunction steering wheel:

› average fuel consumption, › distance driven, › average speed, › Driving time.



Outside temperature

Fig. 7 Multi-functional indicator: Control elements on the windshield wiper lever/control elements on the multifunction steering wheel

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 14. ings

The rocker switch A » Fig. 7 and the button B are located on the windshield wiper lever. Switching over and resetting is performed with the adjustment wheel D on the multifunction steering wheel » Fig. 7. Select memory › Briefly press the button B on the windshield wiper lever or the button D on the multifunction steering wheel to select the desired memory. Selecting functions with the help of the windshield wiper lever › Briefly press the rocker switch A up or down. This opens the individual functions of the multi-functional indicator one after the other.

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 14.

The outside temperature appears in the display when the ignition is switched on. If the outside temperature drops below +4 °C, a snow flake symbol (warning signal for ice on the road) appears before the temperature indicator and a warning signal sounds. After pressing the rocker switch A at the windshield wiper lever » Fig. 7 or the button C at the multifunction steering wheel » Fig. 7, the function shown last is indicated.

WARNING Do not only rely upon the information given on the outside temperature display that there is no ice on the road. Even at temperatures around +4 °C, black ice may still be on the road surface – warning, drive with care!

Driving time

Selecting functions with the help of the multifunction steering wheel › Press the button C to open the menu of the multifunction steering wheel. › Turn the adjustment wheel D upwards or downwards. This opens the individual functions of the multi-functional indicator one after the other.

Reseting › Select the desired memory. › Press the button B or, where applicable, the button D for more than 1 second.

The driving time which has elapsed since the memory was last erased, appears in the display. If you wish to measure the driving time from a particular time, you must set the memory to zero at this moment in time by pressing the button B on the windshield wiper lever » Fig. 7 or the adjustment wheel D on the multifunction steering wheel » Fig. 7 for longer than 1 second.

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 14. ings

The maximum time indicated in both memories is 19 hours and 59 minutes and on vehicles which are fitted with an information display, it is 99 hours and 59 minutes. The indicator is set back to null if this period is exceeded.

Using the system



The estimated range in kilometres is shown on the display. It indicates the distance you can still drive with your vehicle based on the present level of fuel in the tank for the same style of driving.

Current fuel consumption

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 14.

The readout is shown in steps of 10 km. After lighting up of the indicator light for the fuel reserve the display is shown in steps of 5 km.

The current fuel consumption level is shown in the display in litres/100 km . With this information your style of driving can be adapted to the desired fuel consumption. 1)

The display appears in litres/hour if the vehicle is stationary or driving at a low speed2).

The fuel consumption for the last 50 km is taken as a basis for calculating the range. The range will be increase if you drive in a more economical manner. 

Average fuel consumption

The average fuel consumption since the memory was last erased is shown in the display in litres/100 km1) » page 15. With this information your style of driving can be adapted to the desired fuel consumption.

The maximum distance indicated in both memories is 1 999 km or 9 999 km on vehicles with an information display. The indicator is set back to null if this period is exceeded.

The indicated value will be regularly updated while you are driving.

Note

ä 1) 2)

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 14.

The distance driven since the memory was last erased appears in the display » page 15. If you wish to measure the distance driven from a particular time, you must set the memory to zero at this moment in time by pressing the button B on the windshield wiper lever » Fig. 7 or the adjustment wheel D on the multifunction steering wheel » Fig. 7.

If you wish to determine the average fuel consumption over a certain period of time, you must set the memory to zero at the start of the measurement using the button B on the windshield wiper lever » Fig. 7 or the adjustment wheel D on the multifunction steering wheel » Fig. 7. Dashes appears in the display for the first 100 m you drive after erasing the memory.

Range



Distance travelled

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 14.

The amount of fuel consumed will not be indicated.

If the memory is set to zero (after disconnecting the battery), the fuel consumption of 10 ltr./100 km is calculated for the range; afterwards the value is adapted accordingly to the style of driving.



Average speed 

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 14.

The average speed since the memory was last erased is shown in the display in km/hour » page 15. If you wish to determine the average speed over a certain period of time, you must set the memory to zero at the start of the measurement using the button B on the windshield wiper lever » Fig. 7 or the adjustment £ wheel D on the multifunction steering wheel » Fig. 7.

On some models in certain countries, the display appears in kilometres/litres. On some models in certain countries, the display appears in --,- kilometres/litres if the vehicle is stationary.

Instruments and warning lights

A zero appears in the display for the first approx. 300 m you drive after erasing the memory. The indicated value will be regularly updated while you are driving.

This allows you to set the speed in 5 km/h intervals. Adjust the speed limit while the vehicle is moving



First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 14.

The current speed which is identical to the display of the speedometer 2 » Fig. 2 is indicated on the display.



Oil temperature

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 14.

If the oil temperature is lower than 50 °C or if a fault in the system for checking the oil temperature is present, three lines are displayed instead of the oil temperature.

Warning against excessive speeds

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 14.

Adjust the speed limit while the vehicle is stationary › With the button A on the windshield wiper lever » Fig. 7 or the adjustment wheel D on the multi-function steering wheel » Fig. 7, select the menu point Warning against excessive speeds. › Activate the option for setting the speed limit (the value flashes) with the button B on the windshield wiper lever, or the adjustment wheel D on the multifunction steering wheel. › Set the desired speed limit, e.g. 50 km/h, with the button A on the windshield wiper lever or the adjustment wheel D on the multi-function steering wheel. › Use the button B on the windshield wiper lever or the adjustment wheel D on the multi-function steering wheel to confirm the desired speed limit, or wait around 5 seconds and the setting is saved automatically (the value stops flashing).

Using the system

on the windshield wiper lever or the adjustment wheel D on the multi-function steering wheel. › Drive at the desired speed, e.g. 50 km/h. › Use the button B on the windshield wiper lever or the adjustment wheel D on the multi-function steering wheel to accept the current speed as the speed limit (the value flashes).

Current speed

› Select the menu point Warning against excessive speeds with the button



If you wish to change the set speed limit, it is changed in 5 km/h intervals (e.g. the accepted speed of 47 km/h increases to 50 km/h or decreases to 45 km/h). › Repeatedly press the button B on the windshield wiper lever or the adjustment wheel D on the multi-function steering wheel to confirm the desired speed limit, or wait around 5 seconds and the setting is saved automatically (the value stops flashing). Change or delete speed limit › Select the menu point Warning against excessive speeds with the button A on the windshield wiper lever or the adjustment wheel D on the multi-function steering wheel. › Pressing the button B on the windshield wiper lever or the adjustment wheel D on the multifunction steering wheel deletes the speed limit. › Pressing the button B on the windshield wiper lever or the adjustment wheel D on the multifunction steering wheel again activates change mode for the speed limit. If the set speed limit is exceeded, an acoustic signal will sound as a warning. At the same time the message Warning against excessive speeds appears on the display with the set limit value. The set speed limit value remains stored even after switching off the ignition.



MAXI DOT (information display)

Introduction

This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Main menu Settings Door, luggage compartment door and bonnet ajar warning

19 20 21 £

The information display provides you with information in a convenient way concerning the current operating state of your vehicle. The information system also provides you with data (depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle) relating to the radio, mobile phone, multi-functional indicator, navigation system, the unit connected to the MDI input and the automatic gearbox.

Main menu

Certain functions and operating conditions are always being checked on the vehicle when the ignition is switched on and also while driving. Functional faults, if required repair work and other information are indicated by red symbols » page 22 and yellow symbols » page 22. Lighting up of certain symbols is combined with an acoustic warning signal. Information and texts giving warnings are also shown in the display » page 22. Fig. 8 Information display: Control elements on the windshield wiper lever/ control elements on the multifunction steering wheel

The following information can be shown in the display (depending on the equipment installed on the vehicle): Main menu » page 19 Door, luggage compartment door and bonnet ajar warning

» page 21

Service Interval Display

» page 12

Selector lever positions for an automatic gearbox

» page 126

Operating with the buttons on the windshield wiper lever › You can activate the Main menu by pressing the rocker switch A » Fig. 8 for more than 1 second. › Individual menu points can be selected by means of the rocker switch A . When the pushbutton B is briefly pressed, the information you have selected is displayed.

WARNING Concentrate fully at all times on your driving! As the driver you are fully responsible for road safety.

CAUTION Pull out the ignition key if coming in contact with the display (e.g. when cleaning) to prevent any possible damage.

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 18. ings



Operating with the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel › You can activate the Main menu by pressing the rocker switch C » Fig. 8 for more than 1 second. › By briefly pressing the C button you will reach one level higher. › The individual menus can be selected by pressing the adjustment wheel D . The selected menu is displayed after briefly pressing the adjustment wheel D . The following information can be selected (depending on the equipment installed on the vehicle): ■

MFD » page 14

■

Audio

■

Navigation

■

Phone » page 138

■

Aux. Heating » page 105

Instruments and warning lights

■

Vehicle status » page 21

■

Settings » page 20

■ ■

After selecting the menu point Back you will reach one level higher in the menu.

The menu points Audio and Navigation are only displayed when the factory-fitted radio or navigation system is switched on.

Language This is where the language in which the warning and information texts should be displayed can be set.

The menu point Aux. heating is only displayed if a factory-fitted auxiliary heating is installed.

Automatic blind (Combi) This is where the automatic roll-up function of the luggage compartment roll cover can be deactivated/activated when opening the boot lid.

Note ■ If warning messages are shown in the information display, these messages must be confirmed with the button B on the windshield wiper lever or with the button D on the multifunction steering wheel to call up the main menu. ■ If the information display is not activated at that moment, the menu always shifts to one of the higher levels after approx. 10 seconds. ■ The operation of the factory-fitted radio or navigation system is described in separate operating instructions to be found in the on-board literature.

Displays of the MFA This is where certain displays of the multi-functional indicator can be switched on or off.



Comfort This is where the following functions can be activated, deactivated or adjusted:

Settings

Factory setting Back

Rain closing

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 18. ings ATA confirm

Switch on/off the function for automatically closing the window and panoramic tilt/slide sunroof in a locked vehicle when it starts raininga). If the function is set and it is not raining, the windows including the panoramic tilt/ slide sunroof will close automatically after approx. 12 hours. Switch on/off the acoustic signal indicating activation of the anti-theft alarm system.

You can change certain settings by means of the information display. The current setting is shown on the information display in the respective menu at the top below the line.

Central locking

The following information can be selected (depending on the equipment installed on the vehicle):

Switch on/off the central locking and automatic locking function, also applies to the KESSY system.

Window op.

Only convenience mode for the driver window or for all of the windows can be adjusted here.

Mirror down

Switch on/off the function for mirror lowering on the front passenger side when engaging the reverse gearb).

Mirror adjust.

Switch on/off the function for left and right exterior mirror setting simultaneously.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Language Autom. blind MFD Data Convenience Lights & Vision Time Winter tyres Units Assistants Alt. speed dis. Service Interval

Using the system

Factory setting a) b)

Restore the Convenience factory setting.

This function is only available on vehicles with a rain sensor. This function is only available on vehicles with an electrically adjustable driver seat.

Lights and Visibility This is where the following functions can be activated, deactivated or adjusted:

Coming Home

Switch on/off and adjust the light duration of the Coming Home function.

Leaving Home

Switch on/off and adjust the light duration of the Coming Home function.

Footwell light Dayl. dri. light Rear wiper Lane ch. flash Travel mode Factory setting

Switch on/off and adjust the footwell light intensity. Switch on/off the “DAY LIGHT” function. Switch on/off the function for automatic rear window wiping. Switch on/off the convenience flashing function. Switch on/off the travel model function. Restore the factory setting for the lighting.

Time The time, time format (12 or 24 hour indicator) and the changeover between summer/winter time can be set here. Winter tyres This where the speed at which a warning signal should sound can be set. This function is, for example, used for winter tyres with which the permissible maximum speed is lower than the maximum speed of the vehicle. When exceeding the speed, the following is shown on the information display: Winter tyres: max. speed ... km/h Measures The units for the temperature, consumption and distance driven can be set here. Assistants The tones of the acoustic signals for the parking aid can be adjusted here. Second speed The display of the second speed in mph or in km/h can be switched on here1).

Service Here you can have the remaining kilometres and days until the next service interval displayed, and reset the Service Interval Display. Factory Setting After selecting the menu Factory Setting the factory setting of the information display is established again.



Door, luggage compartment door and bonnet ajar warning

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 18.

The door, luggage compartment and bonnet ajar warning lights up if at least one door, the luggage compartment or bonnet are not closed. The symbol indicates which door is still open or whether the luggage compartment door or bonnet is not closed. The symbol goes out as soon as the doors, luggage compartment door and bonnet are completely closed. A warning signal sounds if the car is driven at a speed of more than 6 km/hour with the door, luggage compartment door or bonnet open.



Auto Check Control Car state The Auto Check Control checks the status of certain functions and vehicle components. The check is performed constantly when the ignition is switched on, both when the vehicle is stationary, as well as when driving. Some operational faults, urgent repairs, service work or other information appear in the display of the instrument cluster. The displays are shown with a red or yellow light symbol depending on the priority of the message. The red symbols indicate danger (priority 1) while the yellow symbols indicate a warning (priority 2). Information for the driver may also appear in addition to the symbols » page 22.

Valid for countries where the values are indicated in British measuring units.

Instruments and warning lights

There is at least one error message when the term Vehicle status is displayed in the menu. After selecting this menu the first of the error messages is displayed. Several error messages are shown on the display under the message e.g. 1/3. This indicates that the first of a total of three error messages is being displayed. The displayed faults must be investigated as soon as possible.

 

As long as the operational faults are not rectified, the symbols are always indicated again. After the first display, the symbols are indicated without information for the driver. If a fault occurs, a warning signal will also sound in addition to the symbol and text in the display: › Priority 1 - three warning signals › Priority 2 - one warning signal

 

Engine oil pressure too low

» page 26

Clutches of the automatic gearbox DSG are too hot

» page 31

Three successive warning signals will sound if a red symbol appears.

The meaning of the yellow symbols:

Using the system

Problem with engine oil pressure

Have the vehicle checked by a specialist garage immediately. The information about the maximum permissible engine speed is displayed together with this symbol.

If several operational faults of priority 2 exist, the symbols appear one after the other and are each illuminated for about 5 seconds.



The warning lights show certain functions/faults and may be accompianed by acoustic signals.

The meaning of the red symbols:

Check the relevant function as soon as possible.

» page 30

Overview

› Stop the vehicle. › Switch off the engine. › Check the indicated function. › Call for professional help if necessary.

A yellow symbol signals a warning.

Brake pads worn

Warning lights

A red symbol signals danger.

Yellow symbols

» page 26

In certain cases, if a yellow symbol appears one warning signal will also sound.

Red symbols

 

Check engine oil level, engine oil sensor faulty



       

Turn signal light (left)

» page 23

Turn signal light (right)

» page 23

Fog lights

» page 24

Main beam

» page 24

Low beam

» page 24

Rear fog light

» page 24

Speed regulating system

» page 24

Bulb failure

» page 24

                 

Adaptive headlights

» page 24

Diesel particle filter (diesel engine)

» page 24

Airbag system

» page 25

Control system for exhaust

» page 25

Electromechanical power steering Steering lock (KESSY system)

» page 25

Engine oil pressure

» page 26

EPC fault light (petrol engine)

» page 27

Glow plug system (diesel engine)

» page 27

Coolant temperature/coolant level

» page 27

Traction control (ASR)

» page 28

Stabilisation control (ESC)

» page 28

Traction control (ASR) switched off

» page 28

Selector lever lock Starting (KESSY system)

» page 28

Tyre pressure

» page 28

Antilock brake system (ABS)

» page 29

Bonnet

» page 29

Seat belt warning light

» page 29

Thickness of brake pads

» page 30

       

Boot lid

» page 30

Open door

» page 30

Windscreen washer fluid level

» page 30

Brake system

» page 30

Handbrake

» page 31

Generator

» page 31

Engine oil level

» page 26

Fuel reserve

» page 31

WARNING If illuminated indicator lights and the corresponding descriptions and warning notes are not observed, this may result in severe injuries or major vehicle damage. ■ The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area. There is a risk of injuries, scalding, accidents and fire when working in the engine compartment, e.g. inspecting and replenishing oil and other fluids. It is essential to observe safety notes » page 183, Engine compartment. ■

Note The arrangement of the indicator lights depends on the model version. The symbols shown in the following functional description are to be found as indicator lights in the instrument cluster. ■ Operational faults are shown in the instrument cluster as red symbols (priority 1 - danger) or yellow symbols (priority 2 - warning). ■



Turn signal system   Either the left  or right  indicator light flashes depending on the position of the turn signal lever. Instruments and warning lights

If a turn signal light fails, the indicator light flashes at twice its normal rate. This does not apply when towing a trailer.

Adaptive headlights 

Switching off the hazard warning light system is switched on will cause all of the turn signal lights as well as both indicator lights to flash. Further information » page 60.



Main beam  The indicator light  comes on when the main beam or headlight flasher are selected » page 60.

The diesel particle filter separates the soot particles from the exhaust. The soot particles collect in the diesel particle filter where they are burnt on a regular basis. If the warning light  comes on, this means that soot has accumulated in the diesel particle filter because of the frequent short distances.



Low beam  The indicator light  comes on when low beam is selected » page 55.



In order to clean the diesel particulate filter, the vehicle should be driven at an even speed of at least 60 km/h at engine speeds of 1 800 - 2 500 rpm for at least 15 minutes or until the warning light goes out with the 4th or 5th gear engaged (automatic gearbox: position S) when the traffic situation permits it. This increases the exhaust temperature and the soot particles deposited in the diesel particle filter are burnt. Whereby the applicable speed limits must always be observed »



Speed regulating system  The warning light  lights up, when operating the speed regulating system.

The warning light  goes out after the successful cleaning of the diesel particle filter.

The rear fog light  The warning light  comes on when the rear fog lights are operating » page 58.



Diesel particle filter  (diesel engine)

Fog lights  The warning light  comes on when the fog lights are operating » page 58.

If the indicator light  flashes for 1 minute and a warning signal sounds while driving or after switching on the ignition, this indicates a fault in the adaptive headlights » page 57.



If the filter is not properly cleaned, the warning light  does not go out and the warning light  begins to flash. The following is displayed in the information display: Diesel-particle filter: Owner's manual! Diesel particle filter appears. Afterwards the engine control unit shifts the engine into the emergency mode, which only has a reduced power output. After switching the ignition off and on again the indicator light  comes on. Visit a specialist garage immediately.

Bulb failure 

Further information » page 223, Vehicle identification data.

The warning light  comes on if a bulb is faulty:

› within 2 seconds of the ignition being switched on; › when switching on the defective light bulb. The following text e.g will be displayed in the information display: Check front-right dipped beam!

Using the system



WARNING The diesel particle filter achieves very high temperatures. Therefore do not park in areas where the hot filter can come into direct contact with dry grass or other combustible materials - risk of fire! ■ Always adjust your speed to suit weather, road, region and traffic conditions. The recommendations indicated by the indicator light must not tempt you to disregard the national regulations for road traffic. ■

CAUTION As long as the warning light  lights up, one must take into account an increased fuel consumption and in certain circ*mstances a power reduction of the engine.

Note ■ To assist the combustion process of the soot particles, we recommend that regularly driving over short distances should be avoided. ■ Using diesel fuel with an increased sulphur content can considerably reduce the life of the diesel particle filter. A specialist garage will be able to tell you which  countries use only diesel fuel with high sulphur content.

Airbag system  Monitoring the airbag system The warning light  comes on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on. There is a fault in the system if the warning light does not go out or flashes while driving » . This also applies if the warning light does not come on when the ignition is switched on. The following text will be displayed in the information display: Error: Airbag The functionality of the airbag system is monitored electronically even if one of the airbags is switched off. If a front, side or head airbag or belt tensioner has been switched off using the vehicle system tester: › The indicator light  illuminates for around 4 seconds after switching on the ignition and then flashes approximately another 12 seconds in 2 second intervals.

The following text will be displayed in the information display: Airbag/belt tensioner deactivated! The following applies if the airbag has been switched off using the key switch in the storage compartment: › The warning light  comes on for 4 seconds after the ignition has been switched on. › The switched off airbags are indicated in the middle of the dash panel by the lighting up of the warning light     (airbag switched off) » page 161.

WARNING If there is a fault, have the airbag system checked by a specialist garage immediately. Otherwise, there is a risk of the airbag not being activated in the event of an accident.



Exhaust inspection system  The warning light  comes on after the ignition has been switched on. If the warning light does not go out after starting the engine or it lights up when driving, a fault exists in an exhaust relevant component. The engine management system selects an emergency programme which enables you to drive to the near est specialist garage by adopting a gentle style of driving.

Electromechanical power steering/steering lock (KESSY system)   The warning light  comes on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on. If the warning light after switching on the ignition or when driving lights up continuously, a fault exists in the electromechanical power steering.

› If the yellow indicator light lights up , this indicates a partial failure of the power steering and the steering forces can be greater.

› If the red indicator light lights up , this indicates a complete failure of the

power steering and the steering assist has failed (significantly higher steering forces).

Further information » page 110.

Instruments and warning lights

Steering lock (KESSY system) › While the warning light  or  is flashing, the steering lock cannot be released. Further information » page 112, KESSY system. › If the warning light  flashes, a signal tone sonds, and the following message appears in the information display Steering column lock: Workshop! , the electrical steering lock is faulty. The vehicle can be driven to the nearest workshop using extreme caution. › If the warning light  flashes, a signal tone sonds, and the following message appears in the information display Steering column lock faulty. the electrical steering lock is faulty. Switch off the vehicle, do not continue driving and seek assistance from a specialist garage. After switching off the ignition, it is then no longer possible to lock the steering, to activate the electrical components (e.g. radio, navigation system), to switch on the ignition again and to start the engine.

Do not continue your journey if for some reason it is not possible to top up the engine oil under the prevailing conditions. Keep the engine switched off and seek assistance from a specialist garage, otherwise it could lead to severe engine damage. Even if the oil level is correct, do not drive any further if the indicator light is flashing. Also do not leave the engine running at an idling speed. Seek help from the nearest specialist garage. The following text will be displayed in the information display: Oil Pressure: Engine off! Owner's manual!

WARNING If you have to stop for technical reasons, then park the vehicle at a safe distance from the traffic, switch off the engine and activate the hazard warning light system » page 59.

CAUTION The red oil pressure light  is not an oil level indicator! One should therefore check the oil level at regular intervals, preferably after every refuelling stop.

Note If the vehicle battery has been disconnected and reconnected, the yellow indicator light  comes on after switching on the ignition. The warning light must go out after driving a short distance. If the yellow indicator light  does not go out after starting the engine again and a short drive, it is necessary to visit a specialist garage.

Engine oil pressure The warning light  comes on for a few seconds 1) when the ignition is switched on. Stop the vehicle and switch the engine off if the indicator light does not go off after the engine has started or flashes while driving. Check the oil level and top up with engine oil if necessary » page 186. An audible signal sounds three times as an additional warning signal.

The indicator light  on vehicles fitted with an information display does not come on after switching the ignition on, but only if a fault exists or the engine oil level is too low.

Using the system



Engine oil level 



The indicator light  is lit If the warning light  lights up, the quantity of oil in the engine is probably too low. Check engine oil level or top up with engine oil as soon as possible » page 186. An audible signal sounds as a warning signal (1 peep). The following text will be displayed in the information display: Check oil level! The warning light will go out if the bonnet is left open for more than 30 seconds. If no engine oil has been replenished, the warning light will come on again after £ driving about 100 km.

The indicator light  flashes A fault on the engine oil level sensor is indicated additionally by an audible signal and the warning light coming on several times after the ignition has been switched on.

Coolant temperature/coolant level  The warning light  comes on for a few seconds 1) when the ignition is switched on.

In this case have the engine inspected without delay by a specialist garage.

The coolant temperature is too high or the coolant level too low if the warning light  does not go out or flashes while driving.

The following text will be displayed in the information display: Oil sensor: Workshop!



In this case, switch off the engine, check the coolant level and top up the coolant, if necessary.

EPC  fault light (petrol engine)

Do not continue your journey if for some reason it is not possible to top up the coolant under the prevailing conditions. Keep the engine switched off and seek assistance from a specialist garage, as it could otherwise lead to severe engine damage.

The  (Electronic Power Control) warning light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on. If the warning light  does not go out or lights up after starting the engine, a fault exists in the engine control. The engine management system selects an emergency programme which enables you to drive to the nearest specialist garage by adopting a gentle style of driving.



Glow plug system  (diesel engine) If the engine is cold, the indicator light  illuminates when switching on the ignition (pre-heat position) 2 » page 111. The engine can be started after the indicator light goes out. The glow plug indicator light will come on for about 1 second if the engine is at a normal operating temperature or if the outside temperature is above +5 °C. This means that the engine can be started immediately. There is a fault in the glow plug system if the indicator light  does not come on or lights up continuously; contact a specialist garage as soon as possible to obtain assistance. If the warning light  begins to flash while driving, a fault exists in the engine control. The engine management system selects an emergency programme which enables you to drive to the nearest specialist garage by adopting a gentle style of  driving.

An audible signal sounds as a warning signal (3 peeps).

If the coolant is within the specified range, the increased temperature may be caused by an operating problem at the radiator fan. Check the fuse for the radiator fan, replace if necessary » page 216, Fuses in the engine compartment. Do not continue driving if the indicator light does not go off even though the coolant level is correct and the fuse for the fan is in working order. Seek help from a specialist garage. Further information » page 186, Coolant. The following text will be displayed in the information display: Check coolant! Owner's manual!

WARNING If you have to stop for technical reasons, then park the vehicle at a safe distance from the traffic, switch off the engine and activate the hazard warning light system » page 59. ■ Carefully open the coolant expansion bottle. If the engine is hot, the cooling system is pressurized - risk of scalding! It is therefore best to allow the engine to cool down before removing the cap. ■ Do not touch the radiator fan. The radiator fan may switch itself on automatically even if the ignition is off.

■

The indicator light  on vehicles fitted with an information display does not come on after switching the ignition on, but only if the coolant temperature is too high or the coolant level is too low.

Instruments and warning lights



The ESC cannot be switched off with the button  » Fig. 117; only the ASR system is switched off and the indicator light  in the instrument cluster lights up.

Traction control system (ASR)  The warning light  comes on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on.

The indicator light illuminates permanently if there is a fault in the ESC. The following text will be displayed in the information display:

The warning light comes on when driving when a control cycle is activated.

Error: stabilisation control (ESC)

The indicator light illuminates permanently if there is a fault in the ASR.

As the ESC operates in conjunction with the ABS, the ESP indicator light will also come on if the ABS system fails.

The following text will be displayed in the information display: Error: traction control (ASR)

If the indicator light  comes on immediately after starting the engine, the ESC can be switched off for technical reasons. In this case, the ESC can be switched on again by switching the ignition on and off. If the indicator light goes out, the ESC is fully functional again.

The fact that the TCS system operates together with the ABS means that the TCS warning light will also come on if the ABS system is not operating properly. If the indicator light  comes on immediately after starting the engine, the ASR can be switched off for technical reasons. In this case, the ASR can be switched on again by switching the ignition on and off. If the indicator light goes out, the ASR is fully functional again.

Further information » page 116, Stabilisation Control (ESC).

Note If the vehicle's battery has been disconnected and reconnected, the warning light  comes on after switching on the ignition. The warning light must go out after driving a short distance.

Further information » page 117, Traction control system (ASR).

Note If the vehicle's battery has been disconnected and reconnected, the warning light  comes on after switching on the ignition. The warning light must go out after driving a short distance.

Selector lever lock/starting (KESSY system) 

Operate the brake pedal, if the green indicator light  lights up. This is necessary, to be able to move the selector lever from position P or N » page 129.

Switching off traction control system (ASR) 

On vehicles with the KESSY system » page 113, the indicator light  illuminates if the brake pedal is not depressed when starting the engine.

The ASR is switched off by pressing the button » Fig. 118 and the indicator light  illuminates.

Stabilisation control (ESC)  The warning light  comes on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on. When the ESC helps to stabilise the vehicle, the indicator light  flashes in the instrument cluster.

Using the system



Tyre pressure 

The following text will be displayed in the information display: Traction control (ASR) deactivated.



The warning light  lights up, if there is a substantial drop in inflation pressure in one of the tyres. Reduce the speed and check or correct the inflation pressure in all of the tyres as soon as possible » page 195. An audible signal sounds as a warning signal. If the warning light flashes, there is a system fault. Visit a specialist garage and have the fault rectified. Further information » page 199, Tyre control display.

Note If the battery has been disconnected, the indicator light  illuminates after the ignition is switched on. The warning light must go out after driving a short distance.

Antilock brake system (ABS)  The warning light comes on for a few seconds after the ignition has been switched on or when starting the engine. The warning light goes out after an automatic check sequence has been completed. A fault in the ABS The system is not functioning properly if the ABS warning light  does not go out within a few seconds after switching on the ignition, does not light up at all, or lights up while driving. The following text will be displayed in the information display: Error: ABS The vehicle will only be braked by the normal brake system. Visit a specialist garage immediately and adjust your style of driving appropriately as you will not know how great the damage is. Further information » page 117, Antilock brake system (ABS). A fault in the entire brake system If the ABS warning light  comes on together with the brake system warning light , there is a fault not only in the ABS but also in another part of the brake system » .

WARNING If you have to stop for technical reasons, then park the vehicle at a safe distance from the traffic, switch off the engine and activate the hazard warning light system » page 59. ■ If the brake system indicator light  comes on together with the ABS indicator light  stop the vehicle immediately and check the brake fluid level in the reservoir » page 188. If the fluid level has dropped below the MIN marking, do not continue your journey - risk of accident! Get professional assistance. ■ The following guidelines should be observed when opening the bonnet and checking the brake fluid level » page 183, Engine compartment. ■ If the brake fluid is at the correct level, the ABS control function has failed. The rear wheels may then block very rapidly when braking. In certain circ*mstances, this can result in the rear end of the car breaking away - risk of skidding! Carefully drive to the nearest specialist garage and have the fault rectified. ■



Bonnet  The warning light  comes on if the bonnet is unlocked. If the engine bonnet unlocks while driving , the warning light lights up and an audible signal sounds. The warning light comes on even when the ignition is switched off. The warning light lights up for a maximum of 5 minutes. In vehicles with an information display, this indicator light is replaced by a vehicle symbol » page 21.



Seat belt warning light  The warning light  comes on after the ignition is switched on as a reminder for the driver and front passenger to fasten the seat belt. The warning light only goes out if the driver or front passenger has fastened his seat belt. If the seat belt has not been fastened by the driver or front passenger, a permanent warning signal sounds at vehicle speeds greater than 20 km/h and simulta£ neously the warning light  flashes.

Instruments and warning lights

If the seat belt is not fastened by the driver or front passenger during the next 90 seconds, the warning signal is deactivated and the indicator light  lights up permanently. Further information » page 150, Seat belts.

In vehicles with an information display, this indicator light is replaced by a vehicle symbol » page 21. 

The warning light  comes on for a few seconds 1) when the ignition is switched on.

The following text will be displayed in the information display: Top up wash fluid!

If the indicator light  comes on, contact a specialist garage immediately and have the brake pads on all of the wheels inspected. The following text will be displayed in the information display:

Brake system  The indicator light  illuminates if the brake fluid level is too low or there is a fault in the ABS. If the indicator light  flashes and an audible signal sounds three times, stop and check the brake fluid level » .

The warning light  comes on when the ignition is switched on if the luggage compartment door is open. If the boot lid opens while driving , the warning light lights up and an audible signal sounds.

The following text will be displayed in the information display: Brake fluid: Owner's manual! (Bremsflüssigkeit:

The warning light comes on even when the ignition is switched off. The warning light lights up for a maximum of 5 minutes.

Open door  The warning light  comes on, if one or several doors are opened. If one of the doors opens while driving, the warning light lights  up and an audible signal sounds. The warning light comes on even when the ignition is switched off. The warning light lights up for a maximum of 5 minutes.

The indicator light  on vehicles fitted with an information display does not come on after switching the ignition on, but only if a fault exists.

Using the system



Boot lid 

In vehicles with an information display, this indicator light is replaced by a vehicle symbol » page 21.

Windshield washer fluid level  If the windshield washer fluid level is too low, the indicator light  comes on when the ignition is switched on. Top up with liquid » page 189, Windshield washer system.

Thickness of brake pads 

Check brake pads!



If there is a fault in the ABS which also influences the function of the normal brake system (e.g. distribution of brake pressure), the ABS warning light  comes on together with the brake system warning light . An audible signal is also emitted. Visit a specialist garage immediately and adjust your style of driving accordingly as you will not know how great the damage is nor the limitation it is placing on the braking efficiency. Further information » page 114, Brakes and brake assist systems.

WARNING If you have to stop for technical reasons, then park the vehicle at a safe distance from the traffic, switch off the engine and activate the hazard warning light system » page 59. ■ A fault to the braking system can increase the vehicle's braking distance! ■ The following guidelines should be observed when opening the bonnet and checking the brake fluid level » page 183, Engine compartment. ■ If the brake system indicator light  does not go out a few seconds after switching on the ignition or comes on when driving, stop immediately and check the brake fluid level in the reservoir » page 188. If the fluid level has dropped below the MIN marking, do not continue your journey - risk of accident! Get professional assistance.

CAUTION If the indicator light  (cooling system fault) comes on in addition to the indicator light  on the display when driving, stop immediately and switch the engine off risk of engine damage!

■



Fuel reserve  The warning light  will come on if the fuel level is less than 9 litres. An audible signal sounds as a warning signal. 

The following text will be displayed in the information display: Please refuel! Range...km

Note

Handbrake 

The Text in the information display goes out only after refuelling and driving a short distance.

The warning light  comes on if the handbrake is applied. An audible warning is also given if you drive the vehicle for at least 3 seconds at a speed of more than 6 km/h. The following text will be displayed in the information display: Release parking brake!

Dynamo  The warning light  comes on after the ignition has been switched on. It should go out after the engine has started. If the indicator light does not go out after the engine has started or comes on when driving, then drive to the nearest specialist garage. As the vehicle battery will discharge during this process, switch off all non-essential electrical components.

WARNING If you have to stop for technical reasons, then park the vehicle at a safe distance from the traffic, switch off the engine and activate the hazard warning light system » page 59.



Temperature of the clutches of the automatic gearbox DSG  

If the temperature of the clutches for the automatic gearbox DSG is too high, the symbol  and the warning are shown in the information display: Gearbox overheated. Stop! Owner's man.! Stop! An audible signal sounds as a warning signal.

WARNING If you have to stop for technical reasons, then park the vehicle at a safe distance from the traffic, switch off the engine and activate the hazard warning light system » page 59.

CAUTION If the clutches of the automatic gearbox are too hot, stop the vehicle and switch off the engine. Wait until the symbol  and the warning go out - risk of gearbox damage! The journey can be continued as soon as the symbol and the warning go out.

Instruments and warning lights



Note

Unlocking and locking

Please approach a ŠKODA Service Partner if you lose a key as they can obtain a new one for you.

Vehicle key



Replacing the battery in the remote control key

Introductory information Fig. 9 Remote control key

Fig. 10 Remote control key - remove cover/remove battery

Two remote control keys are provided with the vehicle » Fig. 9.

WARNING Always withdraw the key whenever you leave the vehicle - even if it is only for a short time. This is particularly important if children are left in the vehicle. The children might otherwise start the engine or operate electrical equipment (e.g. power windows) - risk of injury! ■ Do not withdraw the ignition key from the ignition lock until the vehicle has come to a stop. The steering lock might otherwise engage unintentionally risk of accident! ■

CAUTION Each key contains electronic components; therefore it must be protected against moisture and severe shocks. ■ Keep the groove of the keys completely clean as impurities (textile fibres, dust, etc.) have a negative effect on the functionality of the locking cylinder and ignition lock. ■

Using the system

Each remote control key contains a battery which is housed under the cover B » Fig. 10. If the battery is discharged, the red warning light A does not flash after you press a button on the remote control key » Fig. 9. We recommend that you ask a ŠKODA Service Partner to replace the key battery. However, if you would like to replace the discharged battery yourself proceed as follows: › Flip out the key. › Press off the battery cover with your thumb or using a flat screwdriver in the region of arrows 1 » Fig. 10. › Remove the discharged battery from the key by pressing the battery downwards in the region of arrow 2 » Fig. 10. › Insert the new battery. Ensure that the “+” symbol on the battery is facing upwards. The correct polarity is shown on the battery cover. › Place the battery cover on the key and press it down until it clicks into place.

CAUTION Pay attention to the correct polarity when changing the battery. The replacement battery must have the same specification as the original battery.

■ ■

For the sake of the environment

Central locking system

Dispose of the used battery in accordance with national legal provisions.

Introductory information

Note The system has to be synchronised, if the vehicle cannot be unlocked or locked with the remote control key after replacing the battery » page 37.



Child safety lock

When using the central locking and unlocking system, all the doors and the fuel filler flap are locked or unlocked at the same time (if it was not set differently in the menu point Settings - Convenience of the information display). The boot lid is unlocked when opening. The boot lid can then be opened by pressing the handle on the lower edge of the boot lid » page 41. Operation of the central locking system is possible: › with the remote control key » page 36, › with the central locking button » page 35 › from the outside using the vehicle key » page 40.

Fig. 11 Child safety locks on the rear doors

Indicator light in the driver's door After locking the vehicle, the warning light flashes for around 2 seconds in quick succession, afterwards it begins to flash evenly at longer intervals. If the vehicle is locked and the safe securing system » page 34 is not operating, the indicator light in the driver door flashes for about 2 seconds fast, goes out and starts to flash evenly at longer intervals after about 30 seconds. If the indicator light first of all flashes fast for about 2 seconds, afterwards lights up for about 30 seconds without interruption and then flashes slowly, there is a fault in the system of the central locking or in the interior monitor and in the towing protection monitoring » page 37. Seek help from a specialist garage.

The child safety lock prevents the rear door from being opened from the inside. The door can only be opened from the outside. You can switch the child safety lock on and off using the vehicle key.

Convenience operation of windows The windows can be opened and closed when locking and unlocking the vehicle » page 48.

Switching child safety lock on

› Use the vehicle key to turn the slit in the rear door in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 11.

Switching child safety lock off › Use the vehicle key to turn the slit to the right in the opposite direction to the arrow.



Individual settings 

Opening a single door This selection function makes it possible to only unlock the driver's door. The other doors and the fuel filler flap remain locked and are only unlocked after being opened again. Unlocking a vehicle side door This selection function enables to unlock both doors on the driver's side. The other doors and the fuel filler flap remain locked and are only unlocked after being £ opened again.

Unlocking and locking

Unlocking the vehicle with the KESSY system This selection function enables to unlock all the doors, individual doors, both doors on the left and right vehicle side or to unlock the driver and front passenger door at the same time. The other doors and the fuel filler flap remain locked and are only unlocked after being unlocked again using the unlock button on the remote control key » Fig. 9 or the central locking button » Fig. 12. Automatic locking and unlocking All the doors and the boot lid are locked automatically once the car reaches a speed of about 15 km/h. If the ignition key is withdrawn, the car is then automatically unlocked again. In addition, it is possible for the driver or front passenger to unlock the vehicle by pressing the central locking button  » page 35 or by pulling the door opening lever on one of the front doors.

gins to flash evenly at longer intervals. It is not possible to open the doors with the door handle either from the inside or from the outside. This acts as an effective deterrent for attempts to break into your vehicle. The safe securing system can be deactivated within 2 seconds by double locking the vehicle. If the safe securing system is not in operation: › the indicator light in the driver door flashes rapidly for about 2 seconds, goes out and starts to flash at regular, longer intervals after about 30 seconds, › is the filler flap locked. The safe securing system is activated again the next time the vehicle is unlocked and locked. If the vehicle is locked and the safe securing system is deactivated, the vehicle can be opened from the inside by pulling the door opening lever.

WARNING

Locked doors prevent unwanted entry into the vehicle from outside, for example at road crossings. Locked doors do, however, make it more difficult for rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency - danger to life!

If the vehicle is locked from the outside and the safe securing system is activated, there must not be any person in the vehicle as it is then no longer possible to open either a door or a window from the inside. The locked doors make it more difficult for rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency hazard!

Note You can have the individual settings activated by a ŠKODA Service Partner or you can activate them yourself with the help of the information display » page 20. ■ In the event of an accident in which the airbags are deployed, the locked doors are automatically unlocked in order to enable rescuers to gain access to the vehicle. ■ Only the driver's door can be unlocked or locked using the key if the central locking system fails » page 40, Emergency unlocking and locking of the driver's door. The other doors and the boot lid can be manually locked or unlocked. ■ Emergency locking of the door » page 40.  ■ Emergency unlocking of the boot lid » page 43. ■

Safe securing system The central locking system is equipped with a safe securing system. The door locks are blocked automatically if the vehicle is locked from the outside. The warning light flashes for around 2 seconds in quick succession, afterwards it be-

Using the system

Note The anti-theft alarm system is activated when the vehicle is locked even if the safe securing system is deactivated. The interior monitor is however not activated. ■ After locking the vehicle, you will be informed that the safe securing system is activated by means of the message CHECK DEADLOCK on the instrument cluster display. On vehicles that are equipped with an information display, the following message will appear Check deadlock! Owner's manual! appears. ■



WARNING

Central locking button Fig. 12 Central locking system

The central locking system also operates if the ignition is switched off. Children should never be left unattended in the vehicle since it is difficult to provide assistance from the outside when the doors are locked. Locked doors make it difficult for rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency - hazard!

Note If the safe securing system is activated» page 34, the door opening lever and the central locking buttons do not operate. If the vehicle was not locked from the outside, it can also be unlocked and locked with the rocker switch on the door opening lever of the driver or front passenger door » Fig. 12 even without the ignition switched on. Locking all doors and the boot lid Press the bottom part of the button » Fig. 12. The symbol  in the button comes on. Unlocking all doors and the boot lid Press the top part of the button » Fig. 12. The symbol  in the button is no longer illuminated. The following applies if your vehicle has been locked using the central locking button:

› It is not possible to open the doors or the boot lid from the outside (safety feature, e.g. when stopping at traffic lights etc.).

› Doors can be unlocked individually from the inside and opened by pulling the

door opening lever. › If at least one door has been opened, the vehicle cannot be locked. › In the event of an accident in which the airbags are deployed, the locked doors are automatically unlocked from the inside in order to enable rescuers to gain access to the vehicle. By pressing and holding down the top or bottom part of the rocker switch in the driver's door, the windows can be conveniently closed or opened.



Remote control Introductory information You can use the remote control key: › to unlock and lock the car, › unlock or open the boot lid, › Opening and closing window. The transmitter with the battery is housed in the handle of the remote control key. The receiver is located in the interior of the vehicle. The operating range of the remote control key is approx. 10 m. But this range of the remote control can be reduced if the batteries are weak. The key has a fold-open key bit which can be used for unlocking and locking the car manually and also for starting the engine. If a lost key is replaced or if the receiver unit has been repaired or replaced, the system must be initialised by a ŠKODA Service Partner. Only then can the remote control key be used again.

Note ■ The remote control is automatically deactivated when the ignition is switched on. ■ The operation of the remote control may temporarily be affected by interference from transmitters close to the car and which operate in the same frequency £ range (e.g. mobile phone, TV transmitter).

Unlocking and locking

The battery must be replaced if the central locking or anti-theft alarm system does react to the remote control at less than 3 metres away » page 32. ■ If the driver door is open, the vehicle cannot be locked using the remote control key.

Folding out the key bit › Press the button 4 .

■

Unlocking and locking car Fig. 13 Remote control key



Folding in the key bit › Press the button 4 and fold in the key bit. The turn signal lights flash twice as confirmation that the vehicle has been unlocked. If the vehicle is unlocked using button 1 and none of the doors or the boot lid are opened within the next 30 seconds, the vehicle is automatically locked again and the safe securing system or anti-theft alarm system is reactivated. This function is intended to prevent the car being unlocked unintentionally. In addition, when the car is unlocked, the electrically adjustable seats and exterior mirrors move into the position assigned to this key. The stored setting of driver seat and exterior mirrors is retrieved. When the vehicle is unlocked or locked, the interior lights and entry lighting are automatically switched on or off via the door contact.

Unlocking the vehicle  1 for about 1 second.

› Press the button

Locking the vehicle  › Press the button 3 for about 1 second.

Display of the locking The turn signal lights flash once to confirm that the vehicle has been correctly locked. If the doors or the boot lid remain open after the vehicle has been locked, the turn signal lights do not flash until they have been closed.

WARNING

Deactivating the safe securing system › Press the button 3 twice within 2 seconds. Further information » page 34.

If the car is locked from the outside and the safe securing system is activated, there must not be any person in the car as it is then not possible to open either a door or a window from the inside. The locked doors make it more difficult for rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency - hazard!

Unlocking the small boot lid  › Press the button 2 » Fig. 13 for about 0.5 second. Further information » page 41. Automatically raising the small boot lid  › Press the button 2 » Fig. 13 for about 1 second. Further information » page 41. Unlocking the boot lid without an electrical control (Combi)  › Press the button 2 » Fig. 13 for about 1 second. Further information » page 42. Automatically opening the boot lid (Combi)  › Press the button 2 » Fig. 13 for about 1 second. Further information » page 45.

Using the system

Note Only operate the remote control when the doors and boot lid are closed and the vehicle is in your line of sight. ■ To avoid the car being locked inadvertently once in the car, the lock button  of the remote control must not be pressed before the key is inserted into the ignition lock. Should this happen, press the unlock button  of the remote control. ■ The automatic raising of the small boot lid can be impaired at temperatures be low +4 °C. ■

When is the alarm triggered?

Synchronising the remote control

The following security areas of the locked vehicle are monitored: › Bonnet, › Boot lid, › Doors, › Ignition lock, › Vehicle inclination » page 37, › Vehicle interior» page 37, › A drop in voltage of the on-board power supply, › Socket of the factory-fitted towing device.

If the vehicle cannot be unlocked by actuating the remote control system then it is possible that the code in the key and the control unit in the vehicle are no longer synchronised. This can occur when the buttons on the radio-operated key are actuated a number of times outside of the operative range of the equipment or the battery on the remote control was replaced. This means it is necessary to synchronise the code as follows: › press any button on the remote control key, › pressing of the button means that the door will unlock with the key within 1 minute.

Anti-theft alarm system



An alarm is immediately triggered if either of the two battery terminals is disconnected while the anti-theft alarm system is activated. How is the alarm switched off? The alarm is switched off by unlocking the vehicle with the radio remote control or switching on the ignition.

Introductory information The anti-theft alarm system increases the level of protection against people seeking to break into the vehicle. The system triggers audible and visual warning signals if an attempt is made to break into the vehicle. How is the alarm system activated? The anti-theft alarm system is activated when the vehicle is locked with the radio remote control or the key in the driver's door » page 37, Interior monitor and towing protection monitoring . The door contact monitoring is activated approx. 15 seconds after the locking. The interior and the towing protection monitoring are activated approx. 30 seconds after the locking. If a door is opened during activation, the monitoring is only activated 5 seconds after closing. How is the alarm system deactivated? The alarm system is deactivated by pressing the unlock button on the radio remote control. The anti-theft alarm system is reactivated if the vehicle is not opened within 30 seconds after transmitting the radio signal.

Note The working life of the alarm siren is 6 years. More detailed information is available by a specialist garage. ■ Before leaving the car, it must be checked that all of the doors, windows and the electric sliding/tilting roof are properly closed to ensure the full functionality of the anti-theft alarm system. ■ Coding of the radio remote control and the receiver unit precludes the use of the radio remote control from other vehicles. ■



Interior monitor and towing protection monitoring  Fig. 14 Button for interior monitor and towing protection monitoring

The alarm system is also deactivated if you unlock the driver door using the key within 45 seconds of locking the vehicle. If the vehicle is unlocked within 45 seconds by inserting the key into the driver door, the key must be inserted into the ignition lock and the ignition switched on within 15 seconds of unlocking the door to deactivate the alarm system. The alarm is triggered if the ignition is not switched on within 15 seconds.

Unlocking and locking

The interior monitor detects movements inside the car and then triggers the alarm.

Unlocking and locking car

Switch off the interior monitor and towing protection monitoring › Switch off the ignition. › Open the driver door. › Press the button  on the centre column on the driver side » Fig. 14, the symbol  that lights up in the button changes from red to orange. › Lock the vehicle within 30 seconds. The interior monitor and the towing protection monitoring are switched on again automatically the next time the car is locked.

Note Switch off the interior monitor and the towing protection monitoring if there is a possibility of the alarm being triggered by movements from (e.g. children or animals) within the vehicle interior or if the vehicle has to be transported (e.g. by train or ship) or towed. ■ The opened glasses storage compartment reduces the effectiveness of the interior monitor. To ensure the full functionality of the interior monitor, the glasses storage compartment must always be closed before locking the vehicle.

Fig. 15 KESSY: Designation of the areas and unlocking/locking the vehicle

■

To lock/unlock a vehicle fitted with the KESSY system, it is necessary for the valid remote control key to be located no more than around 1.5 m from the front door handle or boot lid. 

KESSY system

Unlocking the vehicle › If you hold the door handle on the front door or cover the sensor 2 » Fig. 15 with the whole palm of your hand, the vehicle will unlock. If you cover the sensor 2 at the same time as the sensor 1 when unlocking the vehicle, it is not unlocked.

Introductory information The KESSY system (Keyless Entry Start Exit System) enables a comfort unlocking and locking of the vehicle and a start-up without actively using the remote control key. When unlocking and locking the vehicle or for starting the engine it suffices to carry the key with you, e.g. in your pocket.

Locking the vehicle › Close the driver or front passenger door. › If you touch the sensor 1 with your fingers, the vehicle is locked (while doing so do not hold the door handle, otherwise the vehicle cannot be locked). › On vehicles fitted with automatic gearbox, the selector lever must be moved into the position P before unlocking.

The functions of the central locking system, safe securing system and anti-theft alarm system correspond to vehicles without the KESSY system. Only the control elements are different. Control elements of the system: › Sensor on the outside of the door handle for the front door 1 » Fig. 15 - serves for locking the vehicle, › Sensor on the inside of the door handle for the front door 2 » Fig. 15 - serves for unlocking the vehicle.

Using the system

If a valid remote control key is located in the area A » Fig. 15 or B of the vehicle, it is possible to unlock the vehicle via the relevant door of the area in which the key is located. This means, if the key is located in the area A , the vehicle can be unlocked from the handle on the front left door. If the valid key is located in the area C , it is possible to unlock the boot lid.

Deactivating the safe securing system › Use your fingers to touch the sensor 1 twice within 2 seconds. 

Unlocking and locking the boot lid › Press on the handle of the boot lid, and the lid is unlocked. If the vehicle is fitted with the electric boot lid, the lid starts to open after pressing the handle.

› Close the boot lid and it is locked.

Messages in the instrument cluster display

Check locking After locking the vehicle by means of the sensor 1 » Fig. 15, it is not possible to unlock the vehicle using the sensor 2 for 2 seconds. Thus, it is possible to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling on the handle.

The following messages can be displayed in the information display or display of the instrument cluster: Key not found. or No Key This message is displayed when you wish to start the engine and the system cannot detect a valid key in the vehicle. This can occur if the key is outside the vehicle, the battery in the key is discharged, the key is defective or the electromagnetic field is strongly disturbed. This message is also displayed when the ignition is switched on or the engine is running and the system cannot detect a valid key in the vehicle.

CAUTION After leaving the vehicle, it does not lock automatically, the procedure for locking the vehicle must therefore be observed.

Note If the vehicle battery or battery in the remote control key is weak or discharged, the vehicle may not be able to be unlocked or locked via the KESSY system. In this case, use the emergency unlocking or emergency locking of the driver's door » page 40. ■ The KESSY system can find the valid key, even if it was left in the front area of the vehicle's roof for example. Make sure you know where the valid remote control key is at all times. ■ When locking/unlocking the vehicle using the sensors 1 » Fig. 15 or 2 do not use gloves or other objects that might prevent the hand from coming into direct contact with the sensor. ■ If you unlock the vehicle by means of the sensor in the handle and do not open a door or the boot lid within the next 30 seconds, the vehicle will lock again automatically and the safe securing system or anti-theft alarm system will be reactivated. This function is intended to prevent the car being unlocked unintentionally.  ■

Protection against inadvertently locking the key in the vehicle

There is a fault in the KESSY system, contact your specialist garage. Renew key battery! or KEY BATTERY Low voltage of the remote control key battery, change the battery.



Parking the vehicle If the vehicle is not unlocked within 60 hours, the sensors 1 » Fig. 15 and 2 in the handle of the front passenger's door are automatically deactivated. For reactivation, one of the following conditions must be met: ■ unlocking the driver's door by means of the sensor 2 » Fig. 15, ■ pressing the handle of the boot lid, ■ unlocking the vehicle using the button on the remote control key, ■ Emergency unlocking of the driver's door » page 40. If the vehicle is not unlocked within 90 hours, the sensors 1 » Fig. 15 and 2 in the handle of the driver's door are also automatically deactivated. For reactivation, one of the following conditions must be met:

If the key, which was used to lock the vehicle, remains in the vehicle in the area D » Fig. 15 after locking and closing all of the doors including the boot lid, the protection against inadvertently locking the key in the vehicle is activated and the vehicle unlocks itself again.

■ ■

Key in vehicle. or KEY IN VEHICLE is displayed in the information display or display of the instrument cluster. Additionally, on vehicles which are fitted with the anti-theft alarm system, an audible signal sounds.

Keyless faulty. or CHECK KEYLESS.

unlocking the vehicle using the button on the remote control key, Emergency unlocking of the driver's door » page 40.



Unlocking and locking

Emergency locking of the doors

Convenience operation of windows If you hold your finger on the sensor 1 » Fig. 15 for more than 2 seconds while locking the vehicle, the opened windows and the panoramic sliding roof are closed. If the sensor 1 is released, the closing process is interrupted. If the sensor 1 is touched again, the closing process for the windows and panoramic sliding roof is continued.

Fig. 17 Rear door: Emergency locking of the door

If you immediately touch the sensor 2 during the closing process of the windows and panoramic sliding roof by means of the sensor 1 , all of the windows and  panoramic sliding roof are opened again.

Emergency unlocking and locking of the driver's door

An emergency locking mechanism is located on the face side of the doors which have no locking cylinder, it is only visible after opening the door.

Fig. 16 Handle on the driver's door: covered locking cylinder

Locking › Remove the panel A » Fig. 17. › Insert the key into the slot B and turn it into the horizontal position in the direction of the arrow (mirror-inverted on the right doors). › Replace the cover. After closing the door, it no longer be opened from the outside. The door can be unlocked from the inside by pulling on the door handle again, and then opened from the outside.

If the remote control key or the central locking system does not operate, the driver's door can be unlocked or locked manually. › Pull on the handle. › Push the vehicle key into the recess on the bottom side of the cover and fold upwards. › Insert the vehicle key bit into the lock cylinder and unlock or lock the vehicle.

Boot lid

ä 

Introduction

This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Automatic locking of the boot lid Twindoor - small boot lid Twindoor - large boot lid Boot lid (Combi) Emergency unlocking of the boot lid

Using the system



41 41 42 42 43 £

There is a risk of unwanted entry into the vehicle before the boot lid is locked automatically. The vehicle should therefore always be locked with the button  on the radio remote control.

WARNING Ensure that the lock is properly engaged after closing the boot lid. Otherwise, the boot lid might open suddenly when driving even if the boot lid lock was closed - risk of accident! ■ Never drive with the boot lid fully opened or slightly ajar otherwise exhaust gases may get into the interior of the vehicle - risk of poisoning! ■ Never position any body parts under the cover of the locking eye trim panel for the boot lid lock - risk of injury! ■



Twindoor - small boot lid

Note After closing the boot lid, it is automatically locked within 1 second and the anti-theft alarm system is activated. This applies only if the vehicle was locked before closing the boot lid. ■ The function of the hand grip on the bottom edge of the boot lid is deactivated when starting off or as of a speed of more than 5 km/hour. The function of the hand grip is activated again after stopping the vehicle and after opening the driver or front passenger door or after pressing the button 1 on the remote control key. ■ Repeated opening and closing of the boot lid can lead to a temporary failure of the function due to the overheating protection of the motors of the Twindoor system. ■

Automatic locking of the boot lid

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 40.

If the vehicle was locked with the button  on the remote control key before the boot lid was closed, the lid is automatically locked as soon as it is closed. The delayed automatic locking function of the boot lid can be activated on your vehicle. The following applies following activation of this function: If the boot lid was locked with the button  on the remote control key 2 » page 36, then it is possible to open the lid within a limited period of it being closed.

Fig. 18 Handle of boot lid/opened small boot lid

ä 

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 40. ings

The small boot lid » Fig. 18 can be opened after unlocking the vehicle. Open small boot lid › Press on the handle at the bottom side of the boot lid » Fig. 18 -  and the boot lid lifts up automatically » Fig. 18 - . Close small boot lid › Pull down the boot lid and close it with a slight swing. The bonnet locks automatically. The small boot lid can also be opened by pressing the button control key 2 for approx. 1 second.



on the remote

A handle which makes the closing easier is located on the inner panelling of the boot lid.

If you wish, a ŠKODA Service Partner can activate or deactivate the delayed automatic locking of the boot lid. The Service Partner will also provide any further information that is required.

Unlocking and locking



Twindoor - large boot lid

Boot lid (Combi) Fig. 20 Handle of boot lid

Fig. 19 Handle of boot lid/opened large boot lid

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 40. ings

The boot lid can be opened by pressing the handle above the licence plate after unlocking the vehicle using the remote control key or key.

The large boot lid » Fig. 19 can be opened after unlocking the vehicle.

Opening the boot lid › Press the handle and simultaneously lift up the boot lid » Fig. 20.

Open large boot lid › Press the handle 1 » Fig. 19 on the bottom edge of the boot lid. › Wait until the brake light 2 in the rear window flashes twice. › Press the handle 3 and simultaneously lift up the boot lid.

Closing the boot lid › Pull down the boot lid and close it with a slight swing. A handle which makes the closing easier is located on the inner panelling of the boot lid.

Close large boot lid › Pull down the boot lid and close it with a slight swing. The bonnet locks automatically. A handle which makes the closing easier is located on the inner panelling of the boot lid.

Using the system

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 40. ings



Emergency unlocking of the boot lid

Fig. 21 Emergency unlocking of the boot lid

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 40. ings

The boot lid can be unlocked manually if there is a fault in the central locking system. Unlocking the boot lid › Fold the rear seat backrest forward » page 78. › Insert the vehicle key into the slot in the trim panel as far as the stop » Fig. 21 . › Unlock the lid by moving it in the direction of the arrow. › Open the boot lid. Unlocking the boot lid (Combi). › Fold the rear seat backrest forward » page 78. › Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the opening in the trim in the direction of the arrow 1 » Fig. 21 as far as the stop. › Unlock the lid upwards in the direction of the arrow 2 » Fig. 21. › Open the boot lid.



Unlocking and locking

CAUTION

Electric boot lid (Combi)

In a critical situation, the movement of the lid can be stopped by applying an abrupt and quick force against the lid. ■ Before opening or closing the lid, check if there are any objects in the opening or closing range which could obstruct the movement (e.g. a load on the roof luggage rack or on the trailer, etc.) - risk of causing damage to the lid! ■ Ensure that there is at least 10 cm of clearance above the opened boot lid (e.g. distance from the garage ceiling). Otherwise, it may happen that the clearance above the opened lid is no longer sufficient after relieving the vehicle of a load (e.g. after unloading) - risk of causing damage to the lid. ■ Do not try to manually close the lid during the electric closing process. Damage can occur to the system of the electric boot lid. ■ If the lid is closed manually, it must be ensured that when moving the lid into the lock, pressure is applied to the centre edge of the lid above the ŠKODA logo. ■

Introductory information

Fig. 22 Operation of the lid

Note If the electrical opening of the lid was triggered using the button on the remote control key or the button on the centre console, an intermittent audible signal sounds while the lid is moving. ■ The electric boot lid is fitted with a force limiter. If the lid hits an obstacle when closing, it stops and an audible signal sounds. If you rapidly enter the vehicle during the opening or closing process of the boot lid, the whole vehicle may jerk and as a result the movement of the lid can be interrupted - the force limiter is activated. ■ Manually opening and closing the boot lid is only possible in exceptional cases, and must be completed slowly and without sudden movements as close to the centre of the lid as possible. Handling the sides of the lid can damage the electric lid. ■ In certain circ*mstances, if the lid is loaded (e.g by a thick layer of snow), the opening process of the lid can be interrupted. The lid must be protected to ensure  its electrical functionality. ■

Fig. 23 Operation of the lid - button on the centre console

There are several possibities for operating the electric boot lid: ■ ■ ■ ■

By pressing the boot lid remote release button on the remote control key for approx. 1 second, using the handle A » Fig. 22 above the licence plate, using the button B on the bottom edge of the boot lid (only accessible when the lid is opened), using the button on the centre console » Fig. 23.

Using the system

Operation of the boot lid using the handle A

Description of the operation Fig. 24 Designation of the areas

Area

Closed lid

Open lid

Opening







Stop







Closing







Action

The operation of the boot lid, using the handle A is only possible when the vehicle is unlocked » Fig. 22.

When operating the lid, the system distinguishes 3 areas » Fig. 24 where the function of the individual operating elements changes. The end positions of the lid - fully closed in the secured lock and fully opened - differ as well. Explanation of symbols  Feasible action

Operation of the boot lid using the inner button B Area Closed Action lid 1 2

Open lid

Opening









Stop







Closing







Operating the boot lid with the inner button B is only possible when the boot lid is opened » Fig. 22.



Non-feasible action



Movement in the opposite direction to the previous movement

Operation of the boot lid using the remote control key and the button on the centre console Area Closed Open Action lid lid 1 2 3 Opening





Stop







Closing



When the ignition is switched on, the operation of the boot lid does not function using the remote control key. If the vehicle was locked from the outside, the operation of the boot lid does not function using the button on the centre console » Fig. 23. If a trailer is coupled to the vehicle, the operation of the boot lid does not function using the remote control key or the button on the centre console.

Audible signals Audible signals are active during the electrical operation of the lid. They serve as a safety function and provide information about the success of a performed action. Signals

Status

Interrupted tone

Open (using the button on the remote control key or the button on the centre console » Fig. 23)

1 continuous tone

Force limiter

3 rising tones

Confirmation of the storage of the lid position

3 identical tones

fault

Note The expansion of the area 3 » Fig. 24 changes proportionally, depending on the setting of the top position of the lid » page 46. When setting the top position of the lid in the area 2 , the area 3 is not active, the expansion of the area 2 changes proportionally to the set top position of the lid.

Unlocking and locking



Examples of operational malfunctions Description of the malfuncPossible solutions tion

Setting the top position of the lid If the space for opening the lid is restricted (e.g. height of garage) or for more convenient operation (e.g. according to a person's height), it is possible to set the boot lid in the top position.

The lid cannot be lifted out of Emergency unlocking of the lid » page 43 the lock.

Setting the top position of the lid › Stop the lid in the desired position (electrically or manually). › Press the inner button B » Fig. 22 and press and hold it for approx. 3 seconds. Storing the position in the memory of the control unit is confirmed with an audible signal.

The lid does not react to an opening signal

Remove the possible obstacle (e.g. snow), open the lid again » page 45 Press the handle on the lower edge of the boot lid and pull the lid upwards

The lid remains in the top po- Manually close the lid (slowly and without sudsition den movements)

Deleting the set position of the lid › Carefully lift up the lid manually to the maximum opening position. › Press and hold the inner button B for approx. 3 seconds. An audible signal sounds and the height which was originally set is deleted from the memory of the control unit, while the basic position of the top lid position is again set.

Note If necessary, we recommend that you ask a ŠKODA Service Partner.



Note The lid always opens at the height which was last stored in the memory of the control unit. ■ The top position which is reached when the lid opens automatically, is always lower than the maximum top position which can be reached when the lid is opened manually.

Electric power windows

■

Operational problems If the battery is disconnected and reconnected while the boot lid is open, it is necessary to activate the electric boot lid system. Activation refers to the initialisation of the control unit by manually closing the lid. Thus, the end position of the lid is stored under fully closed in secured lock. Possible malfunctions of the electric boot lid:

Using the system

ä 

Introduction

This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Buttons on the driver's door Button on the front passenger door and rear doors Force limiter of the power windows Window convenience operation Operational faults

47 48 48 48 49 £

WARNING

Buttons on the driver's door

If the vehicle is locked from the outside, do not leave anybody in the vehicle as it is not possible to open the windows from the inside in the event of an emergency. ■ The system is fitted with a force limiter » page 48. If there is an obstacle, the closing process is stopped and the window goes down by several centimetres. The windows should nevertheless be closed carefully! Otherwise these can cause severe crushing injuries! ■ It is recommended to deactivate the electrically operated power windows in the rear doors (safety pushbutton) S » Fig. 25 when children are being transported on the rear seats. ■

CAUTION Keep the windows clean to ensure the correct functionality of the electric windows. ■ In the event that the windows are frozen, first of all eliminate the ice » page 177 and only then operate the power windows otherwise the power window mechanism could be damaged. ■ When leaving the locked vehicle make sure that the windows are closed at all times. ■

Note After switching the ignition off, it is still possible to open or close the windows for approx. 10 minutes. The power windows are only switched off completely once the driver or front passenger door are opened. ■ When driving always use the existing heating, air conditioning and ventilation system for ventilating the interior of the vehicle. If the windows are opened, dust as well as other dirt can get into the vehicle and in addition the wind noise is more at certain speeds. ■ The convenience opening of the windows by means of the key in the driver's lock is only possible within 45 seconds of deactivating or activating the alarm sys tem. ■

Fig. 25 Buttons on the driver's door

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 46. ings

The power windows operate only when ignition is switched on. Opening a window › A window is opened by pressing lightly on the respective button in the door. The opening process is stopped when the button is released. › Additionally, the window can be opened automatically (fully open) by pressing the button to the stop. Renewed pressing of the button causes the window to stop immediately. Closing a window › A window is closed through pulling lightly on the respective button in the door. The closing process stops when one releases the button. › Additionally, the window can be closed automatically (fully closed) by pulling the button to the stop. Renewed pulling of the button causes the window to stop immediately. Buttons for the power windows in the armrest for the driver A Button for the power window in the driver's door B Button for the power window in the front passenger's door C Button for the power window at the rear right door D Button for the power window at the rear left door S Safety switch

Unlocking and locking

Safety pushbutton The buttons for power windows in the rear doors can be deactivated by pressing the safety pushbutton S » Fig. 25. The buttons for the power windows in rear doors are activated again by pressing the safety pushbutton S again. If the buttons for the rear doors are deactivated, the indicator light  in the safety switch S lights up.

Force limiter of the power windows

ä 

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 46.

The electrically operated power windows are fitted with a force limiter. It reduces the risk of bruises or injuries when closing the windows. If there is an obstacle, the closing process is stopped and the window goes down by several centimetres.

Button on the front passenger door and rear doors

If the obstacle prevents the window from being closed during the next 10 seconds, the closing process is interrupted once again and the window goes down by several centimetres.

Fig. 26 Arrangement of the button on the rear door

If you attempt to close the window again within 10 seconds of the window being moved down for the second time, even though the obstacle was not yet been removed, the closing process is only stopped. During this time it is not possible to automatically close the window. The force limiter is still switched on. The force limiter is only switched off if you attempt to close the window again within the next 10 seconds - the window will now close with full force!

If you wait longer than 10 seconds, the force limiter is switched on again.

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 46.

Window convenience operation

A button for the relevant window is provided in these doors. Opening a window › A window is opened by pressing lightly on the respective button in the door. The opening process stops when one releases the button. › Additionally, the window can be opened automatically (fully open) by pressing the button to the stop. Renewed pressing of the button causes the window to stop immediately.

Closing a window › A window is closed through pulling lightly on the respective button in the door. The closing process stops when one releases the button. › Additionally, the window can be closed automatically (fully closed) by pulling the button to the stop. Renewed pulling of the button causes the window to stop immediately.

Opening a window › by holding the pressed unlock button on the remote control, › by pressing and holding the top part of the central locking button on the driver's door.

Using the system



First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 46.

The electrically powered windows can be opened and closed as follows when unlocking and locking the vehicle (only sliding/tilting roof or panoramic sliding roof closed):



Closing a window › by holding the pressed lock button on the remote control, › by pressing and holding the lower part of the central locking button on the driver's door, › by holding the key in the driver's lock in the lock position » page 40, £ › on the KESSY system, by covering the sensor 2 » Fig. 15.

You can interrupt the opening or closing process for the windows immediately by releasing the key or the lock button.



The sliding/tilting roof can still be opened, closed and tilted for approx. 10 minutes after switching the ignition off. However, as soon as one of the front doors is opened it is no longer possible to operate the sliding/tilting roof.

Operational faults

The sliding/tilting roof is operated by means of the control dial » Fig. 27 and only functions when the ignition is switched on. The control dial has several positions.

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 46.

Note If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, it is possible that the sliding/tilting roof does not close fully. This is why the rotary switch must be set to the switch position A and pressed forward for about 10 seconds.

Electrically operated power windows do not operate If the battery has been disconnected and then reconnected while the window was opened, the electrically operated power windows do not operate. The system must be activated. Proceed as follows in order to re-establish the function: › switch on the ignition, › pull the relevant top edge of the button to close the window, › release the button, › pull the relevant button upwards again for approx. 3 seconds.

Opening and tilting Comfort position

› Turn the switch to position

Electric sliding/tilting roof

C » Fig. 27.

Opening fully › Turn the switch to position B and hold it in this position (spring-tensioned position).

Operation in winter In the winter, ice accumulating on the surface of the window may cause there to be more resistance when closing the window. The window will stop and move back several centimetres. It is necessary to deactivate the force limiter to close the window » page 48, Force limiter of the power windows.



Tilting roof › Turn the switch to position D . When the sliding/tilting roof is in the comfort position, the intensity of the wind noise is much less. The sun screen is also opened automatically when the roof slides open.

CAUTION

Introductory information Fig. 27 Control dial for the power sliding/tilting roof

During the winter it may be necessary to remove any ice and snow in the vicinity of the sliding/tilting roof before opening it to prevent any damage to the opening mechanism and seal.



Closing Sliding closed/closing the sliding/tilting roof A » Fig. 27.

› Turn the switch to position

Unlocking and locking

Safety closing The sliding/tilting roof is fitted with a force limiter. If an obstacle (e.g. ice) prevents closing, the sliding/tilting roof stops and opens completely. The sliding/tilting roof can be closed completely without the force limiter by turning the switch into position A » Fig. 27 at the front for as long as it takes for the sliding/tilting roof to close completely » .

Emergency operation

WARNING Close the sliding/tilting roof carefully - risk of injury!



Convenience operation

Fig. 28 Detail of the headliner/key-operated positioning point

An open sliding/tilting roof can also be closed from the outside. › Press and hold the lock button on the radio remote control or hold the key in the locking cylinder of the driver's door in the lock position, or when using the KESSY system keep your finger on the sensor 1 » Fig. 15 until the sliding/tilting roof is closed » . The closing operation stops when one releases the key or the lock button.

WARNING Close the sliding/tilting roof carefully - risk of injury! The force limiter does not operate with the convenience closing.



Electric sliding/tilting roof with solar cells

Note

If there is sufficient bright sunlight, the solar cells on the sliding/tilting roof deliver power for the fresh air blower. Further information » page 103. The operation of the sliding/tilting roof with solar cells is the same as of a normal sliding/tilting roof.

Using the system

The sliding/tilting roof can be closed or opened manually if the system is faulty. The emergency operation of the sliding roof is located underneath the glasses storage box 1 » Fig. 28. › Open the glasses storage box » page 94. › Carefully insert an approximately 5 mm wide screwdriver into the slot in the positions shown by the arrows 1 » Fig. 28. › Carefully fold the glasses storage box downwards by gently pressing down and turning the screwdriver. › Insert an Allen key, SW 4, up to the stop into the opening 2 » Fig. 28 and close or open the sliding/tilting roof. › Reinstall the glasses storage box by first inserting the plastic plugs and then pushing the entire part upwards. › Have the fault rectified by a specialist workshop.



It is necessary after each emergency operation to move the sliding/tilting roof into the basic position. This is why the rotary switch must be set to the switch posi tion A » Fig. 27 and pressed forward for about 10 seconds.

Force limiter The panoramic sliding roof is fitted with a force limiter. The panoramic sliding roof stops and moves back several centimetres when it cannot be closed because there is something in the way (e.g. ice). The panoramic sliding roof can be fully closed without a force limiter by pressing the switch on the recess down and then pushing it forward until the panoramic sliding roof is fully closed » .

Panoramic sliding roof (Combi) Introductory information The panoramic sliding roof with sun screen can only be operated with the rotary switch when the ignition is switched on » Fig. 29. The control dial has several positions. The panoramic sliding roof or sun screen can still be opened, closed and tilted for approx. 10 minutes after switching the ignition off. However, as soon as one of the front doors is opened it is no longer possible to operate the panoramic sliding roof and sun screen.

Operating the panoramic sliding roof Fig. 29 Control dial for the panoramic sliding roof

WARNING Close the panoramic sliding roof carefully - risk of injury! 

CAUTION During the winter it may be necessary to remove any ice and snow in the vicinity of the panoramic sliding roof before opening it to prevent any damage to the opening mechanism.

Note When the panoramic sliding roof is in the comfort position, the intensity of the wind noise is reduced.



Opening and closing the sun screen

Comfort position › Turn the switch to position C » Fig. 29.

Fig. 30 Buttons for sun screen

Open partially › Turn the switch to a position in area D . Open fully › Turn the switch to position B and hold it in this position (spring-tensioned position). Tilting and closing › To tilt, press the switch on the recess in the direction of the roof. › To close, press the switch on the recess down and then push it forwards. Closing › Turn the switch to position A .

The sun screen can be closed or opened separately using the buttons » Fig. 30. Opening › Briefly press the button E » Fig. 30 to open fully. › Press and hold the button E to open in the desired position. The opening proc£ ess stops when one releases the button.

Unlocking and locking

Closing › Briefly press the button F » Fig. 30 to close fully. › Press and hold the button F to close in the desired position. The closing process stops when one releases the button.

Emergency operation 

Convenience operation The panoramic sliding roof and the sun screen can also be operated from the outside using the remote control key or when using the KESSY system with the aid of the sensor 1 » Fig. 15. Closing the panoramic sliding roof › Hold down the lock button on the remote control key, or when using the KESSY system keep your finger on the sensor 1 » Fig. 15 until the panoramic sliding roof is closed. The panoramic sliding roof and the sun screen are closed together.

Fig. 31 Detail of the headliner/key-operated positioning point The panoramic sliding roof can be closed or opened manually if the system is faulty. The emergency operation of the panoramic sliding roof is located underneath the glasses storage box 1 » Fig. 31. › Open the glasses storage box » page 94. › Carefully insert an approximately 5 mm wide screwdriver into the slot in the positions shown by the arrows 1 » Fig. 31. › Carefully fold the glasses storage box downwards by gently pressing down and turning the screwdriver. › Insert an Allen key, SW 4, up to the stop into the opening 2 and close or open the panoramic sliding roof. › Reinstall the glasses storage box by first inserting the plastic plugs and then pushing the entire part upwards. › Have the fault rectified by a specialist workshop.

After releasing the button, or lifting your finger off the sensor 1 when using the KESSY system, the closing process is immediately interrupted. Tilting the panoramic sliding roof › Hold down the unlock button on the remote control key until the panoramic sliding roof is tilted. When tilting the panoramic sliding roof, the sun screen opens at the same time.

Note The force limiter also operates for convenience closing. The panoramic sliding roof can only be tilted and not opened with the convenience operating feature. ■

■



Note After each emergency operation, it is necessary to initialise the roof » page 52, Initialising the panoramic sliding roof.



Initialising the panoramic sliding roof After disconnecting and reconnecting the battery, the panoramic sliding roof and the sun screen must be initialised. After initialising the panoramic sliding roof, press the switch on the recess down £ and push it forward for approx. 10 seconds.

Using the system

Press and hold the switch F » Fig. 30 for approx. 10 seconds to initialise the sun screen. If the panoramic sliding roof or sun screen is not fully closed when disconnecting and reconnecting the battery, they must first be closed or pushed shut » page 51, Operating the panoramic sliding roof » page 51, Opening and closing the sun screen. Only then can the initialisation be completed.



Unlocking and locking

WARNING

Lights and Visibility

Never drive with only the parking light on! The side lights are not bright enough to light up the road sufficiently in front of you or to be seen by other oncoming traffic. Therefore always switch on the low beam when it is dark or if visibility is poor. ■ The automatic driving lamp control  only operates as a support and does not release the driver from his responsibility to check the light and, if necessary, to switch on the light depending on the light conditions. The light sensor cannot, for example, detect rain or snow. Under these conditions we recommend switching on the low beam or fog lights! ■

Lights

Introduction

This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Switching lights on and off DAY LIGHT function (Daylight driving light) Automatic driving lamp control Parking light COMING HOME/LEAVING HOME function Adaptive headlights (AHL) Fog lights Fog lights with the function CORNER Rear fog lights Instrument lighting  Headlamp beam adjustment  Switches for the hazard warning light system Turn signal and main beam lever

55 55 55 56 56 57 58 58 58 59 59 59 60

On models fitted with right-hand steering the position of certain switches differs from that shown in » Fig. 32. The symbols which mark the switch positions are identical, however. The low beam continues to shine while the ignition is switched on and the light switch is in the position  or . After switching off the ignition, the low beam is switched off automatically and only the side lights come on. The parking light also goes out after the ignition key is removed.

Using the system

CAUTION The activation of the described lights should only be undertaken in accordance with national legal requirements. ■ The driver is always responsible for the correct settings and use of the lights. ■

Note ■ If the light switch is in the position , the ignition key is removed and the driver's door is open, an acoustic warning signal will sound. The acoustic warning signal is switched off by means of the door contact when the driver's door is closed (ignition off), however, the parking light remains on to illuminate the parked vehicle if necessary. ■ If there is a fault in the light switch, the low beam comes on automatically. ■ In the event of cool or humid weather conditions, the headlights can be misted up from inside. The temperature difference between interior and external area of the headlight lenses is decisive. When the driving lights are switched on, the light outlet surfaces are free from mist after a short period, although the headlight lenses may still be misted up in the peripheral areas. It also concerns reverse light and turn signal lights. This mist has no influence on the life of the lighting system. 

Activating the function daylight driving lights › Pull the turn signal light lever towards the steering wheel within 3 seconds of switching on the ignition and at the same time, slide it upwards and hold it in this position for at least 3 seconds.

Switching lights on and off Fig. 32 Dash panel: Light switch

On vehicles with an information display, the daylight driving lights can also be activated or deactivated via the menu: ■

Settings ■ Lights & Vision

On vehicles with separate lights for daylight driving lights in the fog lights, the parking lights and the licence plate light do not come on when activating the function daylight driving lights (neither front nor rear).

When the daylight driving lights are switched on, the lighting of the instrument cluster is switched on as well.

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 54. ings

Switching on the parking light › Turn the light switch » Fig. 32 to position .

Automatic driving lamp control

Switching on the low beam and main beam › Turn the light switch to position . › Push the main beam lever slightly forward in the spring-tensioned position to switch on the main beam » Fig. 38. Switching off lights (except daylight driving lights) › Turn the light switch to position 0.



Fig. 33 Dash panel: Light switch



DAY LIGHT function (Daylight driving light)

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 54. ings

Switching on daylight driving lights › Turn the ignition on and turn the light switch to position 0 or . Deactivating the function daylight driving lights › Pull the turn signal light lever towards the steering wheel within 3 seconds of switching on the ignition and at the same time, slide it downwards and hold it in this position for at least 3 seconds.

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 54.

Switching on automatic driving lamp control › Turn the light switch » Fig. 33 to position . Switching off automatic driving lamp control › Turn the light switch to the position 0,  or . If the light switch is in the position , the symbol illuminates when the ignition is switched on  next to the light switch. If the low beam is activated with the £ light sensor, the symbol  illuminates additionally next to the light switch.

Lights and Visibility

If the light comes on automatically, the side lights and low beam as well as licence plate light light up at the same time.

COMING HOME/LEAVING HOME function

If the automatic driving lamp control is switched on, the light is regulated with the light sensor in the rear mirror holder. If the light intensity drops below the set value, e.g when driving during the day into a tunnel, the low beam and the side lights as well as the licence plate light come on automatically. If the light intensity increases again, the lights switch off automatically.

When it is dark, this function makes it possible to switch on the lights for a short time after leaving the vehicle or when approaching the vehicle. Switching on the COMING HOME function › The light switch is in the position automatic driving lamp control . › Switch off the ignition. › The light switches on after the driver's door is opened.

Rain lights If the windshield wiper is switched on in rain sensor mode for longer than 10 seconds or in permanent wipe mode (position 2 or 3) » page 66 for longer than 15 seconds, the side lights and low beam are switched on automatically. The light switches off if the windscreen wipe is in operation rain sensor for more than around 4 minutes or is not switched on in the operation permanent wipe.

Switching on the LEAVING HOME function

› After leaving the vehicle, the light switch is in the position automatic driving lamp control .

Note Do not affix any stickers in front of the light sensor, so that its functionality is not impaired or disabled.

› Unlock the vehicle with the radio remote control and the light is switched on. 

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 54.

The COMING HOME/LEAVING HOME function is controlled with the light sensor in the mount of the interior rear mirror. If the light intensity is higher than the set value of the light sensor, the light is not switched on after opening the driver's door or unlocking the vehicle with the radio remote control.

Parking light  › Switch off the ignition. › Pull the turn signal light lever » Fig. 38 upwards or downwards - the parking light on the right or left side of the vehicle is switched.

Switching off the COMING HOME function The light goes out 10 seconds after closing all of the doors and the boot lid.

Parking light on both sides › Turn the light switch into the position  and lock the vehicle.

If a door or the boot lid remains open, the light goes out after 60 seconds. Switching off the LEAVING HOME function The light goes out 10 seconds after unlocking the vehicle with the radio remote control, switching on the ignition or locking the vehicle.

Note The parking light  can only be activated if the ignition is switched off. If the right or left turn signal light has been switched on and the ignition is switched off, the parking light is not automatically switched on. ■

■

Using the system

Depending on the equipment fitted the COMING HOME/LEAVING HOME function switches on the following lights:

› Parking lights, › Low beam, › Entry lighting in the exterior mirrors, › Licence plate light.

Parking light

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 54.



If no door is opened, the vehicle is locked automatically after 30 seconds.

Mode city In the mode “city”, the dispersion of the cone of light in front of the vehicle is wider and the width of illumination is shorter. The aim is to illuminate the adjacent footpaths, crossings, pedestrian crossings, etc. The mode is active at speeds of 15 - 50 km/h.

Note ■ If the COMING HOME/LEAVING HOME function is switched on constantly, the battery will be heavily discharged particularly over short distances. ■ The illumination period for the COMING HOME/LEAVING HOME function can be changed by means of the information display.

Adaptive headlights (AHL)

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 54.

Switch on the adaptive headlights › Turn the light switch » Fig. 33 to position . The AHL system is activated if:

› the light sensor recognises a low light intensity, › no reverse gear is engaged, › the operation mode “tourist light” is not switched on. The light sensor switches on the full outer illumination at low light intensity. The AHL system makes it possible to change the length and width of illumination from the headlights. The length and width of illumination changes automatically in relation to the vehicle speed and the use of the windscreen wiper. The AHL system operates in the following modes. Mode out of town The mode “out of town” is a basic mode. The dispersion of the cone of light in front of the vehicle is similar to the low beam. The mode is active if none of the following modes are active. Mode rain In the mode “rain” the dispersion of the cone of light in front of the vehicle is wider and the width of illumination is shorter, so that during bad weather (rain) the dazzling of the oncoming drivers can be reduced. The mode is activated at speeds of 15 - 70 km/h and if the windscreen wipers continuously operate for a period of time longer than 2 minutes. The mode is deactivated when dropping below or exceeding the set speed limit or if the windscreen wipers have been switched off for a period of time longer than 8 minutes.



Mode motorway In the mode “motorway” the dispersion of the cone of light is adapted so that it also illuminates the left (or right)1) lane of the motorway, so that the driver can react in time to an obstacle or any other danger. The mode is activated gradually from a speed of 90 km/h. It is most effective at speeds above 120 km/h. Tourist light This mode makes it possible to drive in countries with opposing traffic system, driving on the left/right, without dazzling the oncoming vehicles. When the mode “tourist light” is active, the above mentioned modes and the side to side swivel of the headlights is deactivated. The mode “tourist light” is activated/deactivated via the information display in the menu: ■

Settings ■ Travel mode ■ Off ■ Switched on

Cornering lights The cornering lights are used to illuminate the curves by means of the cone of light swivelling together with the front headlight with Xenon lights. This function is active when the speed of the car increases to more than 10 km/h.

WARNING If the cornering lights are defective, the headlights are automatically lowered to the emergency position, which prevents a possible dazzling of oncoming traffic. Thus the illuminated length of the road is shortened. Drive carefully and visit a specialist garage as soon as possible.

Note The AHL system complements the functions of the fog lights with the function CORNER » page 58 and the function of the dynamic headlight beam adjustment.

It is valid for vehicles which are designed for driving on the left.

Lights and Visibility



› the fog lights are not switched on; › no reverse gear is engaged.

Fog lights

Note

Fig. 34 Dash panel: Light switch

If the reverse gear is engaged during the active function CORNER, both fog lights illuminate.



Rear fog lights

ä ä

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 54. ings

Switching on the rear fog lights › First of all, turn the light switch to position  or  » Fig. 34. › Pull the light switch to position 2 .

Switch on the front fog lamp › First of all, turn the light switch to position  or  » Fig. 34. › Pull the light switch to position 1 . The warning light  lights up in the instrument cluster when the fog lights are switched on » page 22.

Fog lights with the function CORNER The fog lights with the function CORNER are designed to improve the illumination of the surrounding area near the vehicle when turning, parking, etc.

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 54.

The fog lights with the function CORNER are adjusted according to the steering angle or after switching on the turn signal light 1) in the following circ*mstances:

› the vehicle is stationary and the engine is running or it moves with a speed of maximum 40 km/h;

› the daylight driving lights are not switched on; › the low beam is switched on or the light switch is in the position  and the intensity of the ambient light causes the low beam to be switched on;

If both switch on versions are conflicting, for example if the steering wheel is turned to the left and the right turn signal light is switched on, the turn signal light has the higher priority.

Using the system

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 54.

The indicator light  illuminates in the instrument cluster when the rear fog lights are switched on » page 22. 

Only the rear fog light on the trailer lights up if the vehicle has a factory-fitted towing device or a towing device from ŠKODA original accessories and it is driven with a trailer and the rear fog lights switched on.



Settings

Instrument lighting 

The positions correspond approximately to the following vehicle loads: - Front seats occupied, luggage compartment empty. 1 All seats occupied, luggage compartment empty. 2 All seats occupied, luggage compartment laden. 3 Driver seat occupied, luggage compartment laden.

Fig. 35 Dash panel: Instrument lighting

CAUTION Always adjust the headlight range adjustment in such a way that: it does not dazzle other road users, especially oncoming traffic, and the range is sufficient for safe driving.

■ ■

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 54. ings

Note

› Switch on the light. › Turn the control dial » Fig. 35 to the desired intensity of the instrument light-

The Bi-Xenon bulbs adapt automatically to the load and driving state of the vehicle (e.g. speed, accelerating, braking) when the ignition is switched on and when driving. Vehicles that are equipped with Bi-Xenon headlights do not have a manual headlight range adjustment control.

ing.

The illumination intensity of the Information display » page 18 is set automatically. It is only possible to adjust the instrument lighting with the control dial if the light intensity drops below the set value of the light sensor.



Switches for the hazard warning light system Fig. 37 Dash panel: Switch for hazard warning lights

Headlamp beam adjustment  Fig. 36 Dash panel: Lights and Visibility

ä ä

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 54.



First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 54. ings

› Press switch  » Fig. 37 to switch the hazard warning light system on or off.

› Switch on the light. › Turn the control dial » Fig. 36 to the desired width of illumination. Lights and Visibility

All the turn signal lights on the vehicle flash at the same time when the hazard warning light system is switched on. The indicator light for the turn signals and the indicator light in the switch also flash at the same time. The hazard warning light system can also be operated if the ignition is switched off.

› Push the lever away from the steering wheel in the direction of arrow

The hazard warning light system is switched on automatically if an airbag is deployed in the event of an accident.

Headlight flasher  › Pull the lever towards the steering wheel (spring-tensioned position) in the direction of arrow D - the main beam and indicator light  in the instrument cluster come on.

Note The hazard warning light system must be switched on if, for example: ■ you encounter a traffic congestion; ■ your vehicle breaks down or an emergency situation occurs.

(spring-tensioned position). › The main beam is switched off by pulling the lever towards the steering wheel (spring-tensioned position) in the direction of arrow D .

Parking light  Description of the operation » page 56, Parking light. 

CAUTION Only use the main beam or the headlight flasher if other road users will not be dazzled.

Turn signal and main beam lever The parking light and headlight flasher are also operated with the turn signal and main beam lever. Fig. 38 Turn signal and main beam lever

Note ■ The turn signal system only operates when the ignition is switched on. The corresponding warning light  or  in the instrument cluster also flashes. ■ The turn signal is automatically cancelled after negotiating a curve. ■ The indicator light flashes at twice its normal rate if a bulb for the turn signal  light fails.

Interior light

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 54.

Interior lights at the front

Right  and left  turn signal light › Push the lever upwards A » Fig. 38 or downwards B . › If you only wish to flash three times (the "convenience turn signal"), briefly push the lever to the upper or lower pressure point and release again. This feature can be activated/deactivated via the information display » page 20. › Turn signal for changing lanes - to only flash briefly, move the lever up or down to the pressure point and hold it in this position. Main beam  › Switch on the low beam.

Using the system

Fig. 39 Interior lights at the front

Switching the interior light on › Press the switch in the area of the symbol  » Fig. 39.

Front reading lights

Switching the interior light off › Press the switch in the area of the symbol O. Operating the light with the door contact switch › Place the switch into the middle position. On vehicles without an interior monitor, the middle position is marked with the symbol  » Fig. 39 - . If operating lights with the door contact switch is enabled, the light will come on when:

› the vehicle is unlocked, › one of the doors is opened, › or the ignition key is removed. If operating lights with the door contact switch is enabled, the light will go off when: › the vehicle is locked, › the ignition is switched on, › about 30 seconds after all the doors have been closed. If a door remains open, or if the switch is in the position  the interior light goes out after 10 minutes to prevent the battery from discharging.

Note Two diffuse lights are integrated in the front interior lighting, that illuminate the gearshift lever and the middle of the dash panel. These are switched on automatically when the parking light is activated. ■ Furthermore, after switching on the ignition when the parking lights are switched on, the door handle lighting comes on.  ■ We recommend having these bulbs replaced by a specialist garage.

Fig. 40 Reading lights Front reading lights › Press switch  » Fig. 40 to switch the reading lights on or off.



Lit storage compartment on the front passenger side

› When opening the flap of the storage compartment on the front passenger side the lighting in the storage compartment comes on.

› The light switches on automatically when the parking light is switched on and goes out when the flap is closed.



■

Interior light and rear reading lights Fig. 41 Interior light and rear reading lights

Interior light › The rear interior light is operated together with the front interior light » page 60. Lights and Visibility

Reading lights › Press switch  » Fig. 41 to switch the reading lights on or off.



The warning light goes on every time the door is opened. The light goes out about 10 minutes after opening the door in order to avoid discharging the battery of the vehicle. There is a reflector installed on some vehicles instead of the warning light.

Rear interior light (Combi) Applies to vehicles with a panoramic sliding roof.



Entry lighting

Fig. 42 Interior lights at the rear

The lighting is positioned on the bottom edge of the exterior mirror. The light beam is directed towards the entry area of the front door. The light comes on after the doors have been locked or on opening the boot lid. The light goes out after switching on the ignition or within 30 seconds of closing all of the doors and the boot lid. If a door or the boot lid remains open, the light goes out within 2 minutes if the ignition is switched off.

WARNING

Switching the interior light on

› Press the cover glass in the area of the symbol  » Fig. 42.

If the entry light is on, do not touch its cover - risk of burns!



Switching the interior light off › Press the cover glass in the area of the symbol O. Operating the light with the door contact switch › Place the cover glass in the middle position .

Front door warning light Fig. 43 Front door: Warning light

The warning light is located in the door trim panel below » Fig. 43.

Using the system

Luggage compartment light 

The light comes on automatically when the boot lid is opened. If the lid remains open for more than about 10 minutes, the luggage compartment light switches off automatically.



Reinserting the lamp the holder › First of all place the deactivated lamp in the holder on the side facing the boot lid and then press on the lamp from the other side until it is clicks into place.

Luggage compartment light (Combi) Removable lamp

Operation of the lamp › If you press the button A once, the lamp lights up with 100 % light intensity. › If you press the button A again, the lamp lights up with 50 % light intensity. › If you press the button A once again, the lamp goes out.

CAUTION The removable lamp is not watertight and must therefore be protected against moisture.

Note If the lamp is not correctly inserted into the holder, it does not light up when the boot lid is opened and the rechargeable batteries are not charged. ■ If the lamp is not switched off and it is correctly inserted in the holder, the bulbs in the front part C » Fig. 44 of the lamp are automatically switched off. ■ The removed light can operate for a max. of 24 hours at an intensity of 100 %  and a max.of 48 hours at an intensity of 50 %. ■

Fig. 44 Removeable lamp A removable lamp is fitted on the left side of the luggage compartment. This lamp has two functions:

› lighting the luggage compartment - it illuminates part

B » Fig. 44 (the lamp is in the holder), › portable lamp - it illuminates part C (the lamp has been removed from the holder).

Replacing the rechargeable batteries of the lamp

If the lamp is in the holder, it is automatically switched on when the boot lid is opened. If the boot lid remains open for more than 10 minutes, the light switches off automatically. The lamp is supplied by three rechargeable type AAA batteries. The rechargeable batteries are constantly charged when the engine is running. It takes approx. 3 hours to fully charge the rechargeable batteries. The lamp is fitted with magnets. Therefore it is possible to attach the lamp, for example on the vehicle body, after removing it.

Taking out the lamp Taking out the lamp › Grasp the lamp in the areas of the arrows D » Fig. 44 and swivel it in the direction of the arrow E .



Proceed as follows if you wish to replace the faulty rechargeable batteries yourself: › Remove the lamp. › Lever off the cover for the rechargeable batteries with a narrow and pointed object from the location of the lock-off clips F » Fig. 44. › Remove the faulty rechargeable batteries from the lamp. › Insert the new rechargeable batteries. › Insert the cover for the rechargeable batteries and press it down until it clicks into place.

CAUTION We recommend having the faulty rechargeable batteries replaced by a specialist garage. If the lamp is not correctly opened, it can be damaged.

Lights and Visibility

The windshield and rear window heater automatically switches off after 10 minutes.

For the sake of the environment Dispose of the faulty rechargeable batteries in accordance with environmental regulations.

For the sake of the environment The heating should be switched off as soon as the window is de-iced or free from mist. The reduced current consumption will have a favourable effect on fuel economy » page 169, Saving electricity.

Note Pay attention to the correct polarity when changing the rechargeable batteries. The replacement rechargeable batteries must have the same specification as the original rechargeable batteries. If other types of rechargeable batteries are used, the power output can be reduced or it can lead to a malfunction of the lamp.

■ ■

Visibility Windshield and rear window heater

Fig. 45 Switch for windscreen heater/switch for rear window heater Windscreen heater › The windshield window heater is switched on or off by pressing the switch  » Fig. 45 -  - the indicator light in the switch comes on or goes out. Rear window heater

› The rear window heater is switched on or off by pressing the switch 

» Fig. 45 -  - the indicator light in the switch comes on or goes out.

The windshield and rear window heater only operates when the engine is running.

Using the system

Note 

■ If the on-board voltage drops, the windshield and rear window heater switches off automatically, to provide sufficient electrical energy for the engine control » page 193, Automatic load deactivation. ■ The position and shape of the switch for the rear window heater can vary depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle.



Sun visors

Fig. 46 Sun visor/double sun visor The sun visor for the driver or front passenger can be pulled out of the fixture and swivelled towards the door in the direction of the arrow 1 » Fig. 46. The vanity mirrors in the sun visors are provided with covers. When you slide open the cover in the direction of the arrow 2 , the vanity mirror lighting in the headliner switches on automatically. It switches off again when you slide the cover closed or when you raise the sun visor. On vehicles that are equipped with a double sun visor, the auxiliary visor can be unfolded in the direction of the arrow 3 after swivelling the sun visor towards the door.

WARNING

Sun screen in the rear doors

The sun visors must not be swivelled towards the side windows in the deployment area of the head airbags if any objects, such as ball-point pens, etc. are attached to them. This might result in injuries to the occupants if the head airbag is deployed.

Fig. 48 Rear door: Sun screen 

Sun screen Fig. 47 Unroll the sun screen Pulling out › Pull the sun screen on the handle A » Fig. 48 and hang it in the bracket on the top edge of the door. Folding › Remove the sun screen from the handle A and hold it in such a way that it can roll up slowly without being damaged. The sun screen is located in the lower part of the luggage compartment cover.

Windscreen wipers and washers

Pulling out › Pull the sun screen on the handle A » Fig. 47 and hang it in the magnetic brackets B .

Folding › Remove the sun screen from the magnetic brackets B and hold it on the handle A so that it can slowly roll up into the housing on the luggage compartment cover without being damaged.

Introduction

This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Activating the windshield wipers and washers Automatic rear window wiper (Combi) Alternative park position of the rear window wiper (Combi) Headlight cleaning system Replacing the windscreen wiper blades Replacing the rear window wiper blade (Combi)

Note Do not place any objects that react sensitively to influences of magnetic fields (watches, electronics, etc.) in the immediate vicinity of the magnetic brackets. They can be damaged by the magnetic field.



66 67 67 68 68 69

The windscreen wipers and the wash system only operate if the ignition is switched on and the bonnet is closed. The rear window wiper only operates if the boot lid is closed. If the intermittent wipe is switched on, the intervals are also controlled depending on speed.

Lights and Visibility

The rain sensor automatically regulates the break between the individual wiper strokes depending on the intensity of the rain. The rear window is wiped once if the windshield wipers are on when reverse gear is selected. After the windscreen wiper switches off each time or the ignition switches off for the third time, the position of the windscreen wiper changes, this counteracts an early fatigue of the wiper rubbers. Top up with windscreen wiper fluid » page 189.

WARNING Properly maintained windscreen wiper blades are essential for clear visibility and safe driving » page 68. ■ Do not use the windshield washer system at low temperatures, without heating the windshield beforehand. Otherwise the window cleaner could freeze on the windshield and restrict the view to the front. ■ The rain sensor only operates as a support. The driver is not released from the responsibility to set the function of the windscreen wipers manually depending on the visibility conditions. ■

Note ■ If the slower 2 » Fig. 49 or the faster 3 wiper setting is switched on and the vehicle speed decreases to below 4 km/h, the lower wiper step is switched on automatically. At a speed increase of more than 8 km/h the previous wiper setting is established again. ■ If there is an obstacle on the windscreen, the wiper will try to push away the obstacle. If the obstacle continues to block the wiper, the wiper stops automatically after 5 attempts to eliminate the obstacle, in order to avoid a damage to the wiper. Remove the the obstacle and switch the wiper on again. ■ The windscreen washer nozzles for the windscreen are heated when the engine is running and the outside temperature is less than +10 °C. ■ The content of the windscreen washer fluid reservoir is 3 litres. On vehicles fitted with the headlight cleaning system, the volume is 5.5 litres. On vehicles fitted with auxiliary heating, the content of the windshield wiper reservoir is 4.5 litres. ■ The wiper blades should be cleaned on a regular basis with a windshield cleaner to avoid any smears. The wiper blades should be cleaned with a sponge or cloth if  they are heavily soiled by insect residues, for example.

Activating the windshield wipers and washers

CAUTION In cold temperatures and during the winter, check before the journey or before switching on the ignition that the wiper blades are not frozen to the windshield. If the windshield wipers are switched on when the blades are frozen to the windshield , this may damage both the blades and windshield wiper motor! ■ If the ignition is switched off while the windshield wipers are switched on, the windshield wipers will continue wiping in the same mode after the ignition is turned back on. The windscreen wipers could freeze up in cold temperatures between the time the ignition was turned off and when it was turned back on again. ■ Carefully detach frozen wiper blades from the front or rear window. ■ Remove snow and ice from the windshield wipers before driving. ■ If the windshield wipers are handled carelessly, there is a risk of damage to the windshield. ■ Replace the windshield wiper blades once or twice a year for safety reasons. These can be purchased from a ŠKODA Service Partner. ■ The ignition must not be switched on if the front windscreen wiper arms are folded out. The wiper blades would move back into their rest position and while doing so damage the paintwork of the bonnet.

Fig. 49 Windshield wiper lever

■

Using the system

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 65.

Flick wipe › If you only wish to wipe the windshield briefly, push the lever into the springtensioned position 4 » Fig. 49. If the lever is held in the lower position for more than 1 second, the wiper wipes faster. Periodic wiping › Position the lever upwards into position 1 .

› Set the desired break between the individual wiper strokes with the switch

Slow wipe › Position the lever upwards into position 2 . Fast wipe › Position the lever upwards into position 3 . Automatic wipe/wash for windscreen › Pull the lever towards the steering wheel into the spring-tensioned position 5 , the washer system is activated immediately, while the windshield wipers start wiping a little later. The wash system and the windscreen wiper operate simultaneously at a speed of more than 120 km/h. › Release the lever. The windscreen wash system stops and the wiper continues for another 3 - 4 wiper strokes (depending on the period of spraying of the windscreen). At a speed of more than 2 km/h, the wiper wipes once again 5 seconds after the last wiper stroke in order to wipe the last drops from the windscreen. This feature can be activated/deactivated by a specialist garage. Rain sensor › Place the lever in position 1 . › The sensitivity of the sensor can be set individually with the switch A . Wiping the rear window pane (Combi) › Push the lever away from the steering wheel into position 6 and the windshield wiper will operate every 6 seconds. Automatic wipe/wash for the rear window (Combi) › Press the lever completely away from the steering wheel into the spring-tensioned position 7 , the washer system is activated immediately, while the windshield wiper starts wiping a little later. The wiper and washer system will operate as long as the lever is held in this position. › Release the lever. The washer system stops and the wiper continues for another 2 to 3 wiper strokes (depending on the duration of the spraying process). The lever will stay in position after releasing it 6 . Switching windshield wipers off › Move the lever back into the home position 0 . Winter position If the windscreen wipers are in rest position, they cannot be folded out from the windscreen. For this reason we recommend adjusting the windscreen wipers in winter so that they can be folded out from the windscreen easily.

This rest position is set as follows: › Switch on the windshield wipers. › Switch off the ignition. The windscreen wipers remain in the position in which they were when switching off the ignition. The service position can also be used as a winter position » page 68.



Automatic rear window wiper (Combi)

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 65.

If the windshield wiper is in position 2 » Fig. 49 or 3 the rear window is wiped every 30 or 10 seconds if the vehicle's speed exceeds 5 km/h. When the rain sensor is active (the lever is in the position 1 ) the function is only active if the windshield wipers operate in continuous mode (no break between each wiping process). Activation/deactivation The function of the automatic rear window wiper is activated/deactivated in the information display in the menu: ■ Settings ■ Lights & Vision ■ Rear wiper



Alternative park position of the rear window wiper (Combi)

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 65.

Each time after switching off the engine for the second time, the wiper blade of the rear window wiper is tilted. This prolongs the life of the wiper blade. Activation/deactivation › Switch on the ignition. › Push the operating level into the position 6 » Fig. 49 five times in succession within 5 seconds. › Switch off the ignition. After switching on the ignition again, the alternative park position of the rear window wiper is activated/deactivated.

Lights and Visibility



Service position for changing wiper blades

Headlight cleaning system

› Closing the bonnet. › Switch the ignition off and on again. › Then press the windshield wiper lever into position

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 65.

4 » Fig. 49 within 10 sec-

onds – the wiper arms move into the service position.

The headlights are being cleaned after the windscreen has been sprayed for the first time and fifth time, the low beam or main beam are switched on and the windscreen wiper lever was held in the position 5 » Fig. 49 for about 1 second.

Removing the wiper blade › Fold the windshield wiper arm away from the windshield. › Press the locking button 1 » Fig. 50 to unlock the wiper blade and pull off in the direction of the arrow 2 .

The headlight washer nozzles are moved forward out of the bumper by the water pressure for cleaning the headlights. You should remove stubborn dirt (such as insect residues) from the headlight lenses at regular intervals, for example when refuelling. The following guidelines must be observed » page 177, Headlight lenses.

Attaching the wiper blade › Push the windshield wiper blade until the stop and it locks in place. › Check whether the wiper blade is correctly attached. › Fold the wiper arms back to the windshield.

To ensure the proper operation of the cleaning system during the winter, any snow should be removed from the washer nozzle fixtures and ice should be cleared with a de-icing spray.

The windshield wiper arms move back into the rest position - after switching on the ignition and changing the position of the window wiper lever or when driving at a speed of more than 6°km/h. Windshield wiper blades in proper condition are essential to obtain good visibility. Wiper blades should not be allowed to become dirtied by dust, insect remains and preserving wax.

CAUTION Never remove the nozzles from the headlight cleaning system by hand - risk of damage!

Replacing the windscreen wiper blades Fig. 50 Windscreen wiper blade

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 65.

When in the rest position, the wiper arms cannot be fold down from the windshield. Before replacing, the wiper arms must be placed in the service position.

Using the system



Juddering or smearing of the wiper blades could then be due to wax residues left on the windshield by vehicle washing in automatic vehicle wash systems. It is therefore important to degrease the lips of the windshield wiper blades after every pass through an automatic vehicle wash system.



Replacing the rear window wiper blade (Combi)

Automatic dimming interior mirror

Fig. 51 Rear window wiper blade

Fig. 52 Automatic dimming interior mirror

Switching on automatic dimming › Press the button B » Fig. 52, the indicator light A lights up.

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 65. ings

Removing the wiper blade › Fold the windshield wiper arm away from the windshield and position the wiper blade at a right angle to the wiper arm » Fig. 51. › Hold the windshield wiper arm at the top end with one hand. › Unlock the locking button 1 with the other hand and remove the wiper blade in the direction of the arrow 2 .

Switching off automatic dimming › Press the button B again, the indicator light A goes out.

Attaching the wiper blade › Push the windshield wiper blade until the stop and it locks in place. › Check whether the wiper blade is correctly attached. › Fold the wiper arm back to the windshield.

Do not attach external navigation devices on to the windshield or in the vicinity of the automatic dimming interior mirror » .

If the automatic dimming is switched on, the mirror dims automatically depending on the light striking the mirror from the rear. The mirror has no lever on the bottom edge of the mirror. After the reverse gear is engaged, the mirror always moves back into the normal position.



The display lighting on the external navigation device may cause the automatic dimming interior mirror to malfunction – risk of accident.

Rear window

Note

Manual dimming interior mirror Basic setting

› Pull the lever on the bottom edge of the mirror forward. Dimming mirror › Push the lever on the bottom edge of the mirror backwards.

WARNING



■ Automatic mirror dimming operates only properly if the sun screen for the rear window in the housing on the luggage compartment cover is not in use or the light striking the interior rear-view mirror is not affected by other objects. ■ Do not affix any stickers in front of the light sensor, so that they do not impair the automatic dimming function or put it out of operation. ■ If the automatic interior mirror dimming is switched off, the exterior mirror dimming is also switched off.

Lights and Visibility



Folding-in both of the exterior mirrors using the remote control key › If all of the windows are closed, press and hold the lock button 3 » Fig. 13 on the radio remote control for approx. 2 seconds.

Exterior mirror Fig. 53 Inner part of door: Rotary knob

The exterior mirrors are folded back into the driving position after opening the door or switching on the ignition. Tilting surface of front passenger exterior mirror On vehicles fitted with a memory for the driver seat, the surface of the mirror tilts down slightly when the reverse gear is engaged and the rotary knob is in the position  » Fig. 53. This provides an aid in seeing the kerb of the pavement when parking the car.

Adjust the rear mirror before commencing to drive so that there is a clear view to the rear. Heating of the external mirror

› Place the rotary knob into the position  » Fig. 53.

The mirror returns into its initial position, after the rotary knob is moved out of the position  and put into another position or if the speed is more than 15 km/h. Memory for exterior mirrors On vehicles fitted with a memory for the driver seat, the relevant setting for the exterior mirrors is also stored automatically when the seat position is stored » page 74.

The exterior mirror heater only operates when the engine is running and up to an outside temperature of +20 °C.

WARNING

Adjusting left and right exterior mirrors simultaneously › Place the rotary knob into the position . The movement of the mirror surface is identical to the movement of the rotary knob.

Convex (curved outward) or a spherical exterior mirrors increase the vision field. They do, however, make objects appear smaller in the mirror. These mirrors are therefore only of limited use for estimating distances to the following vehicles. ■ Whenever possible use the interior mirror for estimating the distances to the following vehicles. ■

The adjustment of both mirrors simultaneously or each individual mirror is possible in the Information display » table on page 20 in the menu point Mirror adjust. (Mirror adjust.). Adjusting the right-hand exterior mirror › Place the rotary knob into the position . The movement of the mirror surface is identical to the movement of the rotary knob. Switching off operating control › Place the rotary knob into the position . Folding-in both of the exterior mirrors with the rotary knob › Place the rotary knob into the position . The mirrors are folded back into the driving position after the rotary knob is turned from the position  to a different one. It is only possible to fold in both exterior mirrors when the ignition is switched on and at a speed of up to 15 km/h.

Using the system

CAUTION Never mechanically fold in or fold back the exterior mirrors with the fold-in function  by hand as this will damage the electric drive.

Note If the exterior mirrors were folded in using the rotary knob, they can only be folded back into the driving position using the rotary knob. ■ If the exterior mirrors were folded in using the remote control key and if the rotary knob was in the fold-in position before the ignition was switched on, the mirrors will remain in the fold-in position the next time the ignition is switched on. The mirrors are folded back into the driving position after the rotary knob is £ turned from the position  to a different one. ■

Do not touch the surface of the exterior mirrors if the exterior mirror heater is switched on. ■ If the power setting function fails at any time, the exterior mirrors can be set by hand by pressing on the edge of the mirror surface. ■ Contact your specialist garage if there is a fault with the power setting of the exterior mirrors. ■



Exterior mirror with entry lighting The lighting is positioned on the bottom edge of the exterior mirror. The light beam is aimed at the entry area of the front doors after the car is unlocked. The light comes on after the doors have been locked or on opening the front door. The lighting goes out about 30 seconds after the doors are closed or if the ignition is switched on. If the doors remain open, the lighting goes out automatically after about 10 minutes provided the ignition is not switched on.



Automatic dimming exterior mirror The exterior mirrors are dimmed together with the interior mirror. If the automatic dimming is switched on, the mirror dims automatically depending on the light striking the mirror from the rear. When the interior lights are switched on or the reverse gear is engaged, the mirror always moves back into the basic position (not dimmed).

Note ■ Automatic mirror dimming operates only properly if the sun screen for the rear window is not in use or the light striking the rear of the interior rear-view mirror is not affected by other objects. ■ Do not affix any stickers in front of the light sensor, so that they do not impair the automatic dimming function or put it out of operation. ■ If the automatic interior mirror dimming is switched off, the exterior mirror dim ming is also switched off.

Lights and Visibility

WARNING (Continued)

Seats and Stowage Front seats

Introduction

This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Manually adjusting the front seats Adjusting front seats electrically Storing setting Assigning the remote control key to the memory button Retrieving the seat and exterior mirror settings

73 73 74 74 75

The driver's seat should be adjusted in such a way that the pedals can be fully pressed to the floor with slightly bent legs. The seat backrest on the driver's seat should be adjusted in such a way that the upper point of the steering wheel can be easily reached with slightly bent arms. Correct adjustment of the seats is particularly important for: › safely and quickly reaching the controls, › a relaxed, fatigue-free body position, › achieving the maximum protection offered by the seat belts and the airbag system.

WARNING Only adjust the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary - risk of accident! Caution when adjusting the seat! You may suffer injuries or bruises as a result of adjusting the seat without paying proper attention. ■ As the electric front seats can also be adjusted when the ignition is switched off (even when the ignition key is withdrawn), never leave children unattended in the car. ■ The seat backrests must not be angled too far back when driving otherwise this will affect proper operation of the seat belts and of the airbag system risk of injury! ■ Never carry more people than the number of seats in the vehicle. ■ ■

Using the system

Each occupant must correctly fasten the seat belt belonging to the seat. Children must be fastened » page 162, Transporting children safely with a suitable restraint system. ■ The front seats and the head restraints must always be adjusted to match the body size of the seat occupant as well as the seat belts must always be correctly fastened in order to provide an optimal protection for you and your occupants. ■ Always keep your feet in the footwell when the car is being driven - never place your feet on the instrument panel, out of the window or on the surfaces of the seats. This is particularly important for the front seat passenger. You will be exposed to increased risk of injury if it becomes necessary to apply the brake or in the event of an accident. If an airbag is deployed, you may suffer fatal injuries when adopting an incorrect seated position! ■ It is important for the driver and front passenger to maintain a distance of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel or dash panel. Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to properly protect you - hazard! The front seats and the head restraints must always also be correctly adjusted to match the body size of the occupant. ■ Ensure that there are no objects in the footwell as they may get caught behind the pedals when driving or applying the braking. You would then no longer be able to operate the clutch, brake or accelerate. ■ Do not transport any objects on the front passenger seat except objects (e.g. child safety seat) provided for this purpose - risk of accident! ■

Note After a certain time, a play of approx. 5 mm can develop within the adjustment mechanism of the backrest angle.



Manually adjusting the front seats

Adjusting front seats electrically Fig. 54 Control elements at the seat

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 72. ings

Fig. 55 Controls for the electric seat adjustment

Adjusting a seat in a forward/back direction › Pull the lever 1 » Fig. 54 up and push the seat into the desired position. › Release the lever 1 and push the seat until the lock clicks into place.

Adopt the correct seated position before setting » page 72.

Adjusting height of seat › To lift the seat, pull or pump the lever 2 upwards. › To lower the seat, push or pump the lever 2 downwards.

Adjusting a seat in a forward/back direction › Press the switch B » Fig. 55 forwards or backwards in the direction of arrow 1. Set the height of the seat cushion › Press the switch B upwards or downwards.

Adjust the angle of the seat backrest › To adjust the angle of the backrest, relieve any pressure from the seat backrest (do not lean on it) and turn the handwheel 3 . Adjusting lumbar support › Turn the lever 4 until the most comfortable curvature of the lumbar support is achieved.

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 72. ings

Adjust the angle of the seat cushion › Press the switch B in the direction of arrow 2 or 3. 

Adjust the angle of the seat backrest › Press the switch C in the direction of the desired setting. Reducing or increasing the curvature of the lumbar support › Press the switch A forwards or backwards. Raising or lowering the curvature of the lumbar support › Press the switch A upwards or downwards.

Note If the movement of the seat is inadvertently interrupted during an adjustment, once again press the switch in the appropriate direction and complete the adjustment of the seat.

Seats and Stowage



Note

Storing setting Fig. 56 Memory buttons and SET button

■ For safety reasons, it is not possible to store this position if the inclination angle of the seat backrest is more than 102° in relation to the seat cushion. ■ Each new setting stored with the same button erases the previous setting. ■ Each time new seat and exterior mirror settings for forward travel are saved, the individual setting for the right exterior mirror for reverse travel must also be  saved again.

Assigning the remote control key to the memory button

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 72. ings

The memory for the driver's seat provides the option to store the individual positions of the driver's seat and the external mirrors. A setting position can be allocated to each of the three memory buttons B » Fig. 56, i.e. three in total. Storing seat and exterior mirror settings for driving forward › Switch on the ignition. › Adjust the seat » page 73. › Adjust both of the exterior mirrors » page 70. › Press the button SET A » Fig. 56. › Press one of the memory buttons B within 10 seconds after pressing the button SET - an acknowledgement signal confirms that the seat setting is stored. Storing exterior mirror setting for reversing › Switch on the ignition. › Press the required memory button B . › Move the rotary knob for the exterior mirror control into position  » page 70. › Engage reverse gear. › Move the right exterior mirror into the desired position » page 70. › Take the vehicle out of gear. The set position of the exterior mirror is stored. Emergency Off The setting process can be interrupted if necessary, by pressing any button on the driver's seat.

Using the system

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 72.

The remote control key must be assigned to the memory button to be able to retrieve the settings that are stored in the memory via the remote control key. Once the settings for the seat and exterior mirrors are saved » page 74, Storing setting, you have 10 seconds to assign the radio remote control to the appropriate memory button. Assigning the remote control key to the memory button › Withdraw the ignition key. › Press the button  on the remote control key. After the successful assignment, the turn signal lights flash and an audible signal will sound as a confirmation. The setting is stored with the memory button which you have selected. Assigning the remote control key to the memory button on vehicles with the KESSY system › Switch off the ignition within 10 seconds of storing the setting. › Open the driver door. › Press the button  on the remote control key within 10 seconds.

Note If the remote control key is assigned to a memory button, which has already been assigned to a radio remote control, the old assignment is replaced by the new assignment. ■ If necessary, an additional remote control key can be purchased from a ŠKODA Service Partner. This remote control key can then be assigned to a different mem ory button. ■

Seat heaters

Retrieving the seat and exterior mirror settings

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 72.

Retrieving settings via the memory button › One-touch automatic memory: briefly press the desired memory button B » Fig. 56. The seat and exterior mirror are moved automatically into the stored positions (this applies only if the ignition is switched on and the speed is less than 5 km/h). › Memory keying: press and hold the desired memory button B until the seat and the exterior mirrors are moved into the stored positions. Retrieving settings via the remote control key › If the driver's door is closed and the ignition is switched off, briefly press the button  on the remote control key and open the driver's door.

Fig. 57 Regulator for heating the front seats/rear seats The seat backrests and surfaces of the front seats and the two outer rear seats can be heated electrically. › The seat heaters on the driver's and front passenger's seat can be switched on and regulated by pressing the button  or  » Fig. 57 - . › The heaters on the left or right rear seats can be switched on and regulated by pressing the regulator  or  » Fig. 57 - .

The seat and exterior mirrors now move automatically into the stored positions. Retrieving setting of exterior mirror for reversing

› Turn the rotary knob for the exterior mirror setting into the position  » page 70 before engaging the reverse gear.

› Engage reverse gear.

By pressing the button once, the heating is switched to the highest intensity level 3, which is indicated by all three of the indicator lights in the switch lighting up.

The mirror returns into its initial position, after the rotary knob is moved out of the position  and put into another position or if the speed is more than 15 km/h. Emergency Off The setting process for the seats and exterior mirrors can be interrupted if necessary, by pressing any button on the driver's seat.



With repeated pressing of the switch, the intensity of the heating is down-regulated up to the switch-off. The intensity of the heating is indicated by the number of illuminated warning lights in the switch.

WARNING If, as an occupant, you have a subdued pain and/or temperature sensitivity, e.g. through medication, paralysis or because of chronic illness (e.g. diabetes), we recommend not to use the seat heating. This can lead to burns on the back, the posterior and the legs which are difficult to heal. If the seat heating is used, we recommend to make regular breaks in your journey when driving long distances, so that the body can recuperate from the stress of the journey. Please consult your doctor, who can evaluate your specific condition.

Seats and Stowage

› To switch off the ventilation shift the rocker switch into the horizontal position

CAUTION

.

Do not kneel on the seats or otherwise apply pressure at specific points to avoid damaging the heating elements for the seat heaters. ■ Do not use the seat heaters if the seats are not occupied by persons or if objects, such as a child seat, bag, etc., are fastened or stored on them. A fault of the heating elements in the seat heating can occur. ■ Do not clean the seats using moisture » page 179, Fabric covers on electrically heated seats. ■

WARNING If you or a passenger have limited pain and/or temperature sensitivity, e.g. caused by medication, paralysis or because of chronic illness (e.g. diabetes), we recommend that you consult your physician before using the ventilated front seat.

Note

CAUTION

The seat heating should only be switched on when the engine is running. This has a significant effect of saving on the battery capacity. ■ If the on-board voltage drops, the seat heating is switched off automatically, in order to provide sufficient electrical energy for the engine control » page 193. ■ If the heaters for the rear seats are set to the highest intensity - level 3, they are automatically switched over to level 2 after 10 minutes (two indicator lights are illuminated on the switch).

Do not kneel on the seats or otherwise apply pressure at specific points to avoid damaging the electronic seat elements or the fan. ■ The fan is located underneath the front seat cushion. Do not place any objects in this area - it may damage the fan. ■ Do not clean the seats using moisture » page 179, Fabric covers on electrically heated seats.

■



Note The ventilation should only be switched on when the engine is running. This has a significant effect of saving on the battery capacity. ■ We do not recommend using the front seat ventilation and heating at the same time. Using the ventilation to cool the seat surface considerably reduces the heating capacity, at the same time affecting the ability of the control unit to detect the right seat surface temperature. ■

Ventilated front seats Fig. 58 Rocker switch for the seat ventilation



Head restraints

ä Heat and condensation can be removed from the seat cushions and seat backrests on the front seats. The ventilation is operated using the rocker switch » Fig. 58 in the front part of the seat cushion, in front of the seat control elements for the electric front seat adjustment. › Thew ventilation of the front seat is switch on by toggling the rocker switch into position 1 - lower intensity, or position 2 - higher intensity.

Using the system

Introduction

This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Adjusting, removing and installing a head restraint Middle rear head restraint

77 77

Best protection is achieved if the top edge of the head restraint is at the same level as the upper part of your head. The position of the front and rear outer head restraints is adjustable in height. The middle rear head restraint is adjustable in two positions.

› To re-insert the head restraint, push it far enough down into the seat backrest

The head restraints must be adjusted to match the size of the seat occupant. Correctly adjusted head restraints together with the seat belts offer effective protection for the occupants » page 147, Correct seated position.

until the locking button clicks into place.

Middle rear head restraint

WARNING The head restraints must be correctly adjusted in order to offer effective protection for the occupants in the event of an accident. ■ Never drive with the head restraints removed - risk of injury! ■ If the rear seats are occupied, the rear head restraint must not be in the lower position.



Applies to vehicles using the TOP TETHER system.

■

Fig. 60 Rear seats: middle head restraint



Adjusting, removing and installing a head restraint

ä Fig. 59 Head restraint: adjusting/removing

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 76.

Removing and installing rear middle head restraint › Pull the head restraint out of the seat backrest as far as the stop. › Press the locking button in the direction of arrow 1 , simultaneously press the locking button into the opening 2 using a flat screwdriver with a width of maximum 5 mm and pull out the head restraint. › To re-insert the head restraint, push it far enough down into the seat backrest  until the locking button clicks into place.

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 76.

Adjusting the height of a head restraint › Grasp the side of the head restraint with both hands and push it upwards as required » Fig. 59 - . › To move the head restraint downwards, press and hold the safety button » Fig. 59 -  with one hand and press the head restraint downwards with the other hand. Removing and installing a head restraint › Pull the head restraint up out of the seat backrest as far as the stop (for the rear head restraints fold the seat backrest forward). › Press the locking button in direction of the arrow » Fig. 59 -  and pull the head restraint out.

Seats and Stowage

WARNING

Rear seats

The belts and the belt locks must be in their original position after folding back the seat backrests - they must be ready to use. ■ The seat backrests must be securely interlocked in position so that no objects in the luggage compartment can slide into the passenger compartment if there is sudden braking - risk of injury! ■ Ensure that the rear seat backrests are properly engaged. It is only then that the three-point seat belt for the middle seat can reliably fulfil its function. ■

Folding the seat backrest forwards

CAUTION Ensure that the seat belts are not damaged when operating the seat backrests. Under no circ*mstances must the rear seat belts be jammed by the folded back seat backrests.



Fig. 61 Unlock the seat backrest/lock the seat backrest The luggage compartment can be increased in size by folding the seat backrests forward or also by folding the seat cushions forward on Combi type vehicles » page 78, Folding the seat cushions forwards (Combi).

Folding the seat cushions forwards (Combi) Fig. 62 Folding the seat cushion forwards

Folding the seat backrest forwards

› Before folding the seat backrests forwards, adapt the position of the front

seats in such a way that they are not damaged by the folded seat backrests 1). A » Fig. 61 and fold it completely forwards.

› Unlock the seat backrest by pressing the unlocking handle

Folding the seat backrest back into position › Push the head restraint into the slightly lifted seat backrest » page 77. › Place the rear outer seat belt C » Fig. 61 behind the edge of the side trim panel. › Then push the seat backrest back into the upright position until the unlocking handle clicks into place - check by pulling on the seat backrest » . › Make sure that the red pin B is hidden.

› Pull up the seat cushion in the direction of the arrow

1 » Fig. 62 and fold for-

wards in the direction of the arrow 2 .

Note To achieve a loading space that is as horizontal as possible, the rear head restraints can be removed before folding the seat backrests forwards. Store the removed head restraints in such a way that they are not be damaged or soiled.

If the front seats are too far back, we recommend removing the rear head restraints before the seat backrests are folded forward, to achieve a loading space that is as horizontal as possible. Store the removed head restraints in such a way that they are not be damaged or soiled.

Using the system



In the event of an accident, there is such a high kinetic energy which is produced by small and light objects that they can cause severe injuries. The magnitude of the kinetic energy is dependent on the speed at which the vehicle is travelling and the weight of the object. The speed at which the vehicle is travelling is in this case the more significant factor.

Rear armrest Fig. 63 Rear seats: Armrest

Example: In the event of a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, an unsecured object with a weight of 4.5 kg produces an energy, which corresponds to 20 times its own weight. This means that it results in a weight of approx. 90 kg “ ”. You can imagine the injuries that can occur, if this “object” flies through the interior compartment and hits an occupant.

WARNING

› The armrest can be folded down to increase comfort » Fig. 63.



Luggage compartment

Introduction

This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Class N1 vehicles Fastening elements Folding hooks Fixing nets Fixing floor covering of the luggage compartment Luggage net Luggage compartment cover Foldable luggage compartment cover (Combi) Automatic foldable luggage compartment cover (Combi)

80 80 81 81 81 82 82 83 83

Please observe the following for the purpose of maintaining good handling characteristics of your vehicle: › Distribute loads as evenly as possible. › Place heavy objects as far forward as possible. › Attach the items of luggage to the lashing eyes or using the fixing net » page 80.

Store the objects in the luggage compartment and attach them to the lashing eyes. ■ Loose objects in the passenger compartment can be thrown forward during a sudden manoeuvre or in case of an accident and can injure the occupants or other oncoming traffic. This risk is still increased, if the objects which are flying around are hit by a deployed airbag. In this case, the objects which are thrown back can injure the occupants - hazard. ■ Please note that the handling properties of the vehicle may be affected when transporting heavy objects as the centre of gravity can be displaced. The speed and style of driving must be adjusted accordingly. ■ If the items of luggage or objects are attached to the lashing eyes with unsuitable or damaged lashing straps, injuries can occur in the event of braking manoeuvres or accidents. To prevent items of luggage from being thrown forward, always use suitable lashing straps which must be firmly attached to the lashing eyes. ■ The items carried in the luggage compartment must be stored in such a way that no objects are able to slip forward if any sudden driving or braking manoeuvres are undertaken - risk of injury! ■ When transporting fastened objects which are sharp and dangerous in the luggage compartment that has been enlarged by folding the rear seats forward, ensure the safety of the passengers transported on the other rear seats » page 148. ■ If the rear seat next to the folded forward seat is occupied, ensure maximum safety, e.g. by placing the goods to be transported in such a way that the seat is prevented from folding back in case of a rear collision. ■ Never drive with the boot lid fully opened or slightly ajar otherwise exhaust £ gases may get into the interior of the vehicle - risk of poisoning! ■

Seats and Stowage

WARNING (Continued)

Fastening elements

Under no circ*mstances, should the permissible axle loads and permissible gross weight of the vehicle be exceeded - risk of accident! ■ Never transport people in the boot! ■

CAUTION Make sure that transported objects with sharp edges do not damage the following: ■ heating elements in the rear window, ■ elements of the aerial integrated in the rear window, ■ elements of the aerial integrated in the rear side windows (Estate car). Fig. 64 Luggage compartment: Lashing eyes and fastening elements/Combi lashing eyes and fastening elements

Note Tyre pressure must be adjusted to the load » page 195.



Class N1 vehicles

Using the system

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 79. ings

The luggage compartment comprises the following fastening elements. A

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 79.

On class N1 vehicles, which are not fitted with a protective grille, a lashing set which complies with the standard EN 12195 (1 - 4) must be used for fastening the load.

ä B

Lashing eyes for fastening items of luggage and fixing nets. Fastening elements for fastening fixing nets.

CAUTION 

The maximum permissible load of the lashing eyes is 3.5 kN (350 kg).



Fixing examples for a fixing net as a vertical pocket » Fig. 66 - , floor fixing net and horizontal pocket » Fig. 66 - .

Folding hooks

WARNING The permissible load of the side nets is 1.5 kg. Heavy objects are not secured sufficiently - risk of injury and net damage!

CAUTION Do not place any sharp objects in the nets - risk of damaging the net.

Fixing floor covering of the luggage compartment

Fig. 65 Luggage compartment: folding hook/Combi folding hooks



First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 79. ings

Folding hooks for attaching small items of luggage, such as bags etc., are provided on both sides of the luggage compartment » Fig. 65.

CAUTION An item of luggage weighing up to 7.5 kg can be attached to the hook.

Fixing nets



Fig. 67 Luggage compartment: fixing the floor covering/fixing the Combi floor covering

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 79.

There is a loop or hook (Combi) located on the floor covering of the luggage compartment. If you need to access the spare wheel, for example, the raised floor cover can be attached to a hook on the luggage compartment cover » Fig. 67 -  or to the frame of the boot lid (Combi) » Fig. 67 - .

Fig. 66 Fixing nets

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 79.

Seats and Stowage



Luggage net

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 79.

The luggage compartment cover can be removed if you wish to transport bulky goods. › Unhook the support straps 1 » Fig. 69. › Place the cover in the horizontal position. › Pull the cover out of the holders 2 horizontally towards the rear. › To reinstall, first of all push the luggage compartment cover into the holders 2 and then hook the support straps 1 on the boot lid.

Fig. 68 Luggage compartment: Luggage net

The removed luggage compartment cover can be stowed behind the seat backrest.

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 79.

WARNING No objects should be placed on the luggage compartment cover, the vehicle occupants could be endangered if there is sudden braking or the vehicle collides with something.

The luggage net is designed for the transportation of lighter objects.

WARNING

CAUTION

Only store soft objects in the luggage net (up to a total weight of 1.5 kg). Heavy objects are not secured sufficiently - risk of injury!

Please ensure that the heating elements for the rear window heater are not damaged as a result of objects placed in this area.

CAUTION No objects with sharp edges should be stored in the luggage net, as they can damage the luggage net.

Luggage compartment cover Fig. 69 Removing the luggage compartment cover

Using the system

Note 

Opening the boot lid also lifts up the luggage compartment cover.



Foldable luggage compartment cover (Combi)

Automatic foldable luggage compartment cover (Combi) The automatic rolling up of the foldable luggage compartment cover enables an easier entry into the luggage compartment.

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 79.

› Open the boot lid. The foldable luggage compartment cover rolls up automatically in the position 1 to » Fig. 70.

› The cover rolls up fully by pressing the cover in the handle area in direction of arrow 3 .

When the boot lid is opened quickly, the automatic rolling up of the foldable luggage compartment cover is blocked for a delay time of approx. 2 seconds.

Fig. 70 Luggage compartment: foldable luggage compartment cover/removing foldable luggage compartment cover

The function to automatically roll up the foldable luggage compartment cover can be activated/deactivated via the information display in the menu:

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 79. ings

■

Pulling out › Pull the foldable luggage compartment cover as far as the stop into the secured position 2 » Fig. 70.



Variable loading floor in the luggage compartment

Folding › Press the cover in the handle area in the direction of the arrow 3 » Fig. 70, and the cover automatically rolls up into position 1 . The cover is fully rolled up by pressing once again.

Introductory information The variable loading floor makes handling of bulky items of luggage easier.

Removing › The fully folded luggage compartment cover can be removed to transport bulky goods by pressing on the side of the cross rod in the direction of the arrow 4 » Fig. 70 and taking it out by moving it in the direction of the arrow 5 .

CAUTION The maximum permissible load of the variable loading floor is 75 kg.

Note

WARNING No objects should be placed on the foldable luggage compartment cover.

Settings ■ Autom. blind



The room under the variable loading floor can be used to stow objects.

Seats and Stowage



WARNING

Dividing the luggage compartment with variable loading floor

Ensure that the carrier rails and variable loading floor are correctly fastened when installing the variable loading floor. If this is not the case, there is a risk of injury for the occupants.

Fig. 71 Luggage compartment: Dividing the luggage compartment with variable loading floor



Extendable variable loading floor with integrated aluminium strips and fastening elements (Combi) Introductory information

› Lift up the part with the holder and secure it by sliding it into the grooves marked with the arrows » Fig. 71.



The variable loading floor makes handling of bulky items of luggage easier.

CAUTION Removing the variable loading floor

The maximum permissible load of the variable loading floor is 75 kg.

Note The space below the variable loading floor can be used for stowing objects, for example the fastening elements, removed foldable luggage compartment cover, etc.



Partially pulling out the variable loading floor Fig. 72 Luggage compartment: Remove variable loading floor/remove carrier rails

› Unlock the variable loading floor by turning the safety eyes

A » Fig. 72 to the left by around 90°. › Fold up and remove the loading floor by moving it in the direction of the arrow. › Unlock the carrier rails B by turning the arbour-mounted fixing eyes C to the right by approx. 90°.

Fig. 73 Luggage compartment: partially pulling out the variable loading floor

Using the system

The variable loading floor can be partially pulled out over the rear bumper. The variable loading floor which is pulled out in such a way is solely used as a seat, for example for changing shoes. When pulling out the variable loading floor, the front edge (close to the rear seats) is lifted at the same time. Thus, small objects can no longer fall into the space between the luggage compartment floor and the variable loading floor. › Grasp the rear part of the variable loading floor by the handle, raise it slightly in the direction of the arrow 1 » Fig. 73 and pull it out over the bumper in the direction of the arrow 2 until it engages in the opening C » Fig. 73. › To push the variable loading floor back into place, grasp the part of the floor by the handle, raise it slightly in the direction of the arrow 1 and push it forwards up to the stop.

Removing and installing the variable loading floor

CAUTION

Fig. 75 Luggage compartment: Fold up variable loading floor

Ensure that the raised front edge of the variable loading floor is not damaged.



Dividing the luggage compartment with variable loading floor Fig. 74 Divide the luggage compartment

Fig. 76 Luggage compartment: remove variable loading floor The variable loading floor can be removed and reinstalled, if necessary. Removing the variable loading floor › Grasp the rear part of the floor by the handle, raise it slightly in the direction of the arrow 1 » Fig. 75 and pull it out over the bumper in the direction of the arrow 2 until it engages in the opening C » Fig. 76. › Fold up the loading floor by moving it in the direction of the arrow 3 » Fig. 75. › Press the safety buttons A » Fig. 76 and remove the floor.

The luggage compartment can be divided with the variable loading floor. › Grasp the rear part of the floor by the handle, raise it in direction of arrow 1 » Fig. 73 and insert the rear edge in one of the openings A » Fig. 74. The variable loading floor is secured in the openings A against movement. The variable loading floor can be pulled out a little more before dividing the luggage compartment with the variable loading floor » page 84. This enlarges the space between the rear seats and the separation.

Installing the variable loading floor › Fold up the floor and place it on the carrier rails. › Push the floor forwards until it engages in the openings B in the carrier rails » Fig. 76.

CAUTION Ensure that the raised front edge of the variable loading floor is not damaged.



Seats and Stowage

› Carefully press in the vicinity of the openings

C on the floor until it clicks into

WARNING

place, if necessary press the safety buttons A .

The objects in the luggage compartment must be firmly secured with the fixing set so that they cannot move freely and uncontrollably and to prevent damage to objects or injuries to occupants.

WARNING Ensure the variable loading floor is attached correctly during installation. If this is not the case, there is a risk of injury for the occupants.

Fixing set



Note Do not use the fixing set to secure objects that might damage the fixing set. The tensioning strap can also be fully reeled up by pressing the button 5 » Fig. 77.

■ ■



Moveable lashing eyes Fig. 78 Moveable lashing eyes

Fig. 77 Telescopic pole and tensioning strap The fixing set can be used for dividing the luggage compartment or for securing the objects which are being transported. Telescopic pole › Insert the holders for the telescopic pole into the left and right openings of the carrier rails. › Press the top part of the holder in the direction of the arrow 1 » Fig. 77 and simultaneously push in the desired position in the direction of the arrow 2 . › Ensure that the holder is correctly locked in place. Tensioning strap › Insert the tensioning strap holders into the opening on the left or right carrier rail. › Press the holder in the direction of the arrow 3 » Fig. 77 and simultaneously push in the desired position in the direction of the arrow 4 . › Ensure that the holder is correctly locked in place. › Place the object that is to be secured behind the tensioning strap. › Press the button 5 on the top side of the holder and tighten the strap.

Using the system

There are four moveable lashing eyes in the luggage compartment that can, for example, be used to attach the fixing nets. › Press the button 1 » Fig. 78 and push the lashing eye in the desired position in the direction of the arrow 2 . › Fold up the clamp 3 » Fig. 78 and, for example, attach the fixing net.



Net partition (Combi)

Introduction

This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Using the net partition behind the rear seats Using the net partition behind the front seats Removing and installing net partition housing

87 87 88 £

If you wish to use the entire luggage compartment, the foldable luggage compartment cover can be removed » Fig. 70.

WARNING The belt locks and the belts must be in their original position after folding back the seat cushions and backrests - they must be ready to use. ■ The seat backrests must be securely interlocked in position so that no objects in the luggage compartment can slide forwards if there is sudden braking - risk of injury! ■ Ensure that the rear seat backrests are properly engaged. It is only then that the three-point seat belt for the middle seat can reliably fulfil its function. ■ Ensure that the cross rod is inserted into the mounts C » Fig. 79 or » Fig. 80 in the front position!



■

Using the net partition behind the front seats Fig. 80 Pull out the net partition 

Using the net partition behind the rear seats Fig. 79 Pull out the net partition

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 86. ings

Pulling out › Pull the net partition by the bracket A » Fig. 79 out of the housing B in direction of the holders C . › Insert the cross rod into one of the mounts C and push forwards. › In the same way, insert the cross rod into the mount C on the other side of the vehicle.

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 86. ings

Pulling out › Fold the rear seats forward » page 78. › Pull the net partition by the bracket A » Fig. 80 out of the housing B . › First of all insert the cross rod into the mount C on one side and push it forward. › In the same way, insert the cross rod into the mount C on the other side of the vehicle. Folding › First pull the cross rod back slightly on the one side and then on the other side and remove it from the mounts C . › Hold the cross rod in such a way that the net partition can slowly roll up into the housing B without being damaged. › Fold the rear seats back into their original position.

Folding › First pull the cross rod back slightly on the one side and then on the other side and remove it from the mounts C » Fig. 79. › Hold the cross rod in such a way that the net partition can slowly roll up into the housing B without being damaged.

Seats and Stowage



WARNING

Removing and installing net partition housing

The items which you transport on the roof bar system must be reliably attached - risk of accident! ■ Always secure the load with appropriate and undamaged lashing straps or tensioning straps. ■ Distribute the load evenly over the roof luggage rack. ■ The handling properties of your vehicle change when you transport heavy or bulky items on the roof bar system as a result of the displacement of the centre of gravity and the increased wind attack area - risk of accident! The style of driving and speed must therefore be adapted to the current circ*mstances. ■ Avoid abrupt and sudden driving/braking manoeuvres. ■ Adjust the speed and driving style to the visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. ■ The permissible roof load, permissible axle loads and gross permissible weight of your vehicle must not be exceeded under any circ*mstances - risk of accident! ■

Fig. 81 Rear seats: Net partition housing

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 86.

Removing › Fold the rear seats forward » page 78. › Open the rear right door. › Push the net partition housing A » Fig. 81 in the direction of the arrow 1 and remove it from the mounts on the rear seats in the direction of the arrow 2 . Install › Insert the recesses on the net partition housing into the mounts on the rear seat backrests. › Push the net partition housing in the opposite direction of the arrow 1 as far as the stop. › Fold the rear seats back into their original position.

Roof luggage rack

Introduction

This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Attachment points Roof load

89 89

CAUTION Only use roof luggage rack approved by ŠKODA. If other roof luggage rack systems are used or if the roof bars are not fitted correctly, any resulting damage to the vehicle is not covered by the warranty. It is therefore essential that the supplied fitting instructions for the roof luggage rack system are observed. ■ On models fitted with a power sliding/tilting roof or a panoramic sliding roof, ensure that the opened sliding/tilting roof or the panoramic sliding roof does not strike any items of luggage transported on the roof. ■ Ensure that the boot lid does not hit the roof load when opened. ■ The height of the vehicle changes after mounting a roof luggage rack system and the load that is secured to it. Compare the vehicle height with available clearances, such as underpasses and garage doors. ■ Always remove the roof luggage rack system before entering an automated car wash. ■ Ensure the roof aerial is not impaired by the secured load. ■ ■



For the sake of the environment The increased aerodynamic drag results in a higher fuel consumption.

Using the system



Cup holder

Attachment points

Fig. 82 Attachment points for roof bars

Introduction

This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Cup holder in front centre console Cup holder in the rear armrest

89 90

WARNING Never put hot beverage containers in the cup holder. If the vehicle moves, they may spill - risk of scalding! ■ Do not use any cups or beakers which are made of brittle material (e.g. glass, porcelain). This could lead to injuries in the event of an accident. ■

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 88. ings

Perform the assembly and disassembly according to the enclosed instructions.

CAUTION

Do not leave open beverage containers in the cup holder during the journey. There is a risk of spilling e.g. when braking which may cause damage to the electrical components or seat upholstery. ■ Slide in the cup holder before raising the armrest. ■

Observe the information regarding the assembly and disassembly in the enclosed instructions.



Note ■ ■

If anything is unclear or you encounter any problems visit a specialist garage. The figure only applies to Combi vehicles.

Cup holder in front centre console 

Fig. 83 Front centre console: Cup holder

Roof load

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 88.

The maximum permissible roof load (including roof rack system) of 100 kg and the maximum permissible total weight of the vehicle should not be exceeded. The full permissible roof load cannot be used if a roof rack system with a lower load carrying capacity is used. In this case, the roof rack system must only be loaded up to the maximum weight limit specified in the fitting instructions.



First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 89.

Two beverage containers can be placed into the recesses » Fig. 83.

Seats and Stowage

On vehicles that are fitted with a cover for cup holders, you can cover the cup holder by pulling on the handle A .



Cup holder in the rear armrest

Ashtray Front ashtray Fig. 85 Centre console: Front ashtray

Fig. 84 Rear armrest: Cup holder/insert cup holder

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 89.

Two beverage containers can be placed into the cup holder. › Press on the front end of the armrest in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 84 - , the cup holder comes out. › To slide the cup holder in again, press the middle part of the cup hold er » Fig. 84 -  and slide it into the armrest.

Removing ashtray insert › Open the ashtray » Fig. 91. › Grasp the ashtray insert in the area A » Fig. 85 and remove it in the direction of the arrow. Insert ashtray insert › Insert the ashtray vertically downwards.

WARNING Never place flammable objects in the ashtray - risk of fire!



Rear ashtray Fig. 86 Centre console: Rear ashtray

Using the system

Removing ashtray insert › Open the ashtray » Fig. 98. › Grasp the insert in the area marked with the arrows » Fig. 86 and remove it.

12-volt power socket

Insert ashtray insert › Place the ashtray insert in the mount and press it in.

WARNING Never place flammable objects in the ashtray - risk of fire!



Cigarette lighter, 12-volt power socket Cigarette lighter Operating the cigarette lighter › Press the button of the cigarette lighter A » Fig. 86 or B » Fig. 85. › Wait until the button pops forward. › Remove the cigarette lighter immediately and use. › Place the cigarette lighter back into the socket.

WARNING Take care when using the cigarette lighter! Improper use of the cigarette lighter can cause burns. ■ The cigarette lighter also operates when the ignition is switched off or the ignition key withdrawn. Therefore never leave children unattended in the vehicle. ■

Note ■ The cigarette lighter socket can also be used as a 12Volt socket for electrical appliances » page 91, 12-volt power socket. ■ Further information » page 201, Accessories, changes and replacement of  parts.

Fig. 87 Luggage compartment: Power socket/luggage compartment: Power socket (Combi) Overview of the 12-volt power socket In the front centre console - B » Fig. 85. In the rear centre console - A » Fig. 86. In the luggage compartment » Fig. 87. Using the power socket › Remove the cover from power socket or cigarette lighter, or open the cover for the power socket. › Connect the plug for the electrical appliance to the socket. Further information » page 201, Accessories, changes and replacement of parts.

WARNING Improper use of the 12-volt power socket and the electrical accessories can cause fires, burns and other serious injuries. ■ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. The 12-volt power socket and any connected appliances can also be operated when the ignition is switched off or the ignition key is withdrawn. ■ If the connected electric device becomes too hot, switch it off and disconnect it from the power supply immediately. ■

Seats and Stowage

CAUTION Never exceed the maximum power consumption, otherwise the vehicle's electrical system can be damaged. ■ Connecting electrical components when the engine is not running will drain the battery of the vehicle - risk of battery draining! ■ Only use matching plugs to avoid damaging the 12-volt power socket. ■ Only use accessories that have been tested for electromagnetic compatibility in accordance with the applicable directives. ■ Before turning the ignition on or off, and before starting the car, switch off the device connected to the 12-volt power socket to prevent any damage caused by voltage fluctuations. ■ Observe the operating instructions for the connected devices! ■

» page 97

Lockable side compartment (Combi)

» page 97

Non-lockable side compartment (Combi)

» page 97

WARNING Do not place anything on the dash panel. These objects might slide or fall down when driving (when accelerating or cornering) and may distract you from concentrating on the traffic - risk of accident! ■ When driving, ensure that no objects from the centre console or from other storage compartments can get into the driver's footwell. You would then no longer be able to apply the brakes, operate the clutch or accelerator - risk of accident! ■ The storage compartments must always be closed when driving for safety reasons. ■

Note The 12-volt power socket can only be used for connecting approved electrical accessories with a power uptake of up to 120 watt.

Side compartments in the luggage compartment



Storage compartment on the front passenger side

Storage compartments

Fig. 88 Dash panel: Storage compartment on the front passenger side

Overview The vehicle has the following storage compartments: Storage compartment on the front passenger side

» page 92

Storage compartment on the driver's side

» page 93

Stowage compartment in front centre console

» page 93

Storage net in the front centre console

» page 93

Glasses storage box

» page 94

Storage compartment in the front doors

» page 94

› Press the button » Fig. 88 and the lid folds down. › Lift the lid upwards until it clicks into place.

Stowage compartment below front passenger seat

» page 94

Front armrest with storage compartment

» page 94

In the storage compartment are pin holders.

Rear armrest with storage compartment

» page 95

Stowage compartment in rear centre console

» page 95

Stowage compartment for an umbrella

» page 95

Seat backrest with through-loading channel

» page 96

Removable through-loading bag

» page 96

Using the system

Opening and closing the storage compartment on the front passenger side



Cooling the storage compartment on the front passenger side

Stowage compartment in front centre console

Fig. 89 Storage compartment: Using cooling system

Fig. 91 Front centre console: Stowage compartment

› Open the air supply by pulling the lever in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 89. › The air supply is closed by pressing the lever.

› Press on the bottom part of the storage compartment in the area

A » Fig. 91 in

the direction of the arrow, and the lid folds in.

Opening the air supply when the air conditioning system is switched on allows cooled air to flow into the storage compartment.

WARNING The storage compartment is not a substitute for the ashtray and must also not be used for such purposes - risk of fire!

Opening the air inlet when the air conditioning system is on causes fresh or interior air to flow into the storage compartment. We recommend closing the air supply if it is operated in heating mode or the cool ing system for the storage compartment is not being used.



Storage net in the front centre console

Storage compartment on the driver's side

Fig. 92 Front centre console: Storage net

Fig. 90 Dash panel: Storage compartment on the driver's side

WARNING

› The storage compartment is opened by lifting the handle and folding open in the direction of arrow » Fig. 90.



Only store soft objects with a total weight of 0.5 kg in the storage net. Heavy objects are not secured sufficiently - risk of injury!

Seats and Stowage

CAUTION

WARNING

No objects with sharp edges should be stored in the storage net, as they can damage the storage net.



Only use the storage compartments in the door panels » Fig. 94 for smaller items that do not project out of the compartment so that the deployment area of the side airbags is not impaired.



Glasses storage box Stowage compartment below front passenger seat Fig. 93 Detail of the headliner: Glasses storage box

› Press the button

Fig. 95 Front passenger seat: Stowage compartment

A » Fig. 93 and the compartment folds down.

› To open the lid, pull the handle » Fig. 95. › When closing the lid, hold the handle until the compartment is closed.

CAUTION Do not put any heat-sensitive objects in the glasses storage box - they may be damaged. ■ The compartment must only be opened when removing or inserting the spectacles and otherwise must be kept closed. ■ On vehicles that are fitted with an anti-theft alarm system, the opened glasses storage box reduces the effectiveness of the sensors for the interior monitor. ■

CAUTION The storage compartment is designed for storing small objects of up to 1.5 kg. in weight.



Front armrest with storage compartment Storage compartment in the front doors Fig. 94 Storage compartment in the front doors

Fig. 96 Armrest: Stowage compartment

The armrest is adjustable for height and length.

Using the system

Opening storage compartment › Open the lid of the armrest in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 96.

Stowage compartment in rear centre console

Closing storage compartment › Open the lid to the stop, only then can it be folded downwards.

Fig. 98 Centre console at rear: Stowage compartment

Setting height › First of all fold the cover downwards and then lift it in the direction of the arrow into one of the 4 fixed positions. Adjusting in the forward/back direction › Push the cover into the desired position.

Note Push the armrest cover all the way back to the stop before applying the handbrake.



The storage compartment is equipped with a removable insert. › Open the storage compartment by pulling the handle A » Fig. 98 in the direction of the arrow.

WARNING

Rear armrest with storage compartment

The storage compartment is not a substitute for the ashtray and must also not be used for such purposes - risk of fire!

Fig. 97 The armrest at the rear



Stowage compartment for an umbrella Fig. 99 Left rear door: Stowage compartment for an umbrella The armrest can be folded down to increase comfort. The armrest includes a storage compartment. The compartment is opened by pressing the button on the front » Fig. 97 and raising the cover.



The storage compartment for an umbrella is located in the rear left door » Fig. 99.

Note An umbrella can be purchased from ŠKODA Original Accessories.

Seats and Stowage



Seat backrest with through-loading channel

Through-loading bag The removable through-loading bag is solely used for transporting skis. Fig. 101 Securing the through-loading bag

Fig. 100 Rear seats: Cover handle/luggage compartment: Unlock button Loading

After folding the rear armrest and cover up, an opening in the seat backrest becomes visible through which the removable through-loading bag with skis can be pushed. The armrest and cover can be folded forward from the passenger or luggage compartment.

› Open the boot lid. › Fold the rear armrest and the cover in the seat backrest downwards » page 96, Seat backrest with through-loading channel.

› Place the empty, removable through-loading bag in such a way that the end of the bag with the zip is in the boot.

Opening from the passenger compartment › Fold down the rear armrest » Fig. 63. › Pull the handle upwards to the stop and fold the cover down » Fig. 100 - .

› Push the skis into the removable through-loading bag from the luggage compartment »

Opening from the luggage compartment › Push the unlock button 1 » Fig. 100 down and fold the cover (including the armrest) forwards.

Securing › Tighten the strap A on the free end around the skis in front of the bindings » Fig. 101. › Fold the seat backrest a little forward. › Guide the securing strap B through the opening in the seat backrest around the upper part of the seat backrest. › Then push the seat backrest back into the upright position until the unlocking button clicks into place - check by pulling on the seat backrest. › Insert the securing strap B into the lock C until it clicks into place.

Closing › Fold the cover and armrest upwards to the stop - the lid must click into place. Ensure that the armrest is always locked into place after closing. This is apparent as the red field above the unlocking button 1 is not visible from the luggage compartment.

WARNING The through-loading channel is only intended for transporting skis that are placed in a properly secured, removable through-loading bag » page 96.

Using the system

› Close the through-loading bag.



On vehicles fitted with a luggage net partition, guide the securing strap B around the housing when the net partition is rolled up. After fixing the net parti£ tion in place, it is not longer possible to unroll the net partition.

The first-aid box can also be stored in this compartment.

WARNING After placing skis into the through-loading bag, you must secure the bag with the securing strap B . ■ The strap A must hold the skis tight. ■ Make sure that the strap A holds the skis in front of the binding (also refer to imprint on the removable through-loading bag). ■ The total weight of the skis which are transported must not exceed 17 kg. ■



Lockable side compartment (Combi) Fig. 103 Luggage compartment: Lockable side compartment

Note The through-loading bag is foreseen for four pairs of skis. Place the skis and sticks in the removable through-loading bag with the tips facing to the rear. ■ If there are several pairs of skis in the removable through-loading bag, ensure that the bindings are positioned at the same height. ■ The removable through-loading bag must never be folded together or stowed when moist. ■ ■

Side compartments in the luggage compartment

› The compartment is opened by pulling the handle in the direction of the ar

row » Fig. 103.

The CD changer and TV Tuner are housed in this compartment. The first-aid box and warning triangle can also be stored in this compartment.



Non-lockable side compartment (Combi) Fig. 104 Non-lockable side compartment

Fig. 102 Luggage compartment: Side compartment - left/right.

› The compartment is opened by turning the locks in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 102.

On some vehicles the battery is located in the left compartment » page 189. This compartment is marked by the symbol  and can be opened by turning the locks e.g with a coin or using a flat screwdriver.

The cover for the side compartment can be removed, thus enlarging the luggage compartment. › Grasp the top part of the cover and carefully remove it in the direction of the £ arrow » Fig. 104.

The CD changer and TV tuner are located in the right compartment » Fig. 102.

Seats and Stowage

CAUTION

WARNING

Ensure that the side compartment cover and the mount for the cover are not damaged during installation or removal.



Clothes hooks The clothes hooks are located on the middle pillar and on the handle of the headliner above each of the rear doors.

WARNING Ensure that any clothes hanging from the hooks do not impair your vision to the rear. ■ Only use the hooks for hanging light items of clothing and ensure that there are no heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets. ■ Do not use clothes hangers for hanging up items of clothing otherwise this may reduce the effectiveness of head airbags. ■

CAUTION The maximum permissible load of the hooks is 2 kg.

Parking ticket holder Fig. 105 Windshield: Parking ticket holder

The note holder is designed e.g. for attaching a car park ticket in parking areas.

Using the system



The attached note has to always be removed before starting off in order not to restrict the driver's vision.



The air conditioning system Introductory information Description and information The heating effect is dependent upon the coolant temperature, thus full heat output only occurs when the engine has reached its operating temperature. If the cooling system is switched on, the temperature and air humidity drops in the vehicle. The well-being of the occupants of the car is enhanced as a result of this particularly at high outside temperatures and a high air humidity. The system prevents the windows misting up during the cold season of the year. It is possible to briefly activate recirculated air mode to enhance the cooling effect. Please refer to the information regarding recirculated air mode for the air-conditioning system » page 102 or for Climatronic » page 104. The air inlet in front of the windshield must be free of ice, snow or leaves to ensure that the heating and cooling system operates properly. After switching on the cooling Condensation from the evaporator of the air conditioning may drip down and form a puddle below the vehicle. This is quite normal and not an indication of a leak!

WARNING For your own safety and that of other road users, ensure that all the windows are free of ice, snow and misting. Please familiarize yourself about how to correctly operate the heating and ventilation systems, how to demist and defrost the windows, as well as with the cooling mode. ■ Do not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period of time, as “stale” air can cause fatigue of the driver and passengers, reduce attention levels and also cause the windows to mist up. The risk of having an accident increases. Switch off recirculated air mode as soon as the windows start to mist up.

■

Note ■ The used air streams out through the air removal openings in the luggage compartment. ■ We recommend that you do not smoke in the vehicle when the recirculating air mode is operating since the smoke which is drawn at the evaporator from the interior of the vehicle forms deposits in the evaporator of the air conditioning system. This produces a permanent odour when the air conditioning system is operating which can only be eliminated through considerable effort and expense (replacement of compressor). ■ To ensure that the air conditioning system works properly, do not block up the air outlet vents with any objects.



Using the air conditioning system economically The compressor on the air conditioning system uses power from the engine when in cooling mode which will effect the fuel consumption. It recommended to open the windows or the doors of a vehicle for which the interior has been strongly heated through the effect of direct sunlight in order to allow the heated air to escape. The cooling system should not be switched on while travelling when the window is open. If the desired interior temperature can also be achieved without activating the cooling system, fresh air mode should be selected.

For the sake of the environment Pollutant emissions are also reduced when fuel is saved.



Operational problems If the cooling system does not operate at outside temperatures higher than +5 °C, there is a problem in the system. The reasons for this may be: › One of the fuses has blown. Check the fuse and replace if necessary » page 214. › The cooling system has switched off automatically for a short time because the £ coolant temperature of the engine is too hot » page 11.

The air conditioning system

If you cannot rectify the functional fault yourself, or the cooling capacity decreases, the cooling system must be switched off. Visit a specialist garage.

Air outlet vents



Close air outlet vents › Turn the rotary knob into the position 0. Changing the air flow direction › The horizontal as well as the vertical direction of the air flow is set with the moveable handle in the middle of the relevant air outlet vents. The air outlet vents 2, 3 » Fig. 106 and 5 » Fig. 107 can be closed and opened individually. Unwarmed or cooled air will flow out of the opened air outlet vents according to the setting of control dial and the outside atmospheric conditions.



Air conditioning system (manual air conditioning system) Description Description of the air conditioning system Fig. 106 Air vents at the front

The cooling system only operates if button AC » Fig. 108 1 is pressed, and the following conditions are met: › engine running, › outside temperature above approx. +2 °C and › blower switch switched on (positions 1 to 4). Under certain circ*mstances, air at a temperature of about 5 °C can flow out of the vents when the cooling system is switched on. Lengthy and uneven distribution of the air flow out of the vents and large differences in temperature, for example when getting out of the vehicle, can result in chills in sensitive persons.

Note We recommend that you have the air conditioning system cleaned by a specialist garage once every year. ■

Fig. 107 Air vents at the rear Open air outlet vents › Turn the rotary knob into the position .

100

Using the system



Note

Using the system

■ The whole heat output will be needed to defrost the windshield and side windows. No warm air will be fed to the footwell. This can lead to restriction of the heating comfort. ■ The warning light in the AC button lights after activation, even if not all of the conditions for the function of the cooling system have been met. As a result, the readiness for cooling is signalled when all conditions are satisfied » page 100, Description of the air conditioning system.

Fig. 108 The air conditioning system: Control elements Setting temperature

› Turn the control dial › Turn the control dial

A » Fig. 108 to the right to increase the temperature. A to the left to decrease the temperature.

Controlling blower › Turn the blower switch B into one of the positions, 1 to 4, to switch the blower on. › Turn the blower switch B into position 0 to switch the blower off. › Press the button  4 to close the fresh air supply - recirculated air mode » page 102. Regulating the air distribution › The direction of the inlet air flow » page 100 is controlled with air distribution regulator C . Switching the cooling system on and off › Press the button AC 1 » Fig. 108. The warning light lights up in the button. › When you again press the button AC , the air conditioning system is switched off. The warning light in the button goes out. Rear window heater › Press the button  2 . Further information » page 64. Auxiliary heating (parking heating) › Press the button  3 to directly switch on/off the auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation). Further information » page 105.

The air conditioning system

101



Setting the air conditioning system Recommended basic settings of the control elements of the air conditioning system for the respective operating modes: Set-up

Setting of the control dial

Button

Defrost windscreen and side windows - free from mista)

Desired temperature

3 or 4

The fastest heating

To the right up to the stop

Comfortable heating

Desired temperature

2 or 3

The fastest cooling

To the left up to the stop

briefly 4, then 2 or 3

Optimal cooling

Desired temperature

1, 2 or 3

Fresh air mode - ventilation

To the left up to the stop

Desired position

     

a) b)

Air outlet vents 2

Automatically switched onb)

Do not switch on

Open and align with the side window

Switched off

Briefly switch on

Opening

Switched off

Do not switch on

Opening

Activated

Briefly switch on

Opening

Activated

Do not switch on

Open and align to the roof

Switched off

Do not switch on

Opening

We recommend that you do not use this setting in countries with high humidity levels. This can result in heavy cooling of the window glass and the following fogging from outside. The indicator light in the button 1 lights up after activation, even if not all of the conditions for the operation of the cooling system have been met. As a result, the readiness for cooling is signalled when all conditions are satisfied » page 100, Description of the air conditioning system.

Switching recirculated air mode off › Press the button  again - the indicator light in the button goes out.

Note Controls A , B , C and the button 1 and 4 » Fig. 108. Air outlet vents 2 » Fig. 106. ■ We recommend that you leave the air outlet vents 3 » Fig. 106 in the opened position. ■

■



The recirculated air mode is switched off automatically if the air distribution control C is in position  » Fig. 108. Recirculated air mode can be switched on again from this setting by repeatedly pressing the button  .

WARNING Recirculated air mode Recirculated air mode prevents polluted air outside the vehicle from getting into the vehicle, for example when driving through a tunnel or when standing in a traffic jam. Switching recirculated air mode on  4 » Fig. 108 and the indicator light in the button illuminates.

› Press the button 102

Using the system

Do not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period of time, as “stale” air can cause fatigue of the driver and passengers, reduce attention levels and also cause the windows to mist up. The risk of having an accident increases. Switch off recirculated air mode as soon as the windows start to mist up.



Note

Climatronic (automatic air conditioning system) Description The Climatronic maintains fully automatically a convenience temperature. This is achieved by automatically varying the temperature of the air flow, the blower stages and air distribution. The system also takes sunlight into account, which eliminates the need to alter the settings manually. The automatic mode » page 104 ensures maximum well-being of the occupants at all times of the year.

■ We recommend that you have Climatronic cleaned by a specialist garage once every year. ■ On vehicles equipped with a factory-fitted radio or radio navigation system, the Climatronic information is also shown on their displays. This function can be switched off, see operating instructions for the radio or navigation system.



Overview of the control elements

Description of Climatronic system The cooling system only operates if the following conditions are met:

› engine running, › outside temperature above approx. +2 °C, › AC switched on.

The AC compressor is switched off at a high coolant temperature in order to provide cooling at a high load of the engine. Recommended setting for all periods of the year: › Set the desired temperature, we recommend 22 °C. › Press the button AUTO » Fig. 109. › Move the air outlet vents 2 and 3 so that the air flow is directed slightly upwards. Aeration of the vehicle when ignition is switched off On models fitted with power sliding/tilting roof with sollar cells, the fresh air blower is automatically switched over to “solar mode” if the sun ray's are sufficient after switching off the ignition. The solar cells on the sliding/tilting roof deliver power for the fresh air blower. This supplies the interior of the car with fresh air.

Fig. 109 Climatronic: Control elements The buttons 1 2 3

For an optimum ventilation, the air outlet vents 2 and 3 must be opened » Fig. 106.

The ventilation functions only when the sliding/tilting roof is closed.

Defrost windscreen intensively  Air flow to the windows  Air flow to head  Air flow in the footwell  Recirculated air mode  with air quality sensor Rear window heater 

The buttons/control dial 7 8 9

Setting of the temperature for the left side, operation of the seat heating of the left front seat Automatic mode AUTO £ Switching off Climatronic OFF

The air conditioning system

103

10 11

12 13 14

Setting the blower speed  Depending upon vehicle equipment: Button for directly switching on/off the auxiliary heating  » page 105 or switching on/off the windshield heater  » page 64 Switching on/off of the temperature setting in dual mode DUAL Switching the cooling system on and off AC Setting of the temperature for the right side, operation of the seat heating of the right front seat

Switching the cooling system on and off Switching the cooling system on and off › Press the button AC . The warning light lights up in the button. › When you again press the button AC , the air conditioning system is switched off. The warning light in the button goes out. Only the function of the ventilation remains active when no lower temperature than the outside temperature can be reached.

Note

Setting temperature

Below the top row of buttons is located the interior temperature sensor. Do not stick anything on or cover the sensor, otherwise it could have an unfavourable ef fect on the Climatronic.

Automatic mode The automatic mode is used in order to maintain a constant temperature and to demist the windows in the interior of the car.

The interior temperature can be set between +18 °C and +26 °C. The interior temperature is regulated automatically within this range. If a temperature lower than +18 °C is selected, a blue symbol lights up at the start of the numerical scale. If a temperature higher than +26 °C is selected, a red symbol lights up at the start of the numerical scale. In both limit positions the Climatronic operates at maximum cooling or heating capacity, respectively. The temperature is not controlled in this case.

If the warning light in the top right corner of the button AUTO lights up, the Climatronic operates in “HIGH” mode. The “HIGH” mode is the standard setting of the Climatronic.

Lengthy and uneven distribution of the air flow out of the vents (especially around the feet) and large differences in temperature, for example, when getting out of the vehicle, can cause susceptible individuals to catch a cold.

When pressing again the button AUTO , the Climatronic changes into the “LOW” mode and the warning light in the top left corner lights up. The Climatronic uses only in this mode the lower blower speed. However taking into account the noise level, this is more comfortable, yet be aware that the effectiveness of the air conditioning system is reduced particularly if the vehicle is fully occupied. AUTO

104

Using the system



Recirculated air mode

again, it is changed to “HIGH” mode.

Automatic mode is switched off by pressing one of the buttons for the air distribution or by increasing/decreasing the blower speed. The temperature is nevertheless regulated.

The interior temperature for the left and right side can be set separately. › The temperature for both sides can be set with the control dial 7 after switching on the ignition. › If you wish to set the temperature for the right side, turn the control dial 14 . The warning light in the button DUAL lights up, this indicates that differing temperatures for the left and right side can be set. If the indicator light in the button DUAL is illuminated, the temperature for both sides cannot be set with the control dial 7 . You can reactivate this function by pressing the button DUAL . The warning light in the button goes out.

Switching automatic mode on › Set a temperature between +18 °C and +26 °C. › Move the air outlet vents 2 and 3 » Fig. 106 so that the air flow is directed slightly upwards. › Press the button AUTO . The indicator light in the top right or left corner lights up, depending on which mode was last selected.

By pressing the button



Recirculated air mode largely prevents polluted air from outside the vehicle getting into the vehicle, for example, when driving through a tunnel or when standing in a traffic jam. If a considerable increase in concentration of pollutants is recognized by the air quality sensor, when the automatic air distribution control is switched on, the air distribution control will temporarily be switched off. If the £ concentration of pollutants decreases to the normal level, the air distribution

› Repeatedly press the button

control is automatically switched off so that fresh air can be guided into the vehicle interior. In recirculated air mode air is sucked out of the interior of the vehicle and then fed back into the interior. When the automatic air distribution control is switched on, an air quality sensor measures the concentration of pollutants in the drawn in air.

 on the left side (reduce blower speed) or on the right side (increase blower speed).

If the blower is switched off, the Climatronic system is switched off. The set blower speed is displayed above the button ber of warning lights come on.

Switching recirculated air mode on › Repeatedly press the button  until the indicator light on the left side of the button is illuminated.

WARNING “Stale air” may result in fatigue in the driver and occupants, reduce attention levels and also cause the windows to mist up. The risk of having an accident increases. ■ Do not switch off the Climatronic system for longer than necessary. ■ Switch on the Climatronic system as soon as the windows mist up.

Switch off automatic air distribution control temporarily › If the air quality sensor does not automatically switch on the air distribution control in the event of an unpleasant odour, you can switch it on yourself by pressing the button  . The warning light lights up in the button on the left side. 

Defrosting windshield - switching on › Press the button  » Fig. 109. › Press the button 11  » Fig. 109. Defrosting windshield - switching off  or the button .

WARNING

› Once again press the button › Once again press the button



Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation)

Note

The Climatronic system controls the blower stages automatically in line with the interior temperature. However, the blower stages can be manually adapted to suit your particular needs.

AUTO .

The temperature control is controlled automatically. More air flows out of the air outlet vents 1.

■

Controlling blower



Defrosting windscreen

until the indicator

If the windshield mists up, press the button  1 » Fig. 109. Press the button AUTO when the windshield is demisted. ■ The automatic air distribution control operates only if the outside temperature is higher than approx. 2 °C.

when the respective num-

■

Switch on automatic air distribution control › Repeatedly press the button  until the indicator light on the right side of the button is illuminated.

Switching recirculated air mode off › Press the button AUTO or repeatedly press the button lights in the button go out.



ä 

Introduction

This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Direct switching on/off System settings Radio remote control Changing the battery of the radio remote control

The air conditioning system

106 107 107 108 £

105

Auxiliary heating (parking heating) The auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating) functions in connection with the air-conditioning system or Climatronic. It can be used when stationary, when the engine is switched off to preheat the vehicle and while driving (e.g. during the heating phase of the engine). The engine is also preheated, if the auxiliary heating is switched on when the vehicle is stationary and the engine is switched off. This is not valid for vehicles with the 3.6 l/191 kW FSI engine. The auxiliary heating (parking heating) warms up the coolant by combusting fuel from the vehicle tank. The coolant warms up the air, which (if the blower speed is not set to zero) flows into the passenger compartment. Auxiliary ventilation The auxiliary ventilation enables fresh air to flow into the vehicle interior by switching off the engine, whereby the interior temperature is effectively decreased (e.g. with the vehicle parked in the sun).

WARNING The auxiliary heating must never be operated in closed rooms - risk of poisoning! ■ The auxiliary heating must not be running during refuelling - risk of fire. ■ The exhaust pipe of the auxiliary heating is located on the underside of the vehicle. Therefore, if you wish to operate the auxiliary heating, do not park the vehicle in such a way that the exhaust gases from the auxiliary heating can come into contact with highly flammable materials (e.g. dry grass) or easily inflammable substances (e.g. spilt fuel).

■ The auxiliary heating only switches the blower on, if it has achieved a coolant temperature of approx. 50 °C. ■ At low outside temperatures, this can result in a formation of water vapour in the area of the engine compartment. This is quite normal and is not an operating problem. ■ After switching off the auxiliary heating, the coolant pump runs for a short period. ■ The auxiliary heating and ventilation does not switch on or comes on, if the vehicle battery indicates a low loading state » page 193, Automatic load deactivation. ■ The auxiliary heating (parking heating) does not switch on, if the following was shown in the information display or before switching off the ignition: Please refuel! ■ The air inlet in front of the windscreen must be free of ice, snow or leaves in order to ensure that the auxiliary heating operates properly. ■ So that warm air can flow into the vehicle interior after switching on the auxiliary heating, you must maintain the comfort temperature normally selected by you, leave the fan switched on and leave the air outlet vents in an open position. It is recommended to put the air flow in the position  or .



■

Direct switching on/off Fig. 110 Button for direct switching on/ off of the auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation) on the operating part of the air conditioning system

Note If the auxiliary heating runs, the fuel consumption comes from the vehicle tank. The auxiliary heating automatically controls the filling level in the fuel tank. If only a low quantity of fuel is present in the fuel tank, the function of the auxiliary heating is blocked. ■ The exhaust pipe of the auxiliary heating, which is located on the underside of the vehicle, must not be clogged and the exhaust flow must not be blocked. ■ If the auxiliary heating and ventilation is running, the vehicle battery discharges. If the auxiliary heating and ventilation has been operated several times over a longer period, the vehicle must be driven a few kilometres in order to recharge the vehicle battery.

106

Using the system

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 105.

The auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation) can be directly switched on or off at any time using the button  on the operating part of the air-conditioning system » Fig. 110, on the operating part of the Climatronic system or via the radio remote control » page 107.

If the auxiliary heating and ventilation is not switched off earlier, it switches off automatically after the set operating period, in the menu Running time has expired.

System settings

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 105.

The following menu points can be selected in the menu Aux. heating in the information display (depending on the equipment fitted in the vehicle): ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Day of the wk. Running time Mode Starting time 1 Starting time 2 Starting time 3 Activate Deactivate Factory setting Back

Factory setting Recreate the factory settings. 

Back Selecting the menu point Back, takes you back to the menu Aux. heating. Only one programmed pre-set time can be active. The last programmed pre-set time remains active. After the auxiliary heating activates at the set time, it is necessary to pre-set a time again. If the pre-set menu is closed by selecting the menu point Back or if no changes are made on the display for more than 10 seconds, the set values are stored, but the pre-set time is not activated. An indicator light on the button



is illuminated when the system is running.

The running system deactivates after expiration of the operating period or can be deactivated earlier by pressing the button to directly switch on/off the auxiliary heating  » page 106 or by using the radio remote control.



Radio remote control

Day of the wk. Set the current day of the week.

Fig. 111 Auxiliary heating: Radio remote control

Running time Set the desired running time in 5 minute increments. The running time can be 10 to 60 minutes. Mode Set the desired heating/ventilating mode. Starting time 1 - 3 In each pre-set time, the day and the time (hour and minute) can be set for switching on the auxiliary heating and/or ventilation. An empty position can be found between Sunday and Monday when selecting the day. If this empty position is selected, the activation is performed without taking into account the day. Activate/Deactivate Activate/deactivate pre-set mode.

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 105.

› For switching on, press the button ON . › For switching off, press the button OFF . The transmitter and the battery are housed in the housing of the remote control. £ The receiver is located in the interior of the vehicle.

The air conditioning system

107

If the battery is properly charged, the effective range is up to 600 m. To switch on/off the auxiliary heating, hold the radio remote control vertically with the antenna A » Fig. 111 facing upwards. The antenna must not be covered with the fingers or the palm of the hand during this process. Obstacles between the radio remote control and the vehicle, bad weather conditions and a weaker battery can clearly reduce the range. The auxiliary heating can only be switched on/off safely using the radio remote control, if the distance between the radio remote control and the vehicle is at least 2 m. Warning light in the radio remote control The warning light in the radio remote control » Fig. 111 indicates after a keystroke if the remote control signal was received by the auxiliary heating and if the battery is adequately charged. Display warning light

Importance

Lights up green for 2 seconds.

The auxiliary heating was switched on.

Lights up red for 2 seconds.

The auxiliary heating was switched off.

Slowly flashes green for 2 seconds.

The ignition signal was not received.

Quickly flashes green for 2 seconds.

The auxiliary heating is blocked, e. g because the tank is nearly empty or there is a fault in the auxiliary heating.

Flashes red for 2 seconds.

The switch off signal was not received.

Lights up orange for 2 seconds, then green or red.

The battery is weak, however the switching on or off signal was received.

Lights up orange for 2 seconds, then flashes green or red.

The battery is weak, however the switching on or off signal was not received.

Flashes orange for 5 seconds.

The battery is discharged, however the switching on or off signal was not received.

CAUTION The radio remote control comprises electronic components and must therefore be  protected against water, severe impacts and direct sunlight.

108

Using the system

Changing the battery of the radio remote control

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 105.

If the indicator light on the radio remote control indicates a weak or discharged battery, » Fig. 111, it must be replaced. The battery is located under a cover on the back of the radio remote control. › Insert a flat, blunt object, such as a coin, into the gap on the battery cover, turn the cover in the opposite direction of the arrow up to the mark and unlock it. › Change the battery, replace the battery cover and lock it by moving it in the direction of the arrow.

For the sake of the environment Dispose of the old battery in accordance with environmental regulations.

Note Pay attention to the correct polarity when changing the battery. The replacement battery must have the same specification as the original battery.

■ ■



WARNING (Continued)

Starting-off and Driving

When driving, the ignition key must always be in the position 2 (ignition switched on) without the engine running. This position is indicated by the warning lights coming on. If this is not the case, it could result in unexpected locking of the steering wheel - risk of accident! ■ Only pull the ignition key from the ignition lock when the vehicle has come to a complete stop (by applying the handbrake). Otherwise the steering wheel could block - risk of accident! ■ When leaving the vehicle, the ignition must always be removed. This is particularly important if children are left in the vehicle. Otherwise the children could, for example, start the engine - risk of accident or injury! ■ Never leave the engine running in unventilated or closed rooms. The exhaust gases of the engine contain besides the odorless and colourless carbon monoxide a poisonous gas - hazard! Carbon monoxide can cause unconsciousness and death. ■ Never leave the vehicle unattended with the engine running. ■ Never switch off the engine before the vehicle is stationary - risk of accident! ■

Starting and stopping the engine

Introduction

This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Adjusting the steering wheel position Electromechanical power steering Electronic immobiliser Ignition lock Starting engine Switching the engine off

110 110 110 111 111 111

Starting and stopping the engine on vehicles with the KESSY system » page 112, KESSY system.

WARNING Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving only when the vehicle is stationary! ■ Maintain a distance of 25 cm 1 to the steering wheel » Fig. 112 - . Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to properly protect you - hazard! ■ The lever for adjusting the steering wheel must be locked whilst driving so that the position of the steering wheel cannot accidently change during the journey - risk of accident! ■ If the steering wheel is adjusted further towards the head, the protection provided by the driver airbag in the event of an accident is reduced. Check that the steering wheel is aligned to the chest. ■ When driving, hold the steering wheel with both hands firmly on the outer edge in the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock position. Never hold the steering wheel in the 12 o'clock position or in any other way (e.g. in the middle or inner edge of the steering wheel). In such cases, you could injure the arms, hands and head when the driver airbag is deployed. ■

CAUTION The starter may only be operated (ignition key position 3 ), if the engine is not running. The starter or engine can be damaged if the starter is activated when the engine is running. ■ Let go of the ignition key as soon as the engine starts otherwise the starter could be damaged. ■ Avoid high engine revolutions, full throttle and high engine loads as long as the engine has not yet reached its operating temperature - risk of damaging the engine! ■ Do not tow start the engine - danger of damaging the engine! On vehicles with a catalytic converter, unburnt fuel may get into the catalytic converter where it may ignite. This in turn may damage the catalytic converter. The battery from another vehicle can be used as a jump-start aid » page 209, Jump-starting. ■ Do not switch the engine off immediately at the end of your journey after the engine has been operated over a prolonged period at high loads but leave it to run at an idling speed for about 1 minute. This prevents any possible accumulation £ of heat when the engine is switched off. ■

Starting-off and Driving

109

For the sake of the environment Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary. If possible, start your journey as soon as the engine has started. Through this the engine reaches its operating temperature more rapidly and the pollutant emissions are lower.

Note The engine can only be started with a genuine ŠKODA key with the matching code. ■ The engine running noises may louder at first be louder for a short time after starting the cold engine. This is quite normal and is not an operating problem. ■ After switching off the ignition, the radiator fan can intermittently continue to operate for approx. 10 minutes. ■ If the engine also does not start after the second attempt, the fuse for the electric fuel pump (petrol engines) or the control unit for the glow plug system or glow plug system relay and fuel pump (diesel engine) could be faulty. Check the fuse and replace, if necessary » page 214 or seek assistance from a specialist garage. ■ We recommend locking the steering wheel whenever leaving the vehicle. This  acts as a deterrent against the attempted theft of your car. ■

Adjusting the steering wheel position

› First of all adjust the driver's seat » page 72. › Pull the lever below the steering wheel down » Fig. 112 - . › Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position (with regard to the height and forward/back position).

› Push the lever upwards to the stop.



Electromechanical power steering

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 109.

The power steering enables you to steer the vehicle with less physical force. With the electromechanical power steering, the steering assist is automatically adapted to the speed and to the steering angle. It is still possible to fully steer the vehicle if the power steering fails or if the engine is not running (vehicle being towed in). However, greater physical effort is required to turn the steering wheel. If there is a fault in the power steering, the warning light  or  lights up in the instrument cluster » page 25.



Electronic immobiliser

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 109.

An electronic chip is integrated in the head of the key. The immobiliser is deactivated with the aid of this chip when the key is inserted in the ignition lock. The electronic immobiliser is automatically activated when the ignition key is withdrawn from the lock. The engine will not start if a non-authorised ignition key is used. The following is displayed in the information display: Fig. 112 Adjustable steering wheel: Lever below the steering wheel/safe distance to the steering wheel

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 109.

The height and forward/back position of the steering wheel can be adjusted.

110

Using the system

Immobiliser active.



Vehicles with a diesel engine are equipped with a glow plug system. The preglow indicator light  comes on after the ignition has been switched on. The engine should be started immediately after the preglow indicator light goes out.

Ignition lock Fig. 113 Positions of the vehicle key in the ignition lock

You should not switch on any major electrical components during the heating period otherwise the vehicle battery will be drained unnecessarily. Procedure for starting the engine › Before starting the engine, place the gearshift lever into neutral or place the selector lever in the position P or N and firmly put on the handbrake. › Fully depress and hold the clutch pedal, switch on the ignition 2 and start 3 » Fig. 113 - do not operate the accelerator. Depress the clutch pedal until the engine starts. › Let go of the key as soon as the engine starts. After letting go, the vehicle key will return to position 2 . › If the engine does not start within 10 seconds, abort the start-up process and turn the key to position 1 . Repeat the start-up process after approx. half a minute. › Release the handbrake before starting off.

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 109.

Petrol engines 1 - ignition switched off, engine off, the steering can be locked. 2 - ignition switched on

The engine will not start if the clutch pedal is not depressed.

3 - start engine

The following is displayed in the information display: Depress clutch to start!

Diesel engines 1 - interruption of fuel supply, ignition switched off, engine switched off, the steering can be locked

The following is shown in the information display of the information cluster: CLUTCH

2 - heating glow plugs on, ignition switched on 3 - start engine

Switching the engine off

To lock the steering, with the ignition key withdrawn, turn the steering wheel until the steering locking pin engages audibly. If the steering is locked and the key cannot or can only be turned with difficulty into the position 2 , move the steering wheel back and forth and the steering lock will unlock.



ä 

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 109.

Switch off the engine by turning the ignition key into position 1 » Fig. 113.



Starting engine

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 109. ings

Starting-off and Driving

111

KESSY system

Unlocking and locking the steering

Introduction

Fig. 114 Starter button

This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Unlocking and locking the steering Switching on the ignition Switching off the ignition Emergency ignition shutoff system Starting engine Emergency start-up of engine Switching the engine off

112 113 113 113 113 114 114

The KESSY system makes it possible to switch the ignition on/off and to start/ stop the engine without actively using the key. A valid key must be in the vehicle to unlock the steering, switch on the steering and start the vehicle.

WARNING ■ Never switch off the ignition while driving, as the electromechanical power steering and brake booster will no longer operate - risk of accident! ■ Never leave the valid keys in the vehicle, if leaving children unattended in the vehicle. Otherwise the children could start the engine - risk of accident!

Note ■ After pressing the starter button while the steering is locked, the steering is unlocked, the electrical components are activated (e.g. radio, navigation system etc.) and the igntion is switched on. ■ If you do not leave the vehicle after locking the steering and wish to unlock the steering again, press the starter button. At the same time, electrical components are activated (e.g. radio, navigation system etc.) and the ignition is switched on. ■ The KESSY system is protected against inadvertently switching off the engine while driving, this means that the engine can only be switched off in an emergency » page 113. ■ The steering is not unlocked or locked if the starter button is repeatedly press ed at short intervals.

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 112. ings

Unlocking the steering › Open the driver's door and get into the vehicle. › Close the driver's door, and the steering is unlocked within 2 seconds. Locking steering › Stop the vehicle. › Switch off the engine or the ignition by pressing the starter button » Fig. 114. › Open the driver's door and the steering is locked. If the driver's door is opened and the ignition is switched off afterwards, the steering is only locked after the vehicle is locked. If the steering is locked and the KESSY system does not manage to unlock the steering lock the first time (e.g. if the wheels are resting against the curb), the attempt will be repeated twice by the system. If the steering lock is then not unlocked, the following is shown in the information display or information display of the instrument cluster: Move steering wheel! or MOVE STEERING Slightly move the steering and the system will complete 3 more attempts to unlock after 2 seconds. At the same time, the warning light  flashes. If the steering lock still does not unlock, the following message is displayed in the information display for 10 seconds: Steering wheel still locked. It is necessary to eliminate the possible cause which is preventing the unlocking and then repeat the attempt to unlock the steering.

112

Using the system



Maintain the clutch pedal depressed when starting vehicles fitted with a manual gearbox. On vehicles with an automatic gearbox, place the selector lever in position P or N and depress the brake pedal until the engine starts.

Switching on the ignition

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 112.

The engine will not start if the engine is started without the clutch pedal (vehicles with a manual gearbox) or brake pedal (vehicles with an automatic gearbox) being depressed.

The steering must be unlocked to switch on the ignition. › Briefly press the starter button » Fig. 114 and the ignition is switched on.

The following is displayed in the information display:

If the ignition is switched on and the driver's door is opened, the following message is shown in the information display: Switch off ignition!

Depress clutch to start! or Depress brake to start! and the indicator light  illuminates simultaneously. 

CLUTCH or BRAKE and the indicator light  illuminates simultaneously.

Switching off the ignition

ä ›

Petrol engines

› Press and hold the starter button » Fig. 114 until the engine starts.

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 112.

Diesel engines › Press and hold the starter button during the whole preglow period, the engine starts after the indicator light  has gone out.

Briefly press the starter button » Fig. 114 and the ignition is switched off.

The ignition can be switched off up to a speed of 2 km/h.

The diesel engine can also be started by pressing the starter button, the ignition is switched on and the preglow indicator light  illuminates. Wait until the preglow indicator light goes out and then press and hold the starter button until the engine starts.

On vehicles fitted with a manual gearbox, the clutch pedal must not be depressed after switching off the ignition otherwise the system would try to start. On vehicles fitted with an automatic gearbox, the selector lever must be in the position P or N and the brake pedal must not be depressed.



Emergency ignition shutoff system

The following is shown in the information display of the information cluster:

If the engine needs to be started quickly in an emergency (e.g. in a critical situation), the diesel engine can be started by pressing the starter button again before the preglow indicator light goes out.

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 112. ings

In an emergency, it is possible to switch off the ignition even at speeds greater than 2 km/h, by using the "emergency ignition shutoff system". › Press the starter button » Fig. 114 for longer than 1 second or twice within 1 second.



Starting engine

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 112.

Starting-off and Driving

113



Brakes and brake assist systems

Emergency start-up of engine

Fig. 115 Emergency start-up of engine

Introduction

This chapter contains information on the following subjects:

Information on braking Handbrake Stabilisation Control (ESC) Antilock brake system (ABS) Traction control system (ASR) Electronic differential lock (EDL) First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 112. ings

WARNING

If the authorised key is tested unsuccessfully, the following is shown in the information display or information display of the instrument cluster: The emergency start-up must be completed. › Press the starter button » Fig. 115 and then hold the key to the starter button or › press the starter button directly with the key.

Note 

Switching the engine off

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 112. ings

› Stop the vehicle. › Switch off the engine by pressing the starter button » Fig. 114, doing so switches off the ignition at the same time.

114

Using the system

The brake booster only operates when the engine is running. Greater physical effort for braking is required when the engine is switched off - risk of accident! ■ Depress the clutch pedal when stopping or braking a vehicle with a petrol engine and manual transmission in the low rev range. If you fail to do so, the functionality of the brake booster can be impaired - risk of accident! ■ If a front spoiler, full wheel trim, etc. is mounted retrospectively, it must be ensured that the air supply to the front wheel brakes is not reduced. Otherwise, the functionality of the brake system could be impaired - risk of accident! ■ Please note that the handbrake must be fully released. A handbrake which is only partially released can result in the rear brakes overheating, which can have a negative effect on the operation of the brake system - risk of accident! ■ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. The children might, for example, release the handbrake or take the vehicle out of gear. The vehicle might then move off - risk of accident! ■ A lack of fuel can cause irregular engine running or cause the engine to shut down. The brake assist systems would then be without function - risk of accident! ■ Adjust the speed and driving style to the current visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. The increased safety offered by the brake assist systems must not tempt you to take greater risks than otherwise - risk of an accident! ■ The normal braking system is still fully functional if there is an ABS fault. Visit a specialist garage immediately and adjust your style of driving according to the damage to the ABS as you will not know how great the damage is and the limitation it is placing on the braking efficiency. ■

Key not found. or No Key

During an emergency start-up of the engine, the correct orientation of the key must be kept » Fig. 115.

115 115 116 117 117 117



CAUTION Observe the information on the new brake pads » page 166. Never let the brakes slip with light pressure on the pedal if braking is not necessary. This causes the brakes to overheat and can also result in a longer braking distance and excessive wear. ■ All four wheels must be fitted with the same tyres approved by the manufacturer to ensure the brake assist systems operate correctly. ■ ■

Note If the brakes are applied in full and the control unit for the braking system considers the situation to be dangerous for the following traffic, the brake light flashes automatically. After the speed was reduced below around 10 km/h or the vehicle was stopped, the brake light stops flashing and the hazard warning light system switches on. The hazard warning light system is switched off automatically after accelerating or driving off again. ■ Before negotiating a steep downhill section, reduce the speed, shift down into the next lower gear (manual gearbox) or select a lower drive position (automatic gearbox). As a result, the braking effect of the engine will be used, reducing the load on the brakes. Any additional braking should be completed intermittently, not continuously. ■ Changes to the vehicle (e.g. to the engine, brakes, chassis or another combination of tyres and wheel rims) can influence the functionality of the brake assist systems » page 201, Accessories, changes and replacement of parts. ■ If a fault occurs in the ABS system, the ESC, ASR and EDL also do not work. A  warning light comes on if a fault occurs in the ABS system  » page 29. ■

Wet roads or road salt The performance of the brakes can be delayed as the brake discs and brake pads may be moist or have a coating of ice or layer of salt on them in winter. The brakes are cleaned and dried by applying the brakes several times. Corrosion Corrosion on the brake discs and dirt on the bake pads occur if the vehicle has been parked for a long period and if you do not make much use of the braking system. If the brake system is not used much or if there is corrosion on the surface, we recommend cleaning the brake discs by firmly applying the brakes from a fairly high speed. Faults in the brake surface If it is found that the braking distance has suddenly become longer and that the brake pedal can be depressed further, the brake system may be faulty. Visit a specialist garage immediately and adjust your style of driving appropriately as you will not know how great the damage is. Low brake fluid level An insufficient level of brake fluid may result in problems in the brake system. The level of the brake fluid is monitored electronically » page 30, Brake system . Brake booster The brake booster increases the pressure generated with the brake pedal. The brake booster only operates when the engine is running.

Handbrake Fig. 116 Centre console: Handbrake

Information on braking



First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 114.

Wear-and-tear The wear of the brake pads is dependent on the operating conditions and driving style. The brake pads wear more quickly if a lot of journeys are completed in towns and over short distances or if a very sporty style of driving is adopted. If operated under severe conditions, the thickness of the brake pads must be checked by a specialist garage before the next service appointment.

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 114.

Applying the handbrake › Pull the handbrake lever firmly upwards.

Starting-off and Driving

115

Releasing the handbrake › Pull the handbrake lever up slightly and at the same time push in the locking button » Fig. 116. › Move the lever right down while pressing the lock button.

The ESC cannot be switched off, the button  » Fig. 117 only deactivates the ASR system and the indicator light  in the instrument cluster lights up.

The handbrake warning light  lights up when the handbrake is applied, provided the ignition is on.

In the event of an ESC fault, the ESC indicator light illuminates in the instrument cluster  » page 28.

A warning signal sounds if the vehicle is inadvertently driven off with the handbrake applied.

The following systems are integrated into the stabilisation control (ESC): › Antilock brake system (ABS), › Traction control (ASR), › Electronic Differential Lock (EDL), › active driver-steering recommendation (DSR), › Brake Assist, › Uphill Start Assist.

During an intervention of the system, the warning light  flashes in the instrument cluster.

The following is displayed in the information display: Release parking brake! The handbrake warning is activated if the vehicle is driven at a speed of more than 6 km/h for more than 3 seconds.

Stabilisation Control (ESC) Fig. 117 ESC system: ASR button

Active driver-steering recommendation (DSR) This function indicates to the driver in critical situations a steering recommendation in order to stabilise the vehicle. The active driver-steering recommendation is activated, for example, on the right and left vehicle side when braking sharply on different road surfaces. Brake Assist The brake assist system is activated by the very quick operation of the brake pedal (e.g. in the event of danger). It increases the braking effect and helps to shorten the braking distance. To achieve the shortest possible braking distance, the brake pedal must be applied firmly and held in this position until the vehicle has come to a complete standstill. The ABS is activated faster and more effectively with the intervention of the brake assist system.

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 114.

The ESC is automatically activated after starting the engine. The ESC helps to maintain control of the vehicle in situations where it is being operated at its dynamic limits, such as a sudden change to the direction of travel. The risk of skidding is reduced and your car thus offers greater driving stability depending on the conditions of the road surface. The direction which the driver wishes to take is determined based on the steering angle and the speed of the vehicle and is constantly compared with the actual behaviour of the vehicle. In the event of deviations, such as if the car starts to skid, the ESC automatically brakes the appropriate wheel.

116



Using the system

The brake assist function is automatically switched off when the brake pedal is released. Uphill start assist system The uphill start assist makes it easier to start off on steep hills. The system holds the brake pressure produced by the activation of the brake pedal for approx. 2 seconds after the brake pedal is released. The driver can therefore move his foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and start off on the slope, without having to actuate the handbrake. The brake pressure drops gradually the more you operate the accelerator pedal. If the vehicle does not start off within 2 £ seconds, it starts to roll back.

The uphill start assist is active as of a 5 % slope, if the driver door is closed. It is always active on slopes when in forward or reverse start off. When driving downhill, it is inactive.



Antilock brake system (ABS)

The TCS should normally always be switched on. It may be advisable to switch off the system in certain exceptional circ*mstances, such as: › when driving with snow chains, › when driving in deep snow or on a very loose surface, › when it is necessary to “rock a vehicle free” when it has got stuck. Ensure the ASR is switched on again afterwards.

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 114.

During an intervention of the system, the ASR indicator light  flashes in the instrument cluster.

ABS prevents the wheels locking when braking. Thus helping the driver to maintain control of the vehicle.

The TCS warning light lights up in the instrument cluster when there is a fault on the TCS  » page 28.

The intervention of the ABS is noticeable from the pulsating movements of the brake pedal which is accompanied by noises.

If necessary, the ASR can be switched off and on again by pressing the button  » Fig. 118, or on vehicles with ESP, by pressing the button  » Fig. 117. The TCS warning light lights up in the instrument cluster when the TCS is switched off . 

Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal during the intervention of the ABS. The ABS deactivates if the brake pedal is released. Never interrupt the appli cation of the brakes during the intervention of the ABS!

Electronic differential lock (EDL)

Traction control system (ASR) Fig. 118 ASR button

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 114.

If one of the wheels starts to spin, the EDL system brakes the spinning wheel and transfers the driving force to the other wheels. This ensures the stability of the vehicle and a quick journey. The EDL switches off automatically if unusually severe stresses exist in order to avoid excessive heat generation in the disc brake on the wheel which is being braked. The vehicle can continue to be driven and has the same characteristics as a vehicle not fitted with EDL. The EDL switches on again automatically as soon as the brake has cooled down.

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 114.

The ASR is automatically activated after starting the engine. If the wheels are slipping, the ASR adapts the engine speed to the conditions of the road surface. The ASR makes it much easier to start off, accelerate and climb steep hills even if the conditions of the road surface are unfavourable.

Starting-off and Driving

117



Only use footmats from the range of ŠKODA Original Accessories, which are fitted to two attachment points.

Shifting (manual gearbox)

WARNING

Fig. 119 The shift pattern: 5-speed or 6speed manual gearbox

No objects are allowed in the driver's footwell – risk of obstruction or limitation in operating the pedal!

■



Parking aid Always depress the clutch pedal fully when changing gear, to prevent excessive wear of the clutch. The following must also be observed when changing gear » page 14, Recommended gear. Only engage reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary. Depress the clutch pedal and hold it fully depressed. Wait a moment before reverse gear is engaged to avoid any shift noises. The reversing lights will come on once reverse gear is engaged, provided the ignition is on.

Fig. 120 Parking aid: Range of the sensors/activating the parking aid The parking aid determines the distance between the front or rear bumper and an obstacle with the aid of ultrasound sensors. The sensors are integrated in the front/rear bumper.

WARNING Never engage reverse gear when driving - risk of accident!

The signal tones for the front parking aid sound higher than for the rear parking aid. The tones of the parking aid can be adapted in the menu of the Information display » page 20.

Note If not in the process of changing gear, do not leave your hand on the gearshift lever while driving. The pressure from the hand can cause the gearshift mechanism to wear excessively.

Pedals The operation of the pedals must not be hindered under any circ*mstances! In the driver's footwell, only a footmat, which is attached to the two corresponding attachment points, may be used.

118

Using the system



Range of sensors The distance warning begins at a distance of about 160°cm from the obstacle at the rear of the vehicle and about 120 cm from the obstacle in front of the vehicle A » Fig. 120. The interval between the warning signals becomes shorter as the clearance is reduced. A continuous tone sounds from a distance of approx. 30 cm B » Fig. 120 - danger area. From this moment on do not continue driving! On vehicles with a factory-fitted radio or navigation system, the distance to the obstacle is simultaneously graphically illustrated on the display, refer to the oper£ ating instructions for the radio or navigation system.

On vehicles with a factory-fitted towing device, the border of the danger area starts (continuous tone) 5 cm further away from the vehicle. The length of the vehicle can be increased with an installed detachable towing device. On vehicles with a factory-fitted towing device, the rear sensors are deactivated when towing a trailer. Activating/deactivating the rear parking aid The parking aid is activated automatically when reverse gear is engaged and the ignition is turned on. This is confirmed by a brief audible signal. The parking aid is deactivated by removing the reverse gear. Activating/deactivating the front and rear parking aid The parking aid is activated when the ignition is turned on and reverse gear is engaged and or by pressing the button  » Fig. 120 - the symbol  lights up in the button. This is confirmed by a brief audible signal. The parking aid is deactivated by pressing the button  or at a speed of more than 10 km/h – the symbol  in the button is no longer illuminated.

WARNING The parking aid is not a substitute for the driver paying proper attention and it is always the driver's responsibility to take care when reversing the vehicle or carrying out similar manoeuvres. Pay particular attention to small children and animals as they are not recognised by the parking aid sensors. ■ Before reversing or parking, check that there is no small obstacle, such as a rock, thin post, trailer drawbar etc., in front of or behind the vehicle. Such obstacles may not be recognised by the parking aid sensors. ■ Under certain circ*mstances, surfaces of certain objects and types of clothing cannot reflect the signals from the parking aid. Thus, these objects or people who wear such clothing are not recognised by the parking aid sensors. ■ External sound sources can have a detrimental effect on the parking aid. Under unfavourable conditions, objects or people may not be recognised. ■

Note ■ If a warning signal sounds for about 3 seconds after activating the system and there is no obstacle close to your car, this indicates a system fault. The fault is confirmed additionally when the symbol  flashes in the button  . Have the fault rectified by a specialist garage. ■ The sensors must be kept clean (free of ice, etc.) to enable the parking aid to operate properly. ■ If the parking aid is activated and the selector lever of the automatic gearbox is in the position P, the warning signal is interrupted (the vehicle cannot move).



Park assist

Introduction

This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Park assist display on the information display Parking with the help of the park assist system and completing the parking procedure Messages in the information display

120 121 121

The parking aid is part of the park assist system, therefore the information and safety guidelines » page 118, Parking aid must be read and observed. The park assist system helps you to park in a suitable parallel parking space between two vehicles or behind a vehicle. After switching on the ignition and when driving at a speed of up to 30 km/h, the park assist system automatically searches for suitable parking spaces on the driver's and passenger's side of the vehicle. During the parking procedure the park assist only takes over the steering movements, the pedals continue to be operated by the driver. If the park assist system is switched on, a yellow indicator light illuminates up in the button » Fig. 121. The function of the system is based on:

› the measurement and evaluation of the size of parking spaces when driving, › the definition of the correct position of the vehicle for parking, › the calculation of the line on which the vehicle drives backwards into the parking space,

› the automatic turning of the front wheels when parking. Starting-off and Driving

119

WARNING

Park assist display on the information display

The park assist does not take away the responsibility from the driver when parking. ■ External sound sources can have a detrimental effect on the park assist system and parking aid. Under unfavourable conditions, objects or people may not be recognised. ■

CAUTION If other vehicles are parked behind or on the kerb, the park assist guides your vehicle beyond the kerb or onto it. Ensure that the wheels or the wheel rims of your vehicle are not damaged and if necessary intervene in time. ■ Under certain circ*mstances, surfaces or structures of certain objects, such as wire mesh fences, powder snow etc., cannot be recognised by the system. ■ The evaluation of the parking space and the parking procedure depends on the circumference of the wheels. The system only works correctly if the vehicle is fitted with the wheel size approved by the manufacturer. If wheels other than those approved by the manufacturer are mounted, the resulting position of the vehicle in the parking space can differ slightly. This can be avoided by readjusting the system at a specialist garage. Under certain circ*mstances, the system may not function correctly, for example, if the vehicle is fitted with snow chains or a temporary spare wheel. ■

Note The traction control system (ASR) must always be switched on when parking. Only the front parking aid operates if you are towing a trailer (applies only to vehicles with a factory-fitted towing device). This is why it is not possible to reverse into a parking space with the help of the park assist system when towing a trailer. ■ If the sensors find a suitable parking space, they store its parameters until another suitable parking space has been found or until a distance of 10 m had been driven after finding the parking space. This is why it is possible to switch on the park assist after driving past the parking space and the information on whether  this parking space is suitable for parking appears in the information display. ■ ■

120

Using the system

Fig. 121 Switch on display of the park assist in the information display/information display: Finding a suitable parking space

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 119.

Switch on display of the park assist in the information display › Press the button » Fig. 121. › Drive past the parking row at up to maximum 30 km/h and a distance of 0.5 m to 1.5 m » Fig. 121. The search area for the parking space on the driver's side is automatically indicated on the information display. Activate the turn signal on the driver's side if you wish to park on this side of the road. In the information display the search area for the parking space is indicated on the driver's side. If the button is pressed at a speed greater than 30 km/h and less than 50 km/h, the message indicating that the speed for detecting the space has been exceeded will be shown on the display of the instrument cluster. If the speed drops below 30 km/h, the condition of the park assist system is automatically displayed in the display of the instrument cluster. When exceeding a speed of 50 km/h, it is necessary to activate the display again by pressing the button » Fig. 121.



Parking with the help of the park assist system and completing the parking procedure

Fig. 122 Information display: Parking space detected including the information to continue driving  and to engage reverse gear 

› As soon as the following message is shown in the information display: Steering

intervent. active. Check area around veh.! , let go of the steering wheel and the steering is taken over by the system. › Observe the direct vicinity of the vehicle and reverse carefully. › In the event that the parking procedure cannot be carried out in one go, the parking process is completed in further stages. If the arrow in the information display is flashing to the front  » Fig. 123, engage 1st gear or move the selector lever into the position D. › Wait until the steering wheel automatically turns into the required position and then carefully drive forwards. › If the arrow in the information display is flashing towards the rear  » Fig. 123, engage reverse gear or move the selector lever into the position R. › Wait until the steering wheel automatically turns into the required position and then carefully reverse. You can repeat these steps several times. › Terminate the parking procedure based on the distance information provided by the park assist system. As soon as the parking procedure is completed, an audible signal sounds and the following message appears in the information display: Steering interv. finished. Please take over steering! Switch off park assist

Fig. 123 Information display: Information to engage the forward gear  or the reverse gear 

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 119. ings

The time limit for the parking procedure with the help of the park assist system is 180 seconds. › If the Park Assist has recognised a suitable parking space, it is shown in the information display » Fig. 122. › Continue driving forwards until the display  » Fig. 122 appears. › Stop the vehicle for at least 1 second. › Engage reverse gear or move the selector lever into the position R.

The park assist switches off during one of the following occurrences: › Speed of 30 km/h exceeded; › Speed of 7 km/h exceeded during the parking procedure; › Time limit of 180 seconds for the parking procedure exceeded; › Button for the park assist system pressed; › Parking aid activated; › ASR system switched off; › Automatic steering procedure interrupted by the driver (stopping the steering wheel); › Reverse gear disengaged or selector lever removed from the position R when reversing into the parking space.



Messages in the information display

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 119.

Park Assist finished. The parking procedure has ended or after switching on the ignition, the vehicle has not been driven above 10 km/h.

Starting-off and Driving

121

Park Assist: Speed too high. Reduce the speed to below 30 km/h.

ASR intervention! Please take over steering! The parking procedure is terminated by the intervention of the ASR.

Driver steering intervention: Please take over steering! The parking procedure is terminated due to driver intervention.

Park Assist: Stationary time not sufficient. The stationary time of the vehicle was less than 1 second.

Park Assist finished. ASR deactivated. The parking procedure cannot be carried out because the ASR system is switched off.

Park Assist: Speed too low. After the ignition is switched on, the vehicle must exceed the speed of 10 km/h at  least once.

ASR deactivated. Please take over steering! The parking procedure was ended because the ASR system was switched off during the parking procedure. Trailer: Park Assist finished. The parking procedure is not possible because the trailer is hitched and a plug is inserted in the socket of the towing device. Time limit exceeded. Please take over steering! The parking procedure was ended because a time limit of 180 seconds for parking was exceeded. Park Assist currently not available. The Park Assist cannot be switched on because a fault exists on the vehicle. Have the fault rectified by a specialist garage. Park Assist ended. System currently not available. The parking procedure was ended because a fault exists on the vehicle. Have the fault rectified by a specialist garage. Park Assist faulty. Workshop! The parking procedure is not possible because a fault exists on the park assist. Have the fault rectified by a specialist garage. Steering intervent. active. Check area around veh.! The Park Assist is active and takes over the steering movements. Observe the surrounding area and carefully reverse while operating the pedals. Please take over steering! Finish parking manually! Assume control of the steering. Complete the parking procedure without using the park assist system. Speed too high! Please take over steering! The parking procedure was ended because the speed was exceeded. Park Assist: ASR intervention. The intervention of the ASR while searching for a suitable parking place.

122

Using the system

Cruise control system (CCS)

Introduction

This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Storing a speed Changing a stored speed Switching off the cruise control system temporarily Switching off the cruise control system completely

123 123 123 124

The cruise control system (CCS) maintains a constant speed, more than 30 km/h (20 mph), once it has been set, without you having to depress the accelerator pedal. This is only possible within the range which is permitted by the power output and braking power of the engine. The indicator light  illuminates in the instrument cluster when the cruise control system is activated.

WARNING For safety reasons, the cruise control system must not be used in dense traffic or on unfavourable road surfaces (such as icy roads, slippery roads, loose gravel) - risk of accident! ■ The saved speed may only be resumed if it is not too high for the current traffic conditions. ■ Always switch off the cruise control system after use to prevent unintentional use of the system.

■

CAUTION

Changing a stored speed

Always depress the clutch pedal if switching to the neutral position (vehicle with a manual gearbox) when the cruise control system is switched on! Otherwise the engine can rev up unintentionally. ■ The cruise control system is not able to maintain a constant speed when driving in areas with steeper gradients. The weight of the vehicle increases the speed at which it travels. Therefore, shift to a lower gear in good time or slow the vehicle down by applying the foot brake.

■

Increasing the speed with the accelerator › Depress the accelerator to increase the speed. › Release the accelerator to reduce the speed back down to the preset speed. However, if the saved speed is exceeded by more than 10 km/h for a period of more than 5 minutes by depressing the accelerator, the stored speed is deleted from the memory. The speed then has to be saved again.

Note ■ It is not possible on vehicles fitted with an automatic gearbox to switch on the cruise control system if the selector lever is in the position P, N or R.



Storing a speed

The speed can also be reduced by depressing the brake pedal, which temporarily deactivates the system.

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 122.

Storing a speed › Turn the switch A » Fig. 124 into the ON position. › After the desired speed has been reached, press the rocker button B into the SET position. After you have released the rocker button B out of the position SET, the speed you have just stored is maintained at a constant speed without having to depress the accelerator.

Increasing the speed with the rocker button B › Press the rocker button B » Fig. 124 into the RES position. › The speed will increase continuously, if the rocker button is pressed and held in the RES position. Release the rocker button once the desired speed is reached. The set speed is then stored in the memory. Decreasing the speed › The stored speed can be reduced by pressing the rocker button B into the position SET. › The speed will decrease continuously, if the rocker button is pressed and held in the SET position. Release the rocker button once the desired speed is reached. The set speed is then stored in the memory. › If the rocker button is released at a speed of less than 30 km/h, the speed is not stored and the memory is erased. The speed must then be stored again by pressing the rocker button B in the position SET after increasing the speed of the vehicle to more than 30 km/h.

Fig. 124 Turn signal and main beam lever: Rocker switch and switch of the cruise control system

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 122.



Switching off the cruise control system temporarily

ä 

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 122.

The cruise control system is temporarily switched off by pressing the switch A » Fig. 124 into the spring-tensioned position CANCEL or by depressing the brake or clutch pedal. The set speed remains stored in the memory.

Starting-off and Driving

123

Briefly press the rocker button B into the position RES to resume the stored speed after the clutch or brake pedal is released.



When start-stop mode is deactivated, the warning light in the button lights up.

Switching off the cruise control system completely

If the vehicle is in the stop phase when manually switching off the system, the engine starts immediately.

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 122.

› Turn the switch

A » Fig. 124 into the OFF position.

Switching the START-STOP system on and off The START-STOP system can be switched on/off by pressing the button » Fig. 125.



The START-STOP system is very complex. Some of the procedures are hard to check without servicing. The general conditions for the proper functioning of the START-STOP system are listed in the following overview. Conditions for the automatic engine shut down (stop phase)

START-STOP Fig. 125 Button for the START-STOP system

The START-STOP system helps you to save fuel while at the same time reducing harmful exhaust emissions and CO2 emissions.

› The gearshift lever is in Neutral. › The clutch pedal is not depressed. › The driver has fastened the seat belt. › The driver's door is closed. › The bonnet is closed. › The vehicle is at a standstill. › The factory-fitted towing device is not electrically connected to a trailer. › The engine is at operating temperature. › The charge state of the vehicle battery is sufficient. › The stationary vehicle is not on a steep slope or a steep downhill section. › The engine speed is less than 1200 1/min. › The temperature of the vehicle battery is not too low or too high. › There is sufficient pressure in the braking system. › The difference between the outdoor- and the set temperature in the interior is not too great.

The function is automatically activated each time the ignition is switched on.

› The vehicle speed since the last time the engine was switched off was greater

In the start-stop mode, the engine automatically switches to the vehicle's idle phase, e.g. when stopped at traffic lights.

› No cleaning of the diesel particle filter takes place » page 24 › The front wheels are not turned excessively (the steering angle is less than 3/4

Information regarding the current state of the START-STOP system is indicated in the display of the instrument cluster. Automatic engine shut down (stop phase)

› Stop the vehicle (where necessary, apply the handbrake). › Take the vehicle out of gear. › Release the clutch pedal. Automatic renewed engine restart (start phase). › Depress the clutch pedal.

124

Using the system

than 3 km/h.

of a steering wheel revolution).

Conditions for an automatic restart (start phase) › The clutch is depressed. › The max./min. temperature is set. › The Defrost function for the windshield is switched on. › A high blower stage has been selected. › The START STOP button is pressed.

Conditions for an automatic restart without driver intervention › The vehicle moves at a speed of more than 3 km/h. › The difference between the outdoor- and the set temperature in the interior is too great. › The charge state of the vehicle battery is not sufficient. › There is insufficient pressure in the braking system. If the driver's seat belt is removed for more than 30 seconds or the driver's door is opened during stop mode, the engine must be started manually with the key. The following messages in the instrument cluster display must be observed.

Note ■ Changes to the outdoor temperature can have an effect on the internal temperature of the vehicle battery even after several hours. If the vehicle remains outdoors for a long time in minus temperatures or in direct sunlight, it can take several hours until the internal temperature of the vehicle battery reaches a suitable temperature for proper operation of the START STOP system. ■ If the Climatronic is running in automatic mode, under certain conditions, the  engine may not switch off automatically.

Messages in the instrument cluster display (valid for vehicles without Information display) ERROR START STOP Error in the START-STOP system START STOP NOT POSSIBLE

Automatic engine shut down is not possible.

START STOP ACTIVE

Automatic engine shut down (stop phase)

SWITCH OFF IGNITION START MANUALLY

Switch off the ignition. Start the engine manually.

WARNING The brake servo unit and power steering only operate if the engine is running. ■ Never let the vehicle roll with the engine switched off.

■

CAUTION If the START-STOP system is used at very high outside temperatures over a very long period of time, the vehicle battery can be damaged.

Starting-off and Driving

125

WARNING (Continued)

Automatic gearbox

If stopping on a hill (downhill gradient), never try to maintain the vehicle stationary with the gear engaged by means of the “accelerator pedal”, i.e. by letting the clutch slip. This can lead to overheating of the clutch. If there is a risk of overheating of the clutch due to overload, the clutch is opened automatically and the vehicle rolls backward - risk of accident! ■ If you have to stop on a slope, depress and hold the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from rolling back. ■ On a smooth or slippery road surface using the kickdown function can cause the driven wheels to spin - risk of skidding! ■

Automatic gearbox

Introduction

This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Introductory information Starting-off and driving Selector lever positions Manual shifting of gears (Tiptronic) Selector lever lock Kickdown function Dynamic shift programme Emergency programme Selector lever-emergency unlocking

126 127 127 128 129 129 129 130 130

WARNING Do not depress the accelerator if changing the position of the selector lever when the vehicle is stationary and the engine is running - risk of accident! ■ Never move the selector lever into position R or P when driving - risk of an accident! ■ When the engine is running and the vehicle is stationary, it is necessary to hold the car with the brake pedal in all the positions of the selector lever (except P and N) since the power transmission is never completely interrupted, also not when the engine is idling - the vehicle creeps. ■ The selector lever must be placed into position P and the handbrake firmly applied before the bonnet can be opened and work on the running engine can be completed - risk of accident! The safety guidelines must always be observed » page 183, Engine compartment.

CAUTION The double clutch on the automatic gearbox DSG is equipped with an overload protection. If the uphill function is used when the vehicle is stationary or driving slowly uphill, the thermal stress on the clutches is increased. ■ In the event that they overheat, the symbol  appears in the information display with the warning text » page 31. In such a case, stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and wait until the symbol and warning go out - risk of damaging the gearbox! The journey can be continued as soon as the symbol and the warning go out. ■



■

Introductory information

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 126. ings

Shifting up and down through the gears is performed automatically. However, the gearbox can also be switched into Tiptronic mode. This mode makes it possible for you to also shift gears manually » page 128. The engine can only be started when the selector lever is in position P or N . If the selector lever is not in the P or N positions when locking the steering, switching the ignition on or off or when leaving the engine on, the following message will appear in the Information display Move selector lever to position P/N! or, in the instrument cluster display:  P/N. At temperatures below -10 °C the engine can only be started in the selector lever £ position P 1).

Applies to DSG.

126

Using the system

When parking on a level road surface, it suffices to engage selector lever position P. When parking on a slope, the handbrake should be applied firmly before the park position is selected. This ensures that there is no excessive pressure on the lock mechanism and that it is subsequently easier to move the selector lever out of position P. If the selector lever position N is accidentally selected while driving, it is first necessary to release pressure on the accelerator pedal and wait for the idling speed of the engine to be reached before the selector lever can be engaged in the drive position.

Selector lever positions



Starting-off and driving

Fig. 126 Selector lever/information display: Selector lever positions

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 126.

Starting off › Firmly depress and hold the brake pedal. › Press the Shiftlock button (button in the selector lever handle), move the selector lever into the desired position, e.g. D » page 127 and then release the Shiftlock button. › Wait a moment until the gearbox has shifted (a slight engagement nudge can be felt) 1). › Release the brake pedal and accelerate.

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 126. ings

The current selector lever position is indicated in the information display of the instrument cluster 1 » Fig. 126. P - Parklock The driven wheels are locked mechanically in this position.

The Parklock must only be engaged when the vehicle is stationary.

Stop › The selector lever position N does not have to be selected when stopping for a short time, such as at a cross roads. It is sufficient to hold the vehicle stationary using the foot brake. The engine can, however, be allowed just to idle.

If you wish to move the selector lever into or out of this position, the Shiftlock button in the selector lever handle and the brake pedal must be actuated at the same time.

Parking › Depress the brake pedal. › Firmly apply the handbrake. › Press and Shiftlock button in the selector lever, move the selector lever to P and then release the Shiftlock button.

R - Reverse gear Reverse gear must only be engaged when the vehicle is stationary and the engine is idling.

If the battery is used, the selector lever cannot be moved out of the position P.



The brake pedal must be depressed and at the same time the Shiftlock must be pressed, if you wish to obtain the selector lever positions R, P or N. When the ignition is switched on and the selector lever is in position R, the reverse lights will come on.

Applies to AG.

Automatic gearbox

127

N - Neutral The transmission is in Neutral in this position.

The brake pedal must be depressed to move the selector lever out of the position N (if the lever is in this position for longer than 2 seconds) into the position D or R when the vehicle is travelling at less than 5 km/h or the vehicle is stationary and the ignition is switched on.

Tiptronic mode makes it possible to manually shift gears on the selector lever and multifunction steering wheel. Switching to manual shifting › Push the selector lever to the right out of position D. After switching over, the current engaged gear is indicated in the display.

D - Position for driving forward (normal programme)

When the selector lever is in this position, the forward gears are automatically shifted up and down in line with the engine load, vehicle speed and dynamic shift programme.

Shifting up gears › Press the selector lever fowards » Fig. 127 + . › Pull the right rocker switch + » Fig. 127 towards the multifunction steering wheel.

The brake pedal must be depressed to move the selector lever into position D from Nwhen the vehicle is travelling at less than 5 km/h or is stationary.

Shifting down gears › Press the selector lever backwards - . › Pull the left rocker switch - » Fig. 127 towards the multifunction steering wheel.

Under certain circ*mstances (e.g. when driving in mountainous regions or when towing a trailer) it may be beneficial to select the manual shift programme » page 128, Manual shifting of gears (Tiptronic) for a short time in order to adapt the gearbox ratios manually to the driving situations.

Temporarily switching to manual shifting

S - Position for driving forward (sports programme) Shifting up later into a higher gear makes it possible to fully exploit the power potential of the engine. The gearbox also then shifts down at higher engine speeds as in the position D.

The Shiftlock on the selector lever grip must be pressed when moving the selector lever out of the position D into the position S.

Manual shifting of gears (Tiptronic)

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 126.

› If the selector lever is in position D or S, pull the left rocker switch

- or the right rocker switch + towards the multifunction steering wheel. › Manual shifting switches off if the rocker switches - or + are not actuated for some time. You can also switch off the temporary switch-over to manual shifting by pressing the right rocker switch + for more than 1 second.



It is possible to switch to manual shifting when the car is stationary and when driving. When accelerating, the gearbox automatically shifts up into the higher gear just before the maximum permissible engine speed is reached. If a lower gear is selected, the gearbox does not shift down until there is no risk of the engine overrevving. If you operate the kickdown function, the gearbox shifts into a lower gear in line with the vehicle speed and engine speed.

Note The kickdown function is also available when manually shifting gears. Fig. 127 Selector lever and multifunction steering wheel

128

Using the system



Selector lever lock

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 126.

Automatic selector lever lock  With the ignition on, the selector lever is locked when it is in the positions P and N. The brake pedal must be depressed to move the selector lever out of this position. The indicator light  » page 22 illuminates in the instrument cluster as a reminder for the driver when the selector lever is in the positions P and N. The selector lever is not locked when quickly moving across the position N (e.g. from R to D). This, for example, helps to rock out a vehicle that is stuck. The selector lever lock will click into place if the lever is in the N position for more than 2 seconds without the brake pedal being pressed. The selector lever lock is only active if the vehicle is stationary or moving at speed of less than 5 km/hour. The lock is switched off automatically into position N when the car is travelling at a higher speed. Shiftlock button The Shiftlock button in the handle of selector lever prevents certain selector lever positions being engaged inadvertently. The selector lever lock is cancelled when the Shiftlock button is pressed. Ignition key withdrawal lock After the ignition is switched off, the ignition key can only be withdrawn if the selector lever is in the position P. If the ignition key is withdrawn, the selector lever  is blocked in position P.

Kickdown function

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 126.

The kickdown function provides you with maximum acceleration power.

eral gears in line with the driving state and the vehicle accelerates. The gearbox does not shift up into the highest gear until the engine has reached its maximum revolutions for this gear range.



Dynamic shift programme

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 126.

The automatic gearbox of your vehicle is controlled electronically. Shifting up and down through the gears is performed automatically on the basis of pre-defined driving programmes. Adopting a moderate style of driving will cause the gearbox to select the most economical driving programme. Shifting up into a higher gear as soon as possible and shifting down as late as possible will have a favourable effect on your fuel consumption. When adopting a sporty style of driving with rapid movements of the accelerator pedal combined with sharp acceleration, frequent changes in speed and exploiting the top speed of the car, the gearbox will adjust to this style of driving once the accelerator pedal (kickdown function) is depressed and will shift down earlier, frequently by several gears in comparison to a moderate style of driving. Selecting the most appropriate driving programme for the particular style of driving is a continuous process. Irrespective of this it is, however, possible to switch or shift down into a dynamic shift programme by depressing the accelerator rapidly. The gearbox shifts down into a lower gear in accordance with the speed, therefore enabling rapid acceleration (e.g. when overtaking) without the accelerator pedal having to be depressed into the kickdown range. The original programme will be reactivated to match your particular style of driving once the gearbox has shifted up again. When driving in hilly regions, the gears are selected to match uphill and downhill sections. This avoids the gearbox frequently shifting up and down when negotiating an uphill stretch. When driving downhill, it is possible to shift down into the Tiptronic position, in order to exploit the engine brake torque.

When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed, the kickdown function is activated in the desired driving program. This function has precedence over the driving programme and serves for maximum acceleration of the vehicle when exploiting the maximum power potential of the engine without taking into account the current selector lever position (D, S or Tiptronic). The gearbox shifts down to one or sev-

Automatic gearbox

129



› Firmly apply the handbrake. › Grasp the selector lever cover in the area of arrow

Emergency programme

1 » Fig. 128 and carefully pull upwards. › Also unlock the cover on the other side. › Use a finger to press the yellow plastic part in the direction of the arrow 2 . › Simultaneously press the Shiftlock button in the handle of the selector lever and shift the lever into the position N (if the selector lever is shifted back into the position P, it is blocked again).

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 126.

An emergency programme exists in the event of a fault in the system. The gearbox operates in a corresponding emergency programme if there are functional faults in the gearbox electronics. All of the display elements illuminate or go out. A functional fault can have the following effect:

› The gearbox only shifts into certain gears, › The reverse gear R cannot be used, › The manual shift programme is switched off in emergency mode. Note If the gearbox has switched to emergency mode, drive to a specialist garage to have the fault rectified as soon as possible.

Selector lever-emergency unlocking

Fig. 128 Selector lever-emergency unlocking

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 126.

In case of interruption of the power supply (e.g. flat vehicle battery, defective fuse) or defect of the selector lever lock, the selector lever can no longer be shifted from the position P in the normal way and the vehicle can no longer be moved. The selector lever must be unlocked in case of emergency.

130

Using the system



Automatic gearbox

131

WARNING (Continued)

Communication

If a mobile phone or a two-way radio system is operated in a vehicle without an external aerial or an external aerial which has been installed incorrectly, this can increase the strength of the electromagnetic field inside the vehicle. ■ Two-way radio systems, mobile phones or mounts must not be installed on airbag covers or within the immediate deployment range of the airbags. ■ Never leave a mobile phone on a seat, on the dash panel or in another area, from which it can be thrown during a sudden braking manoeuvre, an accident or a collision - risk of injury. ■ In the event of air transport, the Bluetooth® function for the hands-free system must be switched off by a specialist garage. ■

Mobile phones and two-way radio systems ŠKODA permits the operation of mobile phones and two-way radio systems with a professionally installed external aerial and a maximum transmission power of up to 10 watts. Please refer to a ŠKODA Service Partner for information about the possibilities of installing and operating mobile phones and two-way radio systems that have a transmission power of more than 10 W. Operating mobile phones or two-way radio systems may interfere with the functionality of the electronic systems in your vehicle. The reasons for this are as follows:

› no external aerial, › external aerial incorrectly installed, › transmission power greater than 10 watts. WARNING Concentrate fully at all times on your driving! As the driver you are fully responsible for road safety. Use the telephone system only to such an extent that you are in full control of your vehicle at any time. ■ The national regulations for using a mobile phone in a vehicle must be observed. ■

132

Using the system

Note We recommend that the installation of mobile phones and two-way radio systems in a vehicle is only carried out by a ŠKODA Service Partner. ■ Not all mobile phones that enable Bluetooth® communication are compatible with the universal telephone preinstallation GSM II or GSM III. Ask a ŠKODA Service Partner to find out if your phone is compatible with the universal telephone preinstallation GSM II or GSM III. ■ The range of the Bluetooth® connection to the hands-free system is restricted to the vehicle interior. The range is dependent on local factors, e.g. obstacles between the devices and mutual interferences with other devices. If your mobile phone is in a jacket pocket, for example, this can lead to difficulties when establishing a connection with the hands-free-system or transferring data. ■



Operating the phone on the multifunction steering wheel The driver can set the basic functions of the telephone by simply operating the buttons located on the steering wheel so that he can concentrate on the traffic situation without being distracted as little as possible by operating the telephone » Fig. 129. This applies only if your vehicle has been equipped with the universal telephone preinstallation (“hands-free system ”) at the factory. The buttons operate the functions for the operating mode of the current telephone. Fig. 129 Multifunction steering wheel: Control buttons for the telephone Button 1

a) b)

If the side lights are switched on, the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel are illuminated.

Action

Operation

press briefly

Switch on/off the voice control (Button PTT - Push to talk) Cancellation of the played message

turn upwards

Increase volume

turn downwards

Decrease volume

press briefly

Accept call, end call, entry in the main menu of the telephone, list of the dialed numbers, call the dialed contact

press button for a long period of time

Reject call, private calla) Reject call, list of the last calls, access to the main menu of the phone, list of dialled numbersb)

press briefly

Reach one level higher in the menu (according to the current position in the menu)

press button for a long period of time

Leave the phone menu

press briefly

Confirm menu selection

press button for a long period of time

To the next initial letter in the telephone book

turn upwards

The last chosen menu selection, name

turn downwards

The next menu selection, name

quickly turn upwards

To the previous initial letter in the telephone book

quickly turn downwards

To the next initial letter in the telephone book

Applies to GSM II. Applies to GSM III.



Communication

133

Symbols in the information display Symbol

Valid for GSM II, GSM III

Signal strengtha)

GSM II, GSM III



a phone is connected to the hands-free system.

GSM II, GSM III when connected via the HFP profile



The hands-free system is visible to other devices.

GSM II, GSM III when connected via the HFP profile



a phone is connected to the hands-free system.

GSM III when connected via the rSAP profile



The hands-free system is visible to other devices.

GSM III when connected via the rSAP profile



A multimedia unit is connected to the hands-free system.

GSM II, GSM III



A UMTS network is available.

GSM III



Internet connection via the hands-free system

GSM III when connected via the rSAP profile



Importance Charge status of the phone batterya)





This function is only supported by some mobile phones.

Phone Phonebook A phone phonebook is part of the hands-free system. This phone phonebook can be used depending on the type of mobile phone. After the first connection of the telephone, the system begins to load the phone book from the phone and the SIM card into the memory of the control unit. Each time the telephone has established a new connection with the hands-free system, an update of the relevant phone book is performed. The updating can take a few minutes. During this time the phone book, which was stored after the last update was completed, is available. Newly stored telephone numbers are only shown after the updating has ended. The update is interrupted if a telephone event (e.g. incoming or outgoing call, voice control dialogue) occurs during the updating procedure. After the telephone event has ended, the updating starts anew. GSM II In the phone phonebook there are 2500 free memory locations available. Each contact can contain up to 4 numbers. On vehicles fitted with the Columbus navigation system, a maximum of 1200 telephone contacts are shown on the display of this appliance. If the number of contacts loaded exceeds 2 500, the phone book is not complete.

134

Using the system

GSM III In the phone phonebook there are 2000 free memory locations available. Each contact can contain up to 5 numbers. On vehicles fitted with the Columbus navigation system, a maximum of 1000 telephone contacts are shown on the display of this appliance. If the telephone book of the mobile phone contains more than 2 000 contacts, the system announces during the download Phone book not fully loaded.



Universal telephone preinstallation GSM II Introductory information The universal telephone preinstallation GSM II (“hands-free system”) includes a convenience mode for the mobile phone via voice control, the multifunction steering wheel, the adapter, radio or the navigation system. The universal telephone preinstallation GSM II comprises the following functions. › Phone Phonebook » page 134. › Convenience operation of the telephone via the multifunction steering wheel » page 133. › Managing telephone calls via the adapter » page 136. £ › Operating the telephone via the information display » page 137.

› Voice control of the telephone » page 141. › Music playback from the telephone or other multimedia units » page 143.

Up to four mobile phones can be paired with the hands-free system, whereby only one mobile phone can communicate with the hands-free system.

All communication between a mobile phone and your vehicle's hands-free system is established with the help of Bluetooth® technology. The adapter serves only for charging the telephone and for transmitting the signal to the vehicle's external aerial.

The visibility of the hands-free system is automatically switched off 3 minutes after the ignition is switched on and is also deactivated when the mobile phone has connected to the hands-free system. Restoring the visibility of the hands-free system

Note The following guidelines must be observed » page 132, Mobile phones and twoway radio systems.

Connecting the mobile phone to the hands-free system To connect a mobile phone with the hands-free system, both of the devices have to be interconnected. Detailed information on this is provided in the operating instructions for your mobile phone. The following steps must be carried out for the connection: › Activate Bluetooth® and the visibility of your mobile phone on your telephone. › Switch on the ignition. › Select the menu Phone - New user in the information display and wait until the control unit has completed the search. › Select your mobile phone from the menu of the units found. › Confirm the PIN1). › If the hands-free system announces (as standard SKODA_BT) on the display of the mobile phone, enter the PIN1) within 30 seconds and wait, until the connection is established2). › After terminating the connection, confirm the creation of a new user profile in the information display. If there is no free space available to create a new user profile, delete an existing user profile.



If you have not managed to connect your mobile phone with the hands-free system within 3 minutes of switching on the ignition, the visibility of the hands-free system can be reestablished for 3 minutes in the following ways. › By turning the ignition off and on. › By turning voice control off and on. › Via the information display in the menu point Bluetooth - Visibility. Creating a connection with an already paired mobile phone After switching on the ignition, the connection is automatically established for the already paired mobile phone2). Check on your mobile phone if the automatic connection has been established. Disconnecting the connection › By withdrawing the ignition key. › By disconnecting the hands-free system in the mobile phone. › By disconnecting the user in the information display in the menu Bluetooth User. Solving connection problems If the system announces No paired phone found, check the operating state of the mobile phone. › Is the mobile phone switched on? › Is the PIN code entered? › Is Bluetooth® active? › Is the visibility of the mobile phone active? £ › Has the mobile phone already been paired with the hands-free system?

During the connecting procedure, no other mobile phone may be connected with the hands-free system.

1) 2)

Depending on the Bluetooth® version on the mobile phone, an automatically generated 6-digit PIN is either displayed or the PIN 1234 has to be entered manually. Some mobile phones have a menu, in which the authorisation for establishing a Bluetooth® connection is completed by inputting a code. If the authorisation input is required, it must always be performed when re-establishing the Bluetooth connection.

Communication

135

Note

CAUTION

■ If a suitable adapter is available for your mobile phone, only use your mobile phone in the adapter inserted in the telephone mount so that the radiation in the vehicle drops to a minimum. ■ Placing the mobile phone in the adapter inserted in the telephone mount ensures optimum sending and receiving power.

Inserting the mobile phone and adapter



Taking the mobile phone out of the adapter during the call can lead to interruption of the connection. When removing the mobile phone, the connection to the factory-fitted antenna is interrupted, which reduces the quality of the transmitting and receiving signal. The charging of the mobile phone battery is also interrupted.



Managing telephone calls with the help of the adapter

Fig. 130 Universal telephone preinstallation

Only one telephone mount is factory-fitted. An adapter for the mobile phone can be purchased from ŠKODA Original Accessories. Inserting the adapter and mobile phone › First of all push the adapter A in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 130 up to the stop into the mount. Then press the adapter slightly downwards, until it locks securely into position. › Insert the mobile phone into the adapter A (as specified in the instructions from the manufacturer of the adapter). Removing the adapter and mobile phone › Simultaneously press the locks on the mount » Fig. 130 and remove the adapter with the mobile phone.

Fig. 131 Principle sketch: single-button adapter/two-button adapter Function overview of the er » Fig. 131:



(PTT - “push to talk”) button on the adapt-

› Switch on/off voice control; › Accept/end a call. On some adapters include the button SOS » Fig. 131 A in addition to the button  . After pressing this button for 2 seconds, the number 112 (Emergency call) is dialled.

Note On vehicles fitted with the Columbus navigation system , the buttons do not work.

136

Using the system



and

SOS 

Operate the telephone via the information display The following menu points can be selected in the menu Phone: ■ Phone book ■ Dial number1) ■ Call register ■ Voice mailbox ■ Bluetooth1 ) ■ Settings2) ■ Back Phone book In the menu point Phone book is the list of the loaded contacts from the telephone memory and the SIM card of the mobile phone. Dial number Any telephone number can be written in the menu point Dial number. The required numbers must be selected one after the other using adjustment wheel and confirmed by pressing the adjustment wheel. Numbers 0 - 9, symbols , , # and the functions Cancel, Call, Delete can be selected. Call register The following menu points can be selected in the menu point Call register: ■ Missed calls ■ Dialled numbers ■ Received calls Voice mailbox In the menu Voice mailbox, it is possible to set the number of the voice mailbox1 ) and then dial the number. Bluetooth The following menu points can be selected in the menu Bluetooth: User - the overview of the stored users New user - Search for new mobile phones that are in the reception range Visibility - Switching on the visibility of the telephone unit for other devices

■ ■ ■

1) 2)

■

Media player Active device ■ Paired devices ■ Search Phone name - the possibility to change the name of the telephone unit (pre-set SKODA UHV) ■

■

Settings The following menu points can be selected in the menu Settings: Phone book ■ Update1 ) ■ List ■ Surname ■ First name ■ Ring tone

■

Back Return in the basic menu of the telephone.



Universal telephone preinstallation GSM IIl Introductory information The universal telephone preinstallation GSM II (“hands-free system”) includes a convenience mode for the mobile phone via voice control, the multifunction steering wheel, the radio or navigation system. The universal telephone preinstallation GSM III comprises the following functions. › Phone Phonebook » page 134. › Convenience operation via the multifunction steering wheel » page 133. › Operation of the telephone via the information display » page 139. › Voice control of the telephone » page 141. › Music playback from the telephone or other multimedia units » page 143. › Internet connection » page 140. £ › Display of SMS messages » page 139.

On vehicles fitted with the Amundsen+ navigation system, this function can be accessed via the navigation system menu; refer to the operating instructions for the Amundsen+. This function is not available in vehicles fitted with the Amundsen+ navigation system.

Communication

137

› If your SIM card is blocked by a PIN code, enter the PIN code for the SIM card in

All communication between a telephone and the hands-free system of your vehicle can only be established with the help of the following profiles of Bluetooth® technology.

your phone. The telephone connects to the hands-free system (during the first connection you can only enter the PIN code in the information display when the vehicle is stationary, as this is the only situation when you can choose whether the PIN code should be stored). › Follow the instructions in the information display, the first time a new user is stored. › Reconfirm the rSAP command on your mobile phone to download the telephone book and the identification data from the SIM card into the control unit.

rSAP - Remote SIM access profile After connecting the telephone with the hands-free system via the rSAP profile, the telephone deregisters from the GSM network, and communication with the network is only enabled by the control unit via the vehicle's external aerial. In the telephone only the interface for Bluetooth® remains active. In this case, you can only use the mobile phone to disconnect from the hands-free system, deactivate the Bluetooth® connection or dial the emergency number 112 (only valid in some countries). HFP - Hands Free Profile After connecting the telephone with the hands-free system via the HFP profile, the telephone continues to use its GMS module and the internal antenna to communicate with the GSM network.

Note The following guidelines must be observed » page 132, Mobile phones and twoway radio systems.

Connecting the phone to the hands-free system To connect a mobile phone with the hands-free system, it is necessary to interconnect the telephone and hands-free system. Detailed information on this is provided in the operating instructions for your mobile phone. The following steps must be carried out for the connection. Connecting the telephone with the hands-free system via the rSAP profile › Activate Bluetooth® and the visibility of your mobile phone on your telephone. For certain mobile phones it is necessary to switch on first the rSAP function. › Switch on the ignition. › Select the menu Phone - New user in the information display and wait until the control unit has completed the search. › Select your mobile phone from the menu of the units found. › Within 30 seconds enter the 16-digit code that is shown on the information display and confirm it according to the instructions on the display of your mobile phone.

Does not apply for Radio Swing.

138

Using the system



Connecting the telephone with the hands-free system via the HPP profile › Activate Bluetooth® and the visibility of your mobile phone on your telephone. › Switch on the ignition. › Select the menu Phone - New user in the information display and wait until the control unit has completed the search. › Select your mobile phone from the menu of the units found. › Within 30 seconds enter the 16-digit code that is shown on the information display and confirm it according to the instructions on the display of your mobile phone. › Follow the instructions on the information display and the mobile phone, to store a new user or to download the telephone book and identification data from the SIM card into the control unit. The telephone primarily connects via the rSAP profile. If the PIN code was stored, the telephone is automatically detected and connected with the hands-free system the next time the ignition is switched on. Check your mobile phone to see whether this automatic connection has been established. Disconnecting the connection › By removing the key from the ignition lock (the connection is disconnected during a telephone call). › By disconnecting the hands-free system in the mobile phone. › By disconnecting the user in the information display in the menu Bluetooth User - Select user - Disconnect. On vehicles which are fitted with a radio or navigation system at the factory, it is possible to terminate the telephone call after removing the key from the ignition lock by pressing the button on the touchscreen of the radio1) or navigation sys£ tem; refer to the operating instructions for the radio or navigation system.

Dial number Any telephone number can be written in the menu point Dial number. The required numbers must be selected one after the other using adjustment wheel and confirmed by pressing the adjustment wheel. The numbers 0 - 9, symbols +, , # and the functions Delete, Call, Back can be selected.

Note ■ In the memory of the control unit, up to three users can be stored, whereby the hands-free system can only communicate actively with one user. If a connection is established with a fourth mobile phone, one of the users must be deleted. ■ When connecting to the hands-free system, follow the instructions on your mobile phone.

Operate the telephone via the information display If no telephone is connected with the hands-free system, after you select the Phone menu, the No paired phone found message will appear and the following menu points: ■ Help this menu point appears when no paired phone is stored in the memory of the control unit. ■ Connect this menu point appears when one or more paired phones are stored in the memory of the control unit. ■ New user ■ Media player ■ Active device ■ Paired devices ■ Search ■ Visibility ■ SOS If a telephone is coupled with the hands-free system, the following menu points can be selected in the menu Phone. Phone book In the menu point Phone book is the list of the loaded contacts from the telephone memory and the SIM card of the mobile phone. The following functions are available for each phone contact: ■ ■

Display telephone number Voice Tag ■ Replay ■ Record



Call register The following menu points can be selected in the menu point Call register: Missed calls Received calls ■ Dialled numbers ■ Delete lists

■ ■

Voice mailbox In the menu Voice mailbox, it is possible to set the number of the voice mailbox and then dial the number. The required numbers must be selected one after the other using adjustment wheel and confirmed by pressing the adjustment wheel. The numbers 0 - 9, symbol + and the functions Delete, Call, Save, Back can be selected. Messages1) The menu Messages comprises a list of received text messages. After calling a message, the following functions appear: ■ Show ■ Read - the system reads out the selected message through the vehicle's speakers ■ Send time ■ Callback ■ Copy - copies the incoming message to the SIM card ■ Delete Bluetooth The following menu points can be selected in the menu Bluetooth: ■ User - the overview of the stored users ■ Connect ■ Disconnect ■ Rename ■ Delete ■ New user - Search for users in the reception range ■ Visibility - Switching on the visibility of the hands-free system for other devices £

Only applies when connecting the telephone with the hands-free system via the rSAP profile.

Communication

139

■

Media player Active device Paired devices ■ Connect ■ Rename ■ Delete ■ Authorisation ■ Search - search for available media players ■ Visibility - Switching on the visibility of the hands-free system for media players in the vicinity Extras ■ Modem - overview of the active and paired devices for the connection to the internet ■ Active device ■ Paired devices Phone name - the possibility to change the name of the hands-free system (pre-set SKODA UHV)

■

■ ■

■

Settings The following menu points can be selected in the menu Settings: ■ Phone book ■ Update - scan the telephone book ■ Select memory ■ SIM & phone ■ SIM card ■ Mobile phone - Initial setting to also import contacts from the SIM card, it is necessary to switch to the menu point SIM & phone ■ List ■ Surname ■ First name ■ Own number - optionally display your own telephone number on the display of the device of the person you are calling (this function is network-dependent) ■ Network depnd. . ■ Yes ■ No ■ Signal settings ■ Ring tone ■ Volume ■ Turn vol. up ■ Turn vol. down

■ ■ ■

Phone settings ■ Select operator ■ Automatic ■ Manual ■ Network mode ■ GSM ■ Automatic ■ SIM mode - valid for telephones with the rSAP profile, that simultaneously support the operation of two SIM cards - there is an option to choose which SIM card should be connected to the hands-free system ■ Change ■ Phone Mode - Toggle between rSAP and HFP mode ■ Premium - rSAP mode ■ Hands-free - HFP mode Off time - Setting in five-minute steps Data - Settings for the Internet access point - ask network operator for details Switch off ph. (Switch off ph.) - switches off the phone unit (phone remains coupled)

Back Return in the main menu of the information display.



Internet connection A notebook can, for example, be connected to the Internet via the hands-free system. The control unit of the hands-free system supports the GPRS, EDGE and UMTS/3G technologies. An Internet can only be established via a telephone which is connected via the rSAP profile. The procedure for connecting to the Internet can vary depending on the type and version of the operating system as well as the type of the device to be connected. Successfully connecting to the internet requires appropriate knowledge of the operating system for connecting the device . Process of connection

› Connect the mobile phone with the hands-free system. › Set the access point (depending on the operator, usually “Internet”) in the menu Phone - Settings - Data.

› Switch on the visibility of the hands-free system for the other devices in the menu Phone - Bluetooth - Visibility.

140

Using the system

› Use the device that is to be connected to search for available Bluetooth® devi-

ces. › Select the hands-free system (as standard “SKODA_BT”) from the list of found devices. › Enter the password on the device being connected and follow any instructions given on this device or in the information display. › Enter the desired Internet address in the Internet browser. The operating system requests the entry of the telephone number for the internet access (depending on the operator, usually “*99#”).

Voice control Dialogue The period of time during which the system is ready to receive voice commands and to carry them out is called a dialogue. The system gives audible feedback and guides you if necessary through the relevant functions. Optimum understanding of the voice commands depends on several factors: › Speak with a normal tone of voice without intonation and excessive pauses. › Avoid a bad pronunciation. › Close the doors, windows and sliding roof, to reduce or stop disturbing exterior noise. › It is recommended to speak louder at higher speeds, so that the tone of your voice is louder than the increased surrounding noise. › During the dialogue, limit additional noise in the vehicle, e.g. passengers talking at the same time. › Do not speak, if the system makes an announcement. The microphone for voice control is inserted in the moulded headliner and directed to the driver and front passenger. Therefore the driver and the front passenger can operate the equipment. Entering the phone number The telephone number can be entered as a continuous series of individually spoken digits (the whole number at once) or in the form of digital blocks (separated by short pauses). After each order of digits (separation through brief voice pause) all of the digits detected up to now are repeated by the system.

The digits 0 - 9, symbols +, , # are permitted. The system detects no continuous digit combinations such as twenty-three, but only individually spoken digits (two, three). Activating voice control - GSM II

› by briefly pressing the button

1 on the multi-function steering wheel » page 133, Operating the phone on the multifunction steering wheel. › by briefly pressing the button  on the adapter1) » Fig. 131; 

Deactivating voice control - GSM II If the system is currently playing a message, the message that is currently being played will have to be stopped: › by briefly pressing the button  on the adapter1); › by briefly pressing the button 1 on the multi-function steering wheel. If the system expects a voice command, you can end the dialogue yourself:

› with the CANCEL voice command; › by pressing the button  on the adapter ; › by briefly pressing the button 1 on the multi-function steering wheel. 1)

Activating voice control - GSM III The dialogue can be started at any time by pressing the button 1 on the multifunction steering wheel 1). Deactivating voice control - GSM III If the system is currently playing a message, the message that is currently being played must be terminated by pressing the button 1 on the multi-function steering wheel. If the system expects a voice command, you can end the dialogue yourself:

› with the CANCEL voice command; › by briefly pressing the button 1 on the multi-function steering wheel. Note

The dialogue of an incoming call is immediately interrupted. ■ The voice control is only possible in vehicles fitted with a multi-function steering wheel with telephone control or a phone mount and adapter. ■ On vehicles which are factory-fitted with the Columbus navigation system, it is only possible to operate the voice control for the telephone via this device; refer to the Columbus operating instructions. ■

Not valid for vehicles with the Columbus navigation system.

Communication

141



Voice commands - GSM II Basic voice commands Voice command

Basic voice commands Voice command

Action

HELP

After this command the system repeats all possible commands.

HELP

After this command the system repeats all possible commands.

CALL XYZ

This command calls up the contact from the phone book.

CALL NAME

After this command, a name can be entered to establish a connection with the requested party.

PHONE BOOK

After this command, for example, the phone book can be repeated back to you, a voice entry for the contact can be updated or deleted, etc.

DIAL NUMBER

CALL HISTORY

Lists of dialled numbers, missed calls, etc.

DIAL NUMBER

After this command, a telephone number can be entered to establish a connection with the requested party.

REDIAL

After this command the system calls the last dialled number.

MUSICa)

Play music from the mobile phone or another paired device.

FURTHER OPTIONS SETTINGS CANCEL a)

Voice commands - GSM III

REDIAL READ ADDRESSBOOK

After this command the system offers additional context-dependent commands.

The last selected telephone number is selected. The system reads out contacts from the telephone book.

READ MESSAGES

The system reads the messages which were received while the telephone was connected to the control unit.

SHORT DIALOGUE

The help is significantly reduced (good operating knowledge provided).

LONG DIALOGUE

The help is not reduced (suitable for beginners).

CANCEL

Selection for setting Bluetooth®, dialogue etc.

After this command, a telephone number can be entered to establish a connection with the requested party.

The dialogue is ended.

If the system does not recognise the command, it repeats the first part of the help thus enabling a new entry to be completed. After the 2nd error the system repeats the second part of the aid. After the 3rd error the answer “Procedure cancelled” is given and the dialogue is ended.

The dialogue is ended.

On vehicles fitted with the Amundsen+ navigation system, this function can be accessed via the navigation system menu; refer to the operating instructions for the Amundsen+.

If a voice command is not detected, the system answers with “Pardon?” and a new entry can be completed. After the 2nd error the system repeats the aid. After the 3rd error the answer “Procedure cancelled” is given and the dialogue is ended.

Store voice recording of a contact If automatic name recognition does not work reliably for some contacts, you can choose to save your own voice entry for the contact in the menu Phone book Voice Tag - Record.

Your own voice entry can also be saved using the voice control in the menu FURTHER OPTIONS.

142

Using the system



The music playback process is performed on the connected device.

Multimedia

The universal telephone preinstallation GSM II ensures that the music played back via the hands-free system can be controlled with the remote control » page 142, Voice commands - GSM II.

Music playback via Bluetooth® The universal telephone preinstallation makes it possible to play back music via Bluetooth® from devices such as MP3 players, mobile phones or notebooks. To ensure the music can be played back via Bluetooth®, it is necessary to connect the terminal device with the hands-free system in the menu Phone - Bluetooth Media player.

Note The device being connected must support the Bluetooth® A2DP profile; refer to the operating instructions for the relevant device being connected.



Operating the radio and navigation system on the multifunction steering wheel The multifunction steering wheel comprises buttons for setting the basic functions for the factory-fitted radio and navigation system » Fig. 132. The radio and navigation system can of course still be operated on the devices. A description is included in the relevant operating instructions. If the side lights are switched on, the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel are illuminated. The buttons apply for the respective operating mode of the current radio or navigation system. Fig. 132 Multifunction steering wheel: control buttons

The following functions can be completed by pressing or turning the buttons.

Button

Action

press briefly

Radio, traffic information Switch off/on tone or voice controla)

CD/CD changer/mp3

press button for a long period of time

switch off/on

Navigation

turn upwards

Increase volume

turn downwards

Decrease volume

press briefly

Changing to the next stored radio station Changing to the next stored traffic information Interrupting the traffic report

Changing to the next title

press button for a long period of time

Interruption of the traffic report

Fast forward

Communication

143

Button

Action

Radio, traffic information

press briefly

Changing to the previously stored radio station Changing to the previously stored traffic information Interrupting the traffic report

Changing to the previous title

press button for a long period of time

Interruption of the traffic report

Fast rewind

press briefly

Interruption of the traffic report

turn upwards

Display of the stored/accessible stations scroll upwards Interruption of the traffic report

Changing to the previous title

turn downwards

Display of the stored/accessible stations scroll downwards Interruption of the traffic report

Changing to the next title

6 a)

CD/CD changer/mp3

Navigation

changing the audio source Call up the main menu without function

without function

Only valid for the navigation system Columbus.

Note The loudspeakers in the vehicle are adjusted to the power output of the radio and navigation system of 4x20°W. ■ The sound system equipment comprises loudspeakers that are adjusted to the amplifier power output of 4x50°W + 6x25 W.

CD change

■

Fig. 133 The CD changer 

AUX-IN and MDI inputs The AUX-IN input is located below the front armrest and is marked with . The MDI input is located below the front armrest. The AUX-IN and MDI inputs are used to connect external audio sources (e.g. iPod or mp3 player) and to play back music from these devices via the factory-fitted radio or navigation system. For a description of use, refer to the operating instructions for the relevant radio or navigation system.

144

Using the system

The CD changer for the radio and navigation system is located in the left side compartment of the luggage compartment. Inserting the CD



› Touch the button

C » Fig. 133 and guide the CD (compact disc) into the CDcase B . The CD is automatically loaded onto the lowest free position in the CD £ changer. The indicator light in the corresponding button D stops flashing.

Filling the CD changer with CDs › Press and hold the button C for longer than 2 seconds and guide the CDs one after the other (maximum 6 CDs) into the CD case B . The indicator lights in the buttons D stop flashing.

DVD-preinstallation

Inserting a CD at a specific position › Press the button C . The indicator lights in the buttons D illuminate the memory spaces that are already assigned and flash in the case of free memory spaces. › Touch the desired button D and guide the CD into the CD-case B . Ejecting a CD › Press the button A to eject a CD. For assigned memory spaces, the indicator lights now illuminate in the buttons D . › Press the corresponding button D . The CD is ejected.

Fig. 134 Seat backrest - left front seat/right front seat

Ejecting all CDs › Press and hold the button A for more than 2 seconds to eject the CDs. All CDs in the CD-changer are ejected consecutively.

Description A Openings for attachment of DVD player holder B Audio/video input C Connection input, DVD player

Note Always guide the CD into the CD case B with the printed side facing upwards. Never force the CD into the CD case as it is drawn in automatically. After loading a CD into the CD changer, wait until the indicator light of the corresponding button D is illuminated. Then the CD case B is free to load the next CD. ■ If a position is selected, on which a CD is already located, this CD is ejected. Remove the ejected CD and load the desired CD.

Only one DVD pre-installation is factory-installed in the seat backrest of the front seat.

■ ■ ■

The DVD player holder and DVD player can be purchased from ŠKODA original accessories. For a description of the use, refer to the operating instructions for these devices and equipment. 

WARNING If there are passengers on both of the rear seats, the DVD player holder must not be used on its own (without the DVD player) - risk of injury! ■ The inclination of the holder can be adjusted to three preset positions. Be careful not to injure fingers between the holder and the backrest when changes to the position of the DVD player holder are made. ■ The DVD player holder must not be used when the rear seat backrest or the rear seat is folded forward or has been removed completely. ■

Note Follow the instructions given in the operating instructions of the DVD player hold er/DVD player.

Communication

145

The following list contains part of the safety equipment in your vehicle:

Safety

› three-point seat belts for all the seats; › belt force limiter for front and outer rear seats; › belt tensioner for front and outer rear seats; › seat belt height adjusters for front seats; › Front airbag for the driver and the front seat passenger; › driver’s knee airbag; › front side airbags; › rear side airbags; › head airbags; › anchoring points for child seat using the ISOFIX system; › anchoring points for child seat using the TOP TETHER system; › head restraints adjustable for height; › adjustable steering column.

Passive Safety General information

Introduction

Passive safety measures reduce the risk of injury in accident situations. This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Safety equipment Before setting off What influences the driving safety?

146 146 147

The specified safety equipment works together, in order to optimally protect you and those travelling with you in accident situations. The safety equipment does not protect you or the people travelling with you, if you or your occupants adopt an incorrect seated position or the equipment is not correctly adjusted or used.

In this section you will find important information, tips and notes on the subject of passive safety in your vehicle. We have combined everything here which you should be familiar with, for example, regarding seat belts, airbags, child seats and safety of children. It is therefore important, in particular, to comply with the notes and warnings in this section for your own interest and in the interest of those travelling with you.

Before setting off

WARNING This chapter contains important information on how to use the vehicle for the driver and his occupants. You will find further information on safety, which concerns you and those travelling with you, in the following chapters of this Owner's Manual. ■ The complete on-board literature should always be in the vehicle. This applies in particular, if you rent out or sell the vehicle.

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 146.

For your own safety and the safety of the people travelling with you, please pay attention to the following points before setting off.

■

Safety equipment



› Ensure that the lighting and the turn signal system are functioning properly. › Check the tyre inflation pressure. › Ensure that all of the windows offer good visibility to the outside. › Secure all items of luggage » page 79, Luggage compartment. › Ensure that no objects can obstruct the pedals. › Adjust the mirrors, the front seat and head restraint to your body size. › Advise your passengers to adjust the head restraints to their body size. › Protect children in suitable child seats with correctly fastened seat belts » page 162, Transporting children safely.

› Adopt the correct seated position » page 147, Correct seated position. Also inform passengers to adopt the correct seated position.

› Correctly fasten the seat belt. Also inform passengers to fasten the seat belt correctly » page 150.

146

Safety



WARNING (Continued)

What influences the driving safety?

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 146.

The driver is fully responsible for himself and his occupants. If your driving safety is effected, you place yourself and the oncoming traffic at risk. The following guidelines must therefore be observed. › Do not get distracted from concentrating on the traffic situation, e.g. by your passengers or mobile phone calls. › Never drive when your driving ability is impaired, e.g. through medication, alcohol, drugs. › Keep to the traffic regulations and the permissible speed limit. › Always adjust the driving speed to the road, traffic and weather conditions. › Take regular breaks on long journeys – at least every two hours.

Correct seated position

Introduction

This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Correct seated position for the driver Correct seated position for the front passenger Correct seated position for the occupants on the rear seats Examples of an incorrect seated position

148 148 148 149

If the occupant adopts an incorrect seated position, he is exposed to lifethreatening injuries, in case he is hit by a deployed airbag. ■ If the occupants on the rear seats are not sitting upright, the risk of injury is increased due to incorrect routing of the seat belt. ■ The driver must maintain a distance of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel, and a distance of at least 10 cm between the legs and the dash panel at the height of the knee airbag. The front passenger must maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the dash panel. Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to properly protect you - hazard! ■ When driving, hold the steering wheel with both hands firmly on the outer edge in the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock position. Never hold the steering wheel in the 12 o'clock position or in any other way (e.g. in the middle or inner edge of the steering wheel). In such cases, you could injure the arms, hands and head when the driver airbag is deployed. ■ The seat backrests must not be angled too far back when driving otherwise this will affect proper operation of the seat belts and of the airbag system risk of injury! ■ Ensure that there are no objects in the driver's footwell as they may get caught behind the pedals when driving or applying the braking. You would then no longer be able to operate the clutch, brake or accelerate. ■ Always keep your feet in the footwell when the car is being driven - never place your feet on the instrument panel, out of the window or on the surfaces of the seats. You will be exposed to increased risk of injury if it becomes necessary to apply the brake or in the event of an accident. If an airbag is deployed, you may suffer fatal injuries when adopting an incorrect seated position! ■



WARNING The front seats and the head restraints must always be adjusted to match the body size of the seat occupant as well as the seat belts must always be correctly fastened in order to provide an optimal protection for you and your occupants. ■ Always assume the correct seated position before setting off and do not change this position while driving. Also advise your passengers to adopt the correct seated position and not to change this position while the car is moving. ■

Passive Safety

147



For the safety of the front passenger and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident, we recommend the following setting.

Correct seated position for the driver

› Position the front passenger seat back as far as possible. The front passenger

must maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the dash panel so that the airbag offers the greatest possible safety if it is deployed. › Adjust the head restraint so that the top edge of the head restraint is at the same level as the upper part of your head » Fig. 135 C . › Correctly fasten the seat belt » page 150. In exceptional cases the front passenger airbag can be deactivated » page 160, Deactivating airbags. Manual front passenger adjustment » page 73, Manually adjusting the front seats.

Fig. 135 The correct distance of the driver from the steering wheel and dash panel/The correct head restraint adjustment

Electrical front passenger seat adjustment » page 73, Adjusting front seats electrically.

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 147. ings

Correct seated position for the occupants on the rear seats

For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident, we recommend the following setting.

› Position the steering wheel so that there is a gap of at least 25 cm between the

steering wheel and the chest » Fig. 135 A , and that the distance between the legs and the dash panel at the height of the knee airbag is at least 10 cm » Fig. 135 B . › Adjust the driver’s seat in the forward/back direction so that the pedals can be fully depressed with slightly bent legs. › Adjust the seat backrest so that the highest point of the steering wheel can be reached with your arms at a slight angle. › Adjust the head restraint so that the top edge of the head restraint is at the same level as the upper part of your head » Fig. 135 C . › Correctly fasten the seat belt » page 150.

Correct seated position for the front passenger

ä 148

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 147.

Safety

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 147.

To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or an accident, the occupants on the rear seats must observe the following.

› Adjust the head restraint so that the top edge of the head restraint is at the same level as the upper part of the head » Fig. 135 C .

› Correctly fasten the seat belt » page 150. › Use a suitable child restraint system if transporting children in the vehicle » page 162, Transporting children safely.

Manual driver seat adjustment » page 73, Manually adjusting the front seats. Electrical driver seat adjustment » page 73.



Examples of an incorrect seated position

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 147.

Seat belts offer their optimum protection only if the webbing of the seat belts is properly routed. Incorrect seated positions considerably reduce the protective functions of the seat belts and therefore increase the risk of injury due to an incorrect routing of the seat belt. The driver is fully responsible for himself and passengers, especially children. Never allow a passenger to adopt an incorrect seated position when the car is moving. The following list contains examples of which seated positions can cause serious injuries or death. This list is not complete, however we would like you to familiarise yourself with this subject. Therefore, while the car is moving never: › stand up in the vehicle; › stand up on the seats; › kneel on the seats; › tilt the seat backrest fully to the back; › lean against the dash panel; › lie on the rear seat bench; › only sit on the front area of the seat; › sit to the side; › lean out of the window; › put the feet out of the window; › put the feet on the dash panel; › put the feet on the seat upholstery; › transport somebody in the footwell; › have the seat belt not fastened when driving; › occupy the luggage compartment.



Passive Safety

149

Particular safety aspects must be observed when transporting children in the vehicle » page 162, Transporting children safely.

Seat belts

WARNING

Seat belts

Introduction Fig. 136 Driver wearing seat belt

This chapter contains information on the following subjects: The physical principle of a frontal collision Fastening and unfastening seat belts Seat belt height adjuster on the front seats Belt tensioners

151 152 153 153

Seat belts that are fastened correctly offer good protection in the event of an accident. They reduce the risk of an injury and increase the chance of survival in the event of a major accident. Correctly fastened seat belts hold occupants of the car in the correct seated position » Fig. 136. The seat belts reduce the kinetic energy (energy of motion) to a considerable extent. They also prevent uncontrolled movements which, in turn, may well result in severe injuries. The occupants of a vehicle who have fastened and correctly adjusted their seat belt, profit to a major extent from the fact that the kinetic energy is optimally absorbed by the belts. The structure of the front end of the vehicle and other passive safety measures, such as the airbag system, also contribute to reducing the kinetic energy. The energy produced is thus absorbed and there is less risk of injury.

150

Safety

Fasten your seat belt before each journey - even when driving in town! This also applies to the people seated at the rear - risk of injury! ■ Expectant women must also always wear a seat belt. This is the only way of ensuring optimal protection for the unborn child » page 152, Fastening and unfastening seat belts. ■ Adjust the height of the belt in such a way that the shoulder part of the belt is roughly positioned across the middle of your shoulder - on no account across your neck. ■ Always ensure that the webbing of the seat belts is properly routed. Seat belts which are not correctly adjusted can themselves cause injuries even in minor accidents. ■ The maximum protection which seat belts can offer is only achieved if you are correctly seated » page 147, Correct seated position. ■ The seat backrests of the front seats must not be tilted too far to the rear otherwise the seatbelts can lose their effectiveness. ■ The belt webbing must not be jammed in-between at any point or twisted, or chafe against any sharp edges. ■ A seat belt which is hanging too loose can result in injuries as your body is moved forward by the kinetic energy produced in an accident and is then suddenly held firm by the belt. ■ The belt webbing must not run across solid or fragile objects (e.g. spectacles, ball-point pens, keys etc.) as this may be a cause of injuries. ■ No two persons (also not children) should ever use a single seat belt together. ■ The lock tongue should only be inserted into the lock which is the correct one for your seat. Wrong use of the safety belt will reduce its capacity to protect and the risk of injury increases. ■ The slot of the belt tongue must not be blocked by paper or similar objects otherwise the belt tongue will not lock in place properly. ■ Many layers of clothing and loose clothing (e. g. a winter coat over a jacket) do not allow you to be correctly seated and impairs proper operation of the seat belts. ■ It is prohibited to use clamps or other objects to adjust seat belts (e. g. for shortening the belts for smaller persons). ■

Motion energy, so-called kinetic energy, is produced as soon as the vehicle is moving, both for the vehicle and its occupants. The magnitude of this kinetic energy depends essentially on the speed at which the vehicle is travelling and on the weight of the vehicle including the occupants. The greater the speed and weight increase, the greater the amount of energy which has to be absorbed in the event of an accident.

WARNING (Continued) The seat belts for the rear seats can only fulfil their function reliably when the seat backrests are correctly locked into position » page 78. ■ The belt webbing must always be kept clean. Soiled belt webbing may impair proper operation of the inertia reel » page 180, Seat belts. ■ The seat belts must not be removed or changed in any way. Do not attempt to repair the seat belts yourself. ■ Check the condition of all the seat belts on a regular basis. If any damage to the seat belts, seat belt connections, inertia reel or the lock is detected, the relevant seat belt must be replaced by a specialist garage. ■ Damaged seat belts which have been subjected to stress in an accident and were therefore stretched, must be replaced - this is best done by a specialist garage. The anchorage points of the belts must also be inspected. The anchorage points for the belts should also be checked. ■

The speed of the vehicle is, nevertheless, the most important factor. Doubling the speed of the vehicle from 25 km/h up to 50 km/hour increases the kinetic energy four times. The common opinion that it is possible to support your body in a minor accident with your hands, is incorrect. Even in a collision at only a low speed, the forces acting on the body are such that it is no longer possible to support your body. Even if you only drive at a speed of 30 km/h to 50 km/h, the forces that your body is exposed to in the event of an accident can exceed a tonne (1 000 kg).

Note The national legal requirements must be observed when using seat belts.

The physical principle of a frontal collision



In the event of a frontal collision, occupants of the car not wearing a seat belt, are thrown forward and strike in an uncontrolled way parts of the interior of the car, such as steering wheel, dash panel, windscreen,» Fig. 137 - . In certain circ*mstances you could even be thrown out of the vehicle, which could cause life threatening or even fatal injuries. It is also important that rear seat occupants fasten their seat belts as they will otherwise be thrown through the vehicle in an uncontrolled manner in the event of an accident A rear seat passenger who has not fastened the seat belt is a danger not only to himself but also for those seated at the front » Fig. 137 - .

Fig. 137 Driver without a fastened seat belt/rear seat passenger without a fastened seat belt

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 150.

The physical principle of a frontal accident can be explained quite simply:

Seat belts

151



Fastening and unfastening seat belts Fasten your seat belt before starting!

A plastic knob in the belt webbing holds the belt tongue in a position which is easy to get hold of. It is important that the belt webbing is properly routed to ensure seat belts offer the maximum protection. The shoulder part of the seat belt must never run across the neck but must roughly run over the middle of the shoulder and fit snugly against the chest. The lap part of the belt must run across the pelvis, must not be positioned across the stomach and must always fit snugly » Fig. 139 - . Adjust the belt webbing as required. Expectant women must also always wear a seat belt. This is the only way of ensuring optimal protection for the unborn child. On expectant mothers, the lap part of the belt must be positioned as low as possible on the pelvis to avoid exerting any pressure on the lower abdomen » Fig. 139 - .

Fig. 138 Fastening/unfastening the seat belt

Taking seat belt off Release the seat belt only when the vehicle is stationary. › Press the red button in the belt buckle » Fig. 138 - , the lock tongue pops out. › Manually guide the belt back so that it is easier to fully roll up the webbing, the seat belt does not twist and the trim panel is not damaged. Belt inertia reel Each seat belt is equipped with an inertia reel. This inertia reel offers you complete freedom of movement if the belt is unreeled slowly. If the brakes are applied suddenly, the inertia reel will block. The belts also block when the car accelerates, when driving downhill and when cornering.

Fig. 139 Routing of belt webbing over the shoulders and the lap belt/Routing of belt webbing for an expectant mother

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 150.

Fastening the seat belt › Correctly adjust the front seat and head restraint before fastening the seat belt » page 77. › Use the lock tongue to slowly pull the webbing over your chest and pelvis. › Insert the lock tongue into the belt buckle » Fig. 138 -  that is part of the seat until it clicks into place. › Pull the seat belt to check that it has reliably engaged in the lock.

152

Safety



WARNING

Seat belt height adjuster on the front seats

Any work on the belt tensioner system including removal and installation of system components because of other repair work, must only be carried out by a specialist garage. ■ The protective function of the system is only adequate for a single accident. If the belt tensioners have been deployed, it is then necessary to replace the entire system. ■

Fig. 140 Front seat: Seat belt height adjuster

Note Smoke is generated when the belt tensioners are deployed. This is not an indication of a fire in the vehicle. ■ When disposing of the vehicle or parts of the belt tensioner system, it is important to comply with national legal requirements. ŠKODA Service Partners are familiar with these regulations and will be able to provide you with detailed information. ■

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 150.

The seat belt height adjuster makes it possible to adjust the routing of the front seat belts in the area of the shoulder to the body size. › Press the height adjuster and move up or down in the desired direction » Fig. 140. › Then pull firmly on the belt to ensure that the seat belt height adjuster has cor rectly locked in place.

Belt tensioners

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 150.

The safety for the driver, front passenger and passengers on the outer rear seats who are wearing their seat belts, is enhanced by the belt tensioners fitted to the inertia reels on the front and rear external three-point seat belts. The three-point seat belts are automatically tensioned in the event of a frontal collision of a certain severity. The belt tensioners can also be deployed if the seat belts are not fastened. The fastened three-point seat belts are automatically tensioned in the event of a frontal or side collision of a certain severity. Belt tensioners are not activated in the event of minor frontal collisions, side and rear-end collisions, in the case of a rollover and also not in accidents in which no major forces are produced from the front.

Seat belts

153



Airbag system Description of the airbag system General information on the airbag system The operational readiness of the airbag system is monitored electronically. The airbag indicator light  comes on for a few seconds each time the ignition is switched on » page 25. The airbags inflate in fractions of a second and at a high speed to offer additional protection in the event of an accident. The airbag system (according to vehicle equipment) consists of:

› an electronic control unit; › Front airbags for the driver and front seat passenger » page 155; › a driver’s knee airbag » page 156; › side airbags » page 157; › head airbags » page 159; › an airbag indicator light in the instrument cluster » page 25; › a key switch for the front seat passenger airbag » page 161; › an indicator light in the middle of the dash panel to indicate the front seat passenger airbag is switched off » page 161.

A fault in the airbag system exists if: › the indicator light  does not illuminate when the ignition is switched on; › the indicator light  does not go out 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on; › the indicator light  goes out and comes on again after the ignition is switched on; › the indicator light  comes on or flashes when driving; › the indicator light in the middle of the dash panel for the deactivated front seat passenger airbag flashes.

WARNING The airbag is not a substitute for the seat belt, but instead forms part of the complete passive vehicle safety concept. Please note that an airbag can only offer you optimal protection in combination with a seat belt which is fastened. ■ To ensure passengers are protected with the greatest possible effect when the airbag is deployed, the front seats must be correctly adjusted to match the body size » page 147, Correct seated position. ■ If you do not fasten the seat belts when driving, lean too far forward or adopt an incorrect seated position, you are exposing yourself to increased risk of injury in the event of an accident. ■ If there is a fault, the airbag system must be checked by a specialist garage immediately. Otherwise, there is a risk of the airbag not being activated in the event of an accident. ■ No modifications of any kind must be made to parts of the airbag system. Any work on the airbag system including the installation and removal of system components due to other repair work (e.g. removal of the steering wheel) must only be carried out by a specialist garage. ■ Never make any changes to the front bumper or bodywork. ■ It is prohibited to manipulate individual parts of the airbag system as this might result in the airbag being deployed. ■ The protective function of the airbag system is sufficient for only one accident. The airbag system must then be replaced if the airbag has been deployed. ■ The airbag system needs no maintenance during its working life. ■ If you sell your vehicle, provide the complete vehicle documentation to the new owner. Please note that the information relating to the possibility of deactivating the front passenger airbag must be included! ■ When disposing of vehicle or parts of the airbag system, it is important to comply with the national legal requirements. ■



When are the airbags deployed? The airbag system is only functional when the ignition is switched on. In certain accident situations, the several airbags may be deployed simultaneously. The airbags are not deployed in the case of minor frontal and side collisions, rear£ end collisions, tilting of the vehicle and vehicle rollover.

154

Safety

Deployment factors It is not possible to generally determine which deployment conditions apply to the airbag system in every situation. An important role is played by factors such as the type of object that the vehicle hits (hard, soft), the impact angle, vehicle speed, etc.

Front airbags

Introduction

A decisive factor for the deployment of the airbags is the deceleration which occurs. The control unit analyses the nature of the collision and activates the relevant restraint system. If the vehicle deceleration which occurs and is measured during the collision remains below the prescribed reference values specified in the control unit, the airbags are not deployed although the vehicle may well suffer severe damage to the bodywork as a consequence of the accident.

Fig. 141 Safe distance to steering wheel

The following will be deployed in the event of a severe frontal collision: › driver’s front airbag; › passenger’s front airbag; › driver’s knee airbag.

This chapter contains information on the following subjects:

The following will be deployed in the event of a severe side collision: › front side airbag on the side of the accident; › rear side airbag on the side of the accident; › head airbags on the side of the accident.

Description of the front airbags Function of the front airbags

WARNING

In the event of an accident in which the airbags are deployed: › The interior light comes on (if the switch for the interior light is in the door contact position), › The hazard warning light is switched on, › All the doors are unlocked, › the battery in the luggage compartment is switched off, › the fuel supply to the engine is interrupted.

For the driver and front passenger it is important to maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the steering wheel or dash panel » Fig. 141 A . Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to properly protect you - hazard! The front seats and the head restraints must always also be correctly adjusted to match the body size of the occupant. ■ The airbag develops enormous forces when triggered, which can lead to injuries if the sitting position or seated position is not correct. ■ There must not by any further persons, animals or objects positioned between the front seated occupants and the deployment area of the airbag. ■ Never transport children on the front seat of a vehicle without using a proper restraint system. If airbags are deployed in the event of an accident, the child might suffer severe or even fatal injuries! ■ It is essential to always switch off the front passenger airbag when attaching a child safety seat to the front passenger seat where the child is seated with its back facing in direction of travel » page 160, Deactivating airbags. If ■

Note A grey white or red, non-harmful gas is released when the airbag is inflated. This is perfectly normal and is not an indication of a fire in the vehicle.

156 156



Airbag system

155

Note

WARNING (Continued) this is not done, there is a risk of the child suffering severe or even fatal injuries if the front passenger airbag is deployed. When transporting a child on the front passenger seat, pay attention to any relevant national regulations regarding the use of child safety seats. ■ The steering wheel and the surface of the airbag module in the dash panel on the passenger side must not have stickers attached, be covered or modified in any other way. These parts should only be cleaned with a cloth that is dry or has been moistened with water. No objects such as cup holders, mobile phone mounts, etc. must be attached to the covers of the airbag modules or be located within their immediate vicinity. ■ Never place objects on the surface of the front passenger airbag module in the dash panel.

The dash panel must be replaced after the front passenger airbag has been deployed.



Function of the front airbags Fig. 143 Inflated airbags



Description of the front airbags

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 155.

If the airbags are deployed, the airbags are filled with a propellant gas and inflated in front of the driver and front passenger » Fig. 143. The forward movement of the driver and of the front passenger is cushioned when they make contact with the fully inflated airbag and the risk of injury to head and chest is thus reduced.

Fig. 142 Driver airbag in the steering wheel/front passenger airbag in the dash panel

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 155. ings

In the event of a severe frontal collision, the front airbag system offers additional protection for the head and chest area of the driver and front passenger. The front airbag for the driver is housed in the steering wheel » Fig. 142 - . The front airbag for the front seat passenger is located in the dash panel above the stowage compartment  - » Fig. 142. The installation positions are each marked with the “AIRBAG” logo.

156

Safety

The airbag allows the gas to flow out of the inflated airbag in a controlled manner (depending on the load of the particular car occupant) in order to cushion head and chest areas. The airbag then deflates subsequently to such an extent, after  an accident, to again provide a clear view forward.

Driver’s knee airbag

Introduction

This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Description of the driver's knee airbag Functionality of the driver's knee airbag

157 157 £

In the event of a severe frontal collision, the driver's knee airbag and the belt tensioner are deployed.

WARNING Adjust the driver's seat in a forward/back direction so that there is a gap of at least 10 cm between the legs and the dash panel in the vicinity of the knee airbag » Fig. 135 - B . If it is not possible to meet this requirement due to your body size, visit a specialist garage. ■ The surface of the airbag module in the lower part of the dash panel below the steering column not have stickers attached, be covered or modified in any other way. This part should only be cleaned with a cloth that is dry or has been moistened with water. No objects must be attached to the cover of the airbag module or located within the immediate vicinity. ■ Do not attach any bulky and heavy objects (bunch of keys etc.) to the ignition key. These can be ejected by the knee airbag when it is deployed and can cause injuries. ■

The forward movement of the body is cushioned when it makes contact with the fully inflated airbag and the risk of injury to the legs of the driver is thus reduced.



Side airbags

Introduction

This chapter contains information on the following subjects: 

Description of the side airbags Function of the side airbags

158 159

WARNING

Description of the driver's knee airbag

Your head should never be positioned in the deployment area of the side airbag. You might suffer severe injuries in the event of an accident. This applies in particular to children who are transported without using a suitable child safety seat » page 163, Child safety and side airbag. ■ There must not be any further persons, animals as well as objects positioned between the occupants and the deployment area of the airbag. No accessories, such as cup holders, should be attached to the doors. ■ If children adopt an incorrect seated position when travelling, they may be exposed to an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident. This can result in serious injuries » page 162, Child seat. ■ The airbag control unit operates with pressure sensors located in the front doors. For this reason no adjustments must be carried out to the doors and door panels (e.g. additional installation of loudspeakers). Resulting damages can have a negative affect on the operation of the airbag system. All work on the front doors and their panels must only be carried out by a specialist garage. ■

Fig. 144 Driver's knee airbag below the steering column

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 156.

The driver's knee airbag offers adequate protection for the driver's legs. The driver's knee airbag is located in the lower part of the dash panel below the steering column » Fig. 144. The fitting position is shown in a picture on the side surface of the dash panel on the driver's side.



Functionality of the driver's knee airbag

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 156.

Airbag system

157

WARNING (Continued) In the event of a side collision, the side airbags will not function properly, if the sensors cannot measure the increasing air pressure inside the doors, because the air can escape through large, non-sealed openings in the door panel. ■ Never drive with removed inner door panels. ■ Never drive, if parts of the inner door panel have been removed and the remaining openings have not been properly sealed. ■ Never drive, if the loudspeakers in the doors have been removed, only if the loudspeaker openings have been properly sealed. ■ Always make sure that the openings are covered or filled, if additional loudspeakers or other equipment parts are installed in the inner door panels. ■ Always have work completed by a ŠKODA Service Partner or a competent specialist garage. ■ Only hang light items of clothing on the hooks fitted in the vehicle. Never leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets of the items of clothing. ■ Ensure that there are no excessive forces, such as violent knocks, kicks etc., impact on the backrests of the seats otherwise the system may be damaged. The side airbags would not be deployed in such a case! ■ Under no circ*mstances fit any seat or protective covers to the driver's or front passenger's seat that have not been expressly approved by ŠKODA. In view of the fact that the airbag inflates out of the backrest of the seat, use of non-approved seat or protective covers would considerably impair the protective function of the side airbag. ■ Any damage to the original seat covers in the area of the side airbag module must be repaired without delay by your specialist garage. ■ The airbag modules in the front seats must not display any damage, cracks or deep scratches. It is not permissible to use force in order to open the modules.

Description of the side airbags

■

158

Safety

Fig. 145 Installation position of side airbag in driver seat

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 157.

In the event of severe side collisions, the side airbag system provides additional protection for the upper body (chest, stomach and pelvis) of passengers in the vehicle. The front side airbags are housed in the upholstery of the seat backrests of the front seats » Fig. 145. The rear side airbags are located between the entrance area and the seat backrest.



WARNING

Function of the side airbags

There must not be any objects in the deployment area of the head airbags which might prevent the airbags from inflating properly. ■ Only hang light items of clothing on the hooks fitted in the vehicle. Never leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets of the items of clothing. Additionally, clothes hangers must not be used to hang up items of clothing. ■ The airbag control unit operates with sensors located in the front doors. For this reason no adjustments must be carried out to the doors and door panels (e.g. additional installation of loudspeakers). Resulting damages can have a negative affect on the operation of the airbag system. All work on the front doors and their panels must only be carried out by a specialist garage. ■ There must no other persons (e.g. children) or animals between the passenger and the deployment area of the head airbag. In addition, none of the occupants should lean their head out of the window when driving, or extend their arms and hands out of the window. ■ The sun visors must not be swivelled towards the side windows in the deployment area of the head airbags if any objects, such as ball-point pens, etc. are attached to them. This might result in injuries to the occupants if the head airbag is deployed. ■ The installation of impermissible accessories in the vicinity of the head airbags can considerably impair the protection offered by the head airbag in the event of it being deployed. When the deployed head airbag is inflated, parts of the fitted accessories could be thrown into the interior of the car and injure the occupants » page 201, Accessories, changes and replacement of parts. ■

Fig. 146 Inflated side airbags

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 157. ings

When the side airbags are deployed, the head airbag and belt tensioner are also automatically deployed on the relevant side. The load of the occupants is cushioned when plunging into the fully inflated airbag and the risk of injury to the entire upper body (chest, stomach and pelvis) is reduced on the side facing the door.

Head airbags



Introduction

This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Description of the head airbags Function of the head airbag

160 160

Airbag system

159



When deployed, the airbags cover the entire area of the side window and door pillar » Fig. 148.

Description of the head airbags

Any impact of the head against parts of the interior or objects outside of the car, is cushioned by the inflated head airbag. The reduction in any impact to the head and the resultant minimizing of any movements of the head additionally reduce the risk of injuries to the neck area. The head airbag also offers additional protection in the case of an offset impact by covering the front door pillar.

Fig. 147 Installation position of head airbag



Deactivating airbags

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 159.

In the event of a severe side collision, the head airbag system offers additional protection for the head and neck area of passengers. The head airbags are positioned above the doors on both sides in the interior of the car » Fig. 147. The installation positions of the head airbags are each marked with the “AIRBAG” logo.

Function of the head airbag Fig. 148 Inflated head airbag



Deactivation of airbags is envisaged only for particular instances, such as if: › using a child seat on the front passenger seat, in which the child has its back to the vehicle's direction of travel (in some countries this must be in the direction of travel due to different legal regulations applying) » page 162, Transporting children safely; › not being able to maintain a distance of at least 25 cm between the middle of the steering wheel and chest, despite the driver's seat being correctly adjusted; › special attachments are required in the area of the steering wheel because of a physical disability; › other seats have been installed (e.g. orthopaedic seats without side airbags). The front passenger airbag can be switched off with the key-operated switch » page 161, Key switch for the front seat passenger airbag. We recommend that you ask a ŠKODA Service Partner to switch off any other airbags. Monitoring the airbag system The functionality of the airbag system is also monitored electronically when one airbag has been switched off. If the airbag was switched off using diagnostic equipment:

› The airbag indicator light  illuminates for around 4 seconds after the ignition

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 159.

In the event of a side collision the head airbag is deployed together with the relevant side airbag and the belt tensioner on the side of the car on which the accident occurs.

160

Safety

is switched on and then flashes approximately another 12 seconds in 2 second intervals.

The following applies if the airbag has been switched off using the key switch in the storage compartment: › The airbag indicator light  comes on for around 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on, › Switched off airbags are indicated in the middle of the dash panel by the indicator light  in the display     coming on » Fig. 149.

Note The national regulations for switching off airbags must be observed. A ŠKODA Service Partner will be able to inform you which airbags in your vehicle  can/must be deactivated.

■ ■

Key switch for the front seat passenger airbag

› Check whether the airbag indicator light  in the display     in the middle of the dash panel does not light up when the ignition is turned on » Fig. 149 3 .

Indicator light  in display     (front passenger airbag switched off) The airbag indicator light is located in the middle of the dash panel » Fig. 149 3 . If the front passenger airbag is switched off, the indicator light comes on for about 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on. There is a system fault in the deactivated airbag » flashes. Visit a specialist garage immediately.

if the airbag indicator light

WARNING The driver is responsible for whether the airbag is switched on or switched off. ■ Only switch off the airbag when the ignition is switched off! Otherwise a fault can occur in the system for deactivating the airbag. ■ If the airbag indicator light  in the display     flashes, the front passenger airbag will not be deployed in the event of an accident! Have the airbag system checked by a specialist garage immediately. ■

Fig. 149 Storage compartment: Switch for the front passenger airbag/indicator light for the deactivated front seat passenger airbag Only the front passenger airbag is deactivated with the key switch. Deactivating an airbag › Switch off the ignition. › Use the key to turn the slot of the key switch into the position 2 (OFF) » Fig. 149. › Check whether the airbag indicator light  in the display     in the middle of the dash panel lights up when the ignition is turned on » Fig. 149 3. Switching on an airbag › Switch off the ignition. › Use the key to turn the slot of the key switch into the position 1 (ON) » Fig. 149. Airbag system

161



WARNING (Continued)

Transporting children safely Child seat

Introduction

This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Use of child safety seats on the front passenger seat Child safety and side airbag Classification of child seats Use of child safety seats Child seats with the ISOFIX system Child seat with the TOP TETHER system

163 163 164 164 164 165

Children are generally safer on the rear seats than on the front passenger seat. In contrast to adults, the muscles and bone structure of children are not yet fully developed. Thus children are exposed to increased risk of injury. To reduce this risk of injury, children who are less than 150 cm tall and who weigh less than 36 kg should only be transported using special child safety seats! Child seats that comply with the ECE-R 44 standard must be used. ECE-R stands for: Economic Commission for Europe - Regulation. Child seats that comply with the ECE-R 44 standard have a test seal that cannot be removed: a large E within a circle with the test number below.

WARNING The national legal requirements must be observed when using child seats. Children who are less than 150 cm tall and weigh less than 36 kg must be secured in an ergonomically fitted child seat » page 164, Classification of child seats. ■ One should never carry children, and also not babies! - on one's lap. ■ Only one child may be fastened with a seat belt into a child safety seat. ■ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Certain outside climatic conditions can cause life-threatening temperatures in the vehicle. ■ ■

162

Safety

Under no circ*mstances allow children to be transported without the use of a suitable restraint system. In the event of an accident the child will be thrown through the vehicle and may as a result suffer fatal injuries, and also injure other occupants. ■ Children are exposed to an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident if they lean forward or adopt an incorrect seated position when the vehicle is moving. This particularly applies to children who are transported on the front passenger seat as they can suffer severe, or even fatal injuries if the airbag system is deployed! ■ Pay particular attention to the information provided by the manufacturer of the child safety seat regarding the correct routing of the belt. Seat belts which are not correctly adjusted can themselves cause injuries even in minor accidents. ■ Safety belts must be checked to ensure that they are running properly. One should also ensure that the belt is not damaged by sharp-edged fittings. ■ It is essential to switch off the front passenger airbag if using a child safety seat in which the child is seated with its back facing the direction of travel on the front passenger seat. For further information, refer to » page 163, Use of child safety seats on the front passenger seat. ■

Note We recommend that you use child safety seats from ŠKODA Original Accessories. These child seats were developed and also tested for use in ŠKODA vehicles. They fulfil the ECE-R 44 standard.



WARNING (Continued)

Use of child safety seats on the front passenger seat

This is also clearly stated on the sticker which is located on the B column on the front passenger side » Fig. 150. The sticker is visible upon opening the front passenger door. For some countries, the sticker is also affixed to the sun visor of the front passenger. ■ The front passenger airbag must be reactivated as soon as you no longer use a child safety seat on the front passenger seat.

■

Fig. 150 Sticker on the B column on the front passenger side.



Child safety and side airbag

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 162.

For safety reasons, we recommend that you install child seats on the rear seats whenever possible. The following guidelines must be observed when using a child safety seat in which the child is seated with its back facing the direction of travel on the front passenger seat. › Switch off the front passenger airbag » page 160, Deactivating airbags. › Slide the front passenger seat all the way back. › Move the front passenger seat backrest into the vertical position. › Set the height-adjustable front passenger seat as high up as possible. › Adjust the seat belt for the front passenger seat so that it is as high as possible (not suitable for a child seat fastened with the ISOFIX system).

WARNING It is essential to always switch off the front passenger airbag when attaching a child safety seat to the front passenger seat where the child is seated with its back facing in direction of travel » page 160, Deactivating airbags. ■ Never use a child safety seat in which the child is seated with its back facing the direction of travel on the front passenger seat if the airbag is switched on. This child safety seat is positioned in the deployment area of the front passenger airbag. The airbag may cause the child severe, or even fatal injuries, in the event of it being deployed. ■

Fig. 151 Incorrect seated position of a child who is not properly secured risk from side the airbag/Child properly protected by safety seat

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 162.

The child must not be positioned in the deployment area of the side airbag. There must be sufficient room between the child and the deployment area of the side airbag so that the airbag can provide as much protection as possible.

WARNING Children must never be seated with their head in the deployment area of the side airbag - risk of injury! ■ Do not place any objects within the deployment area of the side airbags risk of injury!

■

Transporting children safely



163

Classification of child seats

Child seats with the ISOFIX system

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 162.

Fig. 152 Rear seat: ISOFIX

Child safety seats are classified in 5 groups: Group

Weight of the child

0 - 10 kg

Approximate age up to 9 months

up to 13 kg

up to 18 months

9 - 18 kg

up to 4 years

15 - 25 kg

up to 7 years

22 - 36 kg

over 7 years



First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 162.

On the rear outside seats, the fixing eyes are located below the upholstery. The places are marked with labels with the ISOFIX logo » Fig. 152. A child seat fitted with the ISOFIX system can only be mounted in a vehicle fitted with an ISOFIX system if the child seat has been approved for this type of vehicle. Further information is available from a ŠKODA Service Partner.

Overview of the usefulness of child seats on each of the seats in accordance with the ECE-R 44 standard:

U + T

Child seat of the group

Front passenger seat

U +

2 and 3

Rear seat outside

Rear seat middle

Safety

WARNING Always refer to the instructions from the manufacturer of the child seat when installing and removing a child seat with the ISOFIX system. ■ Never attach other child seats, belts or objects to the locking eyes intended for the installation of a child seat with the ISOFIX system - hazard!

■

Universal category - the seat is suitable for all approved types of child safety seats. The seat can be fitted with fixing eyes for the ISOFIX system » page 164, Child seats with the ISOFIX system. The rear seats can be fitted with fixing eyes for the TOP TETHER system » page 165, Child seat with the TOP TETHER system.

164

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 162. ings

There are two fixing eyes between the seat backrest and the seat cushion of the front passenger seat for fixing the ISOFIX system child seat in place.

Use of child safety seats

Note Child seats with the ISOFIX system can be purchased from ŠKODA Original Accessories. 



Child seat with the TOP TETHER system Fig. 153 Rear seat: TOP TETHER

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 162. ings

There are fixing eyes on the rear side of the rear seat backrests for attaching the fixing belt for a child seat with the TOP TETHER system » Fig. 153.

WARNING Always refer to the instructions from the manufacturer of the child seat when installing and removing a child seat with the TOP TETHER system. ■ Only use child seats with the TOP TETHER system on the seats with the locking eyes. ■ Only ever attach one belt from the child seat to a locking eye. ■ On no account should you equip your vehicle, e.g. mount screws or other anchorage points. ■



Transporting children safely

165

Driving Tips Driving and the Environment The first 1 500 kilometres and then afterwards New engine The engine has to be run in during the first 1 500 kilometres. Up to 1 000 kilometres › Do not drive faster than 3/4 of the maximum speed of the gear in use, i.e. 3/4 of the maximum permissible engine speed. › No full throttle. › Avoid high engine speeds. › Do not tow a trailer. From 1 000 up to 1 500 kilometres › Gradually increase the power output of the engine up to the full speed of the gear engaged, i.e. up to the maximum permissible engine speed. During the first operating hours the engine has higher internal friction than later until all of the moving parts have harmonized. The driving style which you adopt during the first approx.1 500 kilometres plays a decisive part in the success of running in your car. Never drive at unnecessarily high engine speeds even after the running-in period is complete. The maximum permissible engine speed is marked by the start of the red scale area of the revolutions counter. On vehicles fitted with a manual gearbox, at the very latest shift up into the next gear when the red area is reached. During acceleration (depressing the accelerator) exceptionally high engine speeds are automatically reduced, yet the engine is not protected against too high engine speeds which are caused by incorrectly shifting down the gears resulting in a sudden increase of the engine speeds above the permitted maximum revolutions which can lead to engine damage. For a vehicle fitted with a manual gearbox the converse situation also applies: Do not drive at an engine speed that is too low. Shift down a gear when the engine is no longer running smoothly. Observe the recommended gear » page 14, Recommended gear.

166

Driving Tips

CAUTION All the speed and engine revolution figures apply only when the engine is at its normal operating temperature. Never rev up a cold engine when the vehicle is stationary or when driving in individual gears.

For the sake of the environment Not driving at unnecessarily high engine revolutions and shifting to a higher gear as early as possible are ways to minimise fuel consumption and operating noise levels and protects the environment.



New tyres New tyres have to be “run in” since they do not offer optimal grip at first. Take this into account for the first 500 km and drive particularly carefully.



New brake pads New brake pads initially do not provide full braking efficiency. The brake pads must initially be “run in”. Take this into account for the first 200 km and drive particularly carefully.



Catalytic converter Proper operation of the emission control system (catalytic converter) is of major significance for driving your vehicle in an environmentally conscious way. The following guidelines must be observed: › Vehicles fitted with a petrol engine must always be refuelled with unleaded petrol » page 182, Unleaded petrol, › Do not pour too much oil into the engine » page 186, Replenishing the engine oil, › Do not switch off the ignition while driving. If you drive your vehicle in a country in which unleaded petrol is not available, you must have the catalytic converter replaced later when driving the vehicle into a £ country in which use of a catalytic converter is mandatory.

The optimal engine speed should be obtained when accelerating, in order to avoid a high fuel consumption and resonance of the vehicle.

WARNING In view of the high temperatures which can be produced in the catalytic converter, the vehicle should be parked in such a way that the catalytic converter cannot come into contact with easily flammable materials under the vehicle risk of fire! ■ Never use additional underbody protection or anti-corrosion agents for exhaust pipes, catalytic converters or heat shields - risk of fire!



■

Looking ahead when driving A vehicle's highest fuel consumption occurs when accelerating, therefore unnecessary accelerating and braking should be avoided. If looking ahead when driving, less braking and consequently less accelerating are required. If possible, let your vehicle coast to a stop, for example, if you can see that the next set of traffic lights is on red.

CAUTION Never drive until the fuel tank is completely empty! The irregular supply of fuel can cause misfiring, which can result in considerable damage to parts of the engine and exhaust system. ■ Just filling the tank with leaded petrol once will damage the exhaust system!



■

Shifting to save energy 

Fig. 154 Fuel consumption in litres/ 100 km depending on the selected gear

Economical and environmentally friendly driving Introductory information Your fuel consumption, any pollution of the environmental and the wear-and-tear to the engine, brakes and tyres, depend essentially on three factors: › your personal style of driving, › the conditions under which your vehicle is operated, › technical aspects. The fuel economy by can be improved by 10 - 15 % by always looking ahead and driving in an economical way.

Shifting up early saves on fuel. Manual gearbox

› Drive no more than about one length of your vehicle in first gear. › Shift up into the next gear at approx. 2 000 to 2 500 revolutions.

Fuel consumption is also be influenced by external factors which are beyond the driver's control. Consumption increases during the winter or under difficult conditions, on poor roads, etc.

An effective way of achieving good fuel economy is to shift up early. Observe the recommended gear » page 14, Recommended gear.

Fuel consumption can vary considerably from the manufacturer's data, as a result of outside temperatures, the weather and driving style.

Automatic gearbox

The technical requirements for low fuel usage and economic efficiency of the vehicle have already been built into the vehicle at the works. ŠKODA places a particular emphasis on minimising negative effects on the environment. It is necessary to take note of the guidelines given in this chapter in order to make best use of these characteristics and to maintain their effectiveness.

If the accelerator pedal is only depressed slowly on a vehicle fitted with an auto£ matic gearbox, an economic driving programme is automatically selected.

A suitably selected gear can have an effect on fuel consumption » Fig. 154. Slowly apply the accelerator pedal. However, do not depress it to the kickdown position.

Driving and the Environment

167

Note Observe the recommended gear » page 14, Recommended gear.



If an engine is only idling it takes much longer for it to reach its normal operating temperature. Wear-and-tear and pollutant emissions, though, are particularly high in the warming-up phase. Therefore, start driving as soon as the engine has started, whereby high engine speeds should be avoided.

Avoiding full throttle



Regular maintenance Fig. 155 Fuel consumption in litres/100 km. and speed in km/h.

A poorly tuned engine uses an unnecessarily high amount of fuel. By having your vehicle regularly maintained by a specialist garage, you create the conditions needed for driving economically. The maintenance state of your vehicle has a positive effect on traffic safety and value retention A poorly tuned engine can result in a fuel consumption which is 10 % higher than normal. Also check the oil level when refuelling. Oil consumption is dependent to a considerable extent on the load and speed of the engine. Oil consumption could be as high as 0.5 litres/1 000 km depending on your style of driving.

Driving more slowly means saving fuel.

It is quite normal that a new engine has a higher oil consumption at first, and reaches its lowest level only after a certain running in time. The oil consumption of a new vehicle can therefore only be correctly assessed after driving about 5 000 km.

Sensitive use of the accelerator will not only significantly reduce fuel consumption but also positively influence environmental pollution and wear of your vehicle. The maximum speed of your vehicle should, as far possible, never be used. Fuel consumption, pollutant emissions and vehicle noises increase disproportionally at high speeds. The » Fig. 155 shows the ratio of fuel consumption to the speed of your vehicle. Fuel consumption will be halved if only three-quarters of the possible top speed of your vehicle is used.

Reducing idling Idling also costs fuel. In vehicles not equipped with the START-STOP system, turn off the engine when in a traffic jam, at a level crossing or traffic lights with longer wait times. Even after just 30 - 40 seconds you will have saved more fuel than that is needed when you start the engine up again.

168

Driving Tips

For the sake of the environment Additional improvements to the fuel economy can be made by using synthetic high-lubricity oils. ■ Regularly check the ground under the vehicle. Have your vehicle inspected by a specialist garage if you find any stains caused by oil or other fluids on the floor. ■



Note We recommend that your vehicle is serviced on a regular basis by a ŠKODA Service Partner.



It is particularly in town traffic, when one is accelerating quite often, that the vehicle weight will have a significant effect upon the fuel consumption. A rule of thumb here is that an increase in weight of 100 kilograms will cause an increase in fuel consumption of about 1 litre/100 kilometres.

Avoid short distances Fig. 156 Fuel consumption in l/100 km at different temperatures

At a speed of 100 - 120 km/h, your vehicle that is fitted with a roof rack cross member without a load will use use about 10 % more fuel than normal due to the increased aerodynamic drag.



Saving electricity When the engine is running, the alternator generates and supplies electrical power. If more electrical components of the electrical system are switched on, more fuel is needed to operate the alternator. We therefore recommend switching off  electrical components if these are no longer required.

Short distances result in an above-average high fuel consumption. We therefore recommend avoiding distances of less than 4 km if the engine is cold. A cold engine consumes the most fuel immediately after the start. Fuel consumption drops to 10 litres/100 km after just 1 kilometre. The consumption stabilises once the engine and catalytic converter have reached their operating temperature. An important factor in this connection is also the ambient temperature. This image » Fig. 156 shows the different levels of fuel consumption after driving a certain distance at a temperature of +20 °C and a temperature of -10 °C. Your vehicle has a higher fuel consumption in the winter than in the summer.

Environmental compatibility Environmental protection has played a major role in the design, selection of materials and manufacture of your new ŠKODA. Particular emphasis has been placed on the following points: 

Checking tyre inflation pressures Tyres which are correctly inflated save fuel. Always ensure the tyre inflation pressure is correct. The rolling resistance will be increased if the tyre filling pressure is too low. This will not only increase fuel consumption but also tyre wear and the driving behaviour will worsen. Always check the tyre inflation pressure when the tyres are cold.

Avoid unnecessary ballast Transporting ballast costs fuel. Each kilogramme of weight increases the fuel consumption. It is worth checking the luggage compartment to avoid transporting any unnecessary ballast.



Design measures › Joints designed to be easily detached. › Simplified disassembly due to the modular structure system. › Improved purity of different classes of materials. › Identification of all plastic parts in accordance with VDA Recommendation 260. › Reduced fuel consumption and exhaust emission CO2. › Minimum fuel leakage during accidents. › Reduced noise. Choice of materials › Extensive use of recyclable material. › Air conditioning filled with CFC-free refrigerant. › No cadmium. › No asbestos. › Reduction in the “vaporisation” of plastics. Manufacture › Solvent-free cavity protection. › Solvent-free protection of the vehicle for transportation from the production plant to the customer.

Driving and the Environment

169

› The use of solvent-free adhesives. › No CFCs used in the production process. › Without use of mercury. › Use of water-soluble paints.

Headlights The low beam of your headlights is set asymmetrically. It illuminates the side of the road on which the vehicle is being driven to a greater extent.

Trade-in and recycling of old cars ŠKODA meets the requirements of the brand and its products with regard to protecting the environment and the preserving resources. All new ŠKODA vehicles can be utilized up to 95 % and always 1) be returned. In a lot of countries sufficient trade-in networks have been created, where you can trade-in your vehicle. After you trade-in your vehicle, you will receive a confirmation stating the recycling in accordance with environmental regulations.

When driving in countries in which the traffic drives on the other side of the road than in your home country, the asymmetrical low beam may dazzle oncoming drivers. To prevent oncoming traffic from being dazzled, the headlights must be adjusted by a ŠKODA Service Partner. Headlights with Xenon lights are adjusted in the menu of the information display » page 57, Tourist light.

Note

Note Detailed information about the trade-in and recycling of old cars is available from a ŠKODA Service Partner.



When driving on poor roads and lanes or when driving over kerb stones, steep ramps, etc., it must be ensured that any low-slung parts, such as the spoiler and exhaust, do not touch the ground and get damaged.

Introductory information

This particularly applies to models with a lowered suspension (sport suspension) and also when your vehicle is fully laden.



Unleaded petrol A vehicle fitted with a petrol engine must always be refuelled with unleaded petrol » page 166. Information regarding the locations of filling stations that offer unleaded petrol is, for example, provided by the automobile associations.

Subject to fulfilment of the national legal requirements.

170

Driving Tips



Avoiding damage to your vehicle

Driving abroad

In certain countries it is also possible that the ŠKODA Service Partner network is limited or has not been established yet. This is the reason why procuring certain spare parts may be somewhat complicated and specialist garages may only be able to make limited repairs. ŠKODA in the Czech Republic and its importers are happy to provide information about technical aspects of the vehicle, required maintenance work and possibilities for getting repairs done.

Further information on adjusting the headlights is available from a ŠKODA Service Partner.



Driving through water on the street Fig. 157 Driving through water

■ Potholes, mud or rocks can be hidden under the water making it difficult or impossible to drive through the body of water. ■ Do not drive through salt water. The salt can lead to corrosion. Any vehicle parts that have come into contact with salt water must be rinsed immediately with fresh water.

Note After driving through a body of water, we recommend that the vehicle is checked by a specialist garage.

The following must be observed to avoid damage to the vehicle when driving through bodies of water (e.g. flooded roads):

› Therefore determine the depth of the water before driving through bodies of water. The water level must not exceed the web on the lower sill » Fig. 157,

› Do not drive any faster than at a walking speed. At a higher speed, a wave can

form in front of the vehicle that can cause water to penetrate the engine's air induction system or other parts of the vehicle, › Never stop in the water, do not reverse and do not switch the engine off, › Switch off the START-STOP system before driving through water » page 124.

WARNING Driving through water, mud, sludge etc. can reduce the braking power and extend the braking distance - risk of accident! ■ Avoid abrupt and sudden braking immediately after water crossings. ■ After driving through bodies of water, the brakes must be cleaned and dried as soon as possible by intermittent braking. Only apply the brakes for the purpose of drying and cleaning the brake discs if the traffic conditions permit this. Do not place any other road users in jeopardy. ■

CAUTION When driving through bodies of water, parts of the vehicle such as the engine, gearbox, chassis or electrics can be severely damaged. ■ Oncoming vehicles can generate water waves which can exceed the permissible water level for your vehicle.

■

Driving and the Environment

171



Tyre pressure Correct the tyre inflation pressure on your vehicle for a “full load” » page 195.

Towing a trailer

Trailer load The permissible trailer load must not be exceeded under any circ*mstances » page 223, Technical data.

Towing a trailer

The trailer loads specified apply only to altitudes up to 1000 metres above mean sea level. As the engine output drops at an increasing altitude due to the declining air pressure and therefore the climbing ability is also reduced, this means that the maximum permissible towed weight must be reduced by 10 % for every further increase of 1 000 m in height. The towed weight comprises the actual weight of the (loaded) towing vehicle and the (loaded) trailer. Always drive particularly carefully with the trailer.

Technical requirements If your vehicle has already been factory-fitted with a towing device or is fitted with a towing device from ŠKODA Original Accessories, then it meets all of the technical requirements and national legal provisions for towing a trailer. On vehicles with a towing device, the ball rod is detachable and is stowed together with separate fitting instructions in the spare wheel well or in the compartment for the spare wheel within the luggage compartment » page 213, Vehicles a towing device.

The trailer and drawbar load information on the type plate of the towing device are merely test data for the towing device The vehicle-specific values are detailed in the vehicle documents.

Your vehicle is fitted with a 13-pin power socket for the electrical connection between the vehicle and trailer. If the trailer that is to be towed has a 7-pin connector, you can use a suitable adapter from ŠKODA Original Accessories.

WARNING If the maximum permissible axle and drawbar load and the maximum permissible total or towed weight of the vehicle and the trailer are exceeded this can cause accidents and serious injuries. ■ Slipping loads can significantly affect the stability and safety of the vehicle/ trailer combination, causing accidents and serious injuries. ■

If a towing device is retrofitted, it must be completed in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications.

Note If you have any questions, please contact a ŠKODA Service Partner.

Loading a trailer Loading a trailer The vehicle/trailer combination must be balanced, whereby the maximum permissible drawbar load must be utilised. If the drawbar load is too low, it jeopardises the performance of the vehicle/trailer combination. Distribution of the load Distribute the load in the trailer in such a way that heavy items are located as close to the axle as possible. Secure the items from slipping. The distribution of the weight is very poor if your vehicle is unladen and the trailer is laden. Maintain a particularly low speed if you cannot avoid driving with this combination.

172

Driving Tips



Towing a trailer Exterior mirrors You have to have additional exterior mirrors fitted if you are not able to see the traffic behind the trailer with the standard rear-view mirrors. Headlights The headlight settings must be checked before starting a journey with a coupled trailer. If necessary, adjust the settings with the headlight beam adjustment » page 59, Headlamp beam adjustment . Driving speed For safety reasons, do not drive faster than the maximum permissible speed indicated on the trailer. Immediately reduce your speed as soon as even the slightest swaying of the trailer is detected. Never attempt to stop the trailer from “swaying” by accelerating. £

Brakes Apply the brakes in good time! If the trailer is fitted with a trailer brake, apply the brakes gently at first, then brake firmly. This will avoid brake jolts resulting from the trailer wheels locking. On downhill sections shift down a gear in good time to also use the engine as a brake. Trailer stabilisation The trailer stabilisation is an extension of the stabilisation control that works in conjunction with the counter-steering assistance to reduce the amount the trailer "sways". The activated trailer stabilisation can be identified by the fact that the ESC indicator light  in the instrument cluster is illuminated approx. 2 seconds longer than the ABS indicator light.

Engine overheating If the needle for the coolant temperature gauge moves into the right-hand area or the red area of the scale, the speed must be reduced immediately. Stop and switch off the engine if the indicator light  in the instrument cluster starts to flash. Wait a few minutes and check the level of coolant in the coolant expansion bottle » Fig. 162. The following guidelines must be observed » page 27, Coolant temperature/coolant level . The coolant temperature can be reduced by switching on the heating.

WARNING

Prerequisites for stabilising the trailer: › The towing device is factory-fitted or a compatible towing device has been retrofitted. › The ESC is active. The indicator light  or  in the instrument cluster is not illuminated. › The trailer is electrically connected to the towing vehicle by means of the trailer socket. › The speed is higher than approx. 60 km/h. › The maximum drawbar load is fully exploited. › Trailers must have a fixed drawbar. › Trailers with brakes must include a mechanical towing gear. Trailer is connected to the anti-theft alarm system: › If the vehicle is factory-fitted with an anti-theft alarm system and a towing device. › If the trailer is electrically connected to the towing vehicle by means of the trailer socket. › If the electrical system of the vehicle and trailer is fully functional. › If the vehicle is locked with the car key and the anti-theft alarm system is activated. When the vehicle is locked, the alarm is activated as soon as the electrical connection to the trailer is interrupted. Always deactivate the anti-theft alarm system before a trailer is connected/disconnected. Otherwise, the anti-theft alarm system could accidentally be triggered » page 37, Anti-theft alarm system.

The increased safety offered by the trailer stabilisation must not tempt you to take greater risks than otherwise. ■ Adapt your speed to the conditions of the road surface and to the traffic situation. ■ Improper or incorrectly connected electric cables can energise the trailer and cause functional faults to the vehicle's entire electrical system as well as accidents and severe injuries. ■ Any work on the electrical system must only be carried out by specialist garages. ■ Never directly connect the trailer's electrical system with the electrical connections for the tail lights or other current sources. ■

CAUTION The trailer stabilisation may not be able to correctly detect all of the driving situations. ■ Trailers that sway slightly are not always detected by the trailer stabilisation and thus are not stabilised accordingly. ■ Release the pressure on the accelerator pedal if the system is being regulated. ■ Avoid abrupt and sudden driving/braking manoeuvres. ■

Note ■ We recommend that you also have your vehicle inspected between service intervals if you tow a trailer frequently. ■ The handbrake on the towing vehicle must be put on when coupling and decoupling the trailer. ■ For technical reasons, trailers with rear LED lights cannot be connected to the  anti-theft alarm system.

Towing a trailer

173

WARNING

General Maintenance

Care products may be harmful to your health if not used according to the instructions. ■ Always store care products in a safe place, out of the reach of children - risk of poisoning! ■ When washing your vehicle in the winter: Water and ice in the brake system can affect the braking efficiency - risk of accident! ■ Only wash the vehicle when the ignition is switched off - risk of accident! ■ Protect your hands and arms from sharp-edged metal parts when cleaning the underfloor, the inside of the wheel housings or the wheel trims - risk of cuts! ■

Taking care of and cleaning the vehicle Taking care of your vehicle

Introduction

This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Washing the vehicle Automatic car wash systems Washing by hand Washing with a high-pressure cleaner Preserving and polishing the vehicle paintwork Chrome parts Paint damage Plastic parts De-icing windows and exterior mirrors Radio reception and aerial Headlight lenses Rubber seals Door lock cylinders Wheels Underbody protection Protection of hollow spaces Artificial leather and materials Fabric covers on electrically heated seats Natural leather Seat belts

175 175 175 175 176 176 176 176 177 177 177 177 177 178 178 178 179 179 179 180

Regular and proper care help to retain the efficiency and value of your vehicle. It may also be one of the requirements for the acceptance of warranty claims relating to corrosion damage and paint defects on the bodywork. We recommend using care products from ŠKODA Original Accessories that are available from ŠKODA Service Partners. The instructions for use on the package must be observed.

174

General Maintenance

CAUTION Be sure to check clothing for colourfastness to avoid any damage or visible stains on the material (leather), panels and textiles. ■ Cleaners containing solvents can damage the material being cleaned. ■ Do not wash your vehicle in bright sunlight - risk of paint damage. ■ If washing the vehicle in the winter using a hose or high-pressure cleaner, ensure that the jet of water is not aimed directly at the locking cylinders or the door/panel joints - risk of freezing! ■ Do not use any insect sponges, rough kitchen sponges or similar cleaning products - risk of damaging the surface of paintwork. ■ Do not stick any stickers on the inside of the rear windows, the rear side windows, in the vicinity of the heating elements on the windshield or near the window aerial - as they could be damaged. With regard to the antenna, they may interfere with the radio or navigation system. ■ Do not clean the inside of the windows with sharp-edged objects or corrosive and acidic cleaning agents - risk of damaging the heating elements or window aerial. ■ To avoid damaging the parking aid sensors while cleaning with high-pressure cleaners or steam jets, the sensors must only be directly sprayed for short periods while a minimum distance of 10 cm must be observed. ■

For the sake of the environment Only wash the vehicle at washing bays intended for this purpose.

If your vehicle is fitted with any particular attached parts, such as a spoiler, roof luggage rack, two-way radio aerial - it is best to consult the operator of the car wash system beforehand.

Note ■ Remove fresh stains such as those from ball-point pens, ink, lipstick, shoe polish, etc., from the material (leather), panels and textiles as quickly as possible. ■ Due to possible issues with the cleaning and care of the interior of your vehicle, the special tools and knowledge required, we recommend that this is completed by a ŠKODA Service Partner.

It is important to degrease the lips of the windshield wiper rubbers after passing through the automatic vehicle wash system.



Washing by hand Washing the vehicle

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 174.

When washing by hand, first soften the dirt with plenty of water and rinse off as much as possible.

The best protection for your vehicle against harmful environmental influences is frequent washing and wax treatment. How often the vehicle should be washed depends on a wide range of factors, such as:

Clean the vehicle with a soft sponge, a washing glove or a washing brush. Work from the top to the bottom - starting with the roof. Only apply slight pressure when cleaning the vehicle's paintwork. Only use a car shampoo for stubborn dirt.

› Frequency of use, › The parking situation (garage, below trees etc.), › Season of the year, › Weather conditions, › Environmental influences.

Wash out the sponge or washing glove thoroughly at short intervals. Clean wheels, door sills and similar parts last. Use a second sponge for such areas. Give the vehicle a good rinse after washing it and dry it off using a chamois leather.

The longer insect residues, bird droppings, tree sap, road and industrial dust, tar, soot particles, road salt and other aggressive deposits remain adhering to the paintwork of your vehicle, the more detrimental their destructive effect can be. High temperatures, such as those caused by intensive sun's rays, accentuate this caustic effect. It is essential to also thoroughly clean the underside of the vehicle at the end of the winter.

Automatic car wash systems

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 174.

Your vehicle can be washed in automatic car wash systems. The usual precautionary measures must be taken before washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash system (closing the windows including the sliding/tilting roof, etc.).

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 174.



Washing with a high-pressure cleaner 

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 174. ings

When washing the vehicle with a high-pressure cleaner, the instructions for use of the equipment must be observed. This applies in particular to the pressure used and to the spraying distance. Maintain a sufficiently large distance to the parking aid sensors and soft materials such as rubber hoses or insulation material.

WARNING Never use circular spray nozzles or "dirt cutters"!

Taking care of and cleaning the vehicle

175

First clean the chrome parts with a damp cloth and then polish them with a soft, dry cloth. If this method does not completely clean chrome parts, use a specific chrome care product.

CAUTION The temperature of the water used for cleaning must not exceed 60 °C - risk of damaging the vehicle.



CAUTION Do not polish the chrome parts in a dusty environment, otherwise they can be scratched.

Preserving and polishing the vehicle paintwork

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 174.

Paint damage

Preserving the vehicle paintwork Good wax treatment is an effective way of protecting the paintwork from harmful environmental influences.

The vehicle must be treated with a high-quality hard wax polish at the latest, when no more drops form on the clean paintwork.

Slight damage to paintwork such as scratches, scuffs or traces of chip damage must be treated immediately.

A new layer of a high-quality hard wax polish can be applied to the clean bodywork after it has dried thoroughly. Even if you use a wax preserver regularly we still recommend that you treat the paintwork of the vehicle at least twice a year with hard wax.

The ŠKODA Service Partners have a range of matching touch-up pens or spray cans available in the colour of your vehicle.

Note We recommend that any repairs to damaged paintwork are carried out by a ŠKODA Service Partner.

If the polish does not contain any preserving elements, the paint must be treated with a preservative afterwards.

CAUTION

ä 176

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 174.

General Maintenance



Plastic parts

■

Chrome parts

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 174.

The paint number of the original paintwork of your vehicle is indicated on the vehicle data sticker » page 223.

Polishing Polishing is necessary if the vehicle's paintwork has become unattractive and if it is no longer possible to achieve a gloss with wax preservatives.

Never apply wax to the windows. ■ Mat painted or plastic parts must not be treated with polishing products or hard waxes. ■ Do not polish the paintwork of the vehicle in a dusty environment, otherwise the paintwork can be scratched.



ä 

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 174.

Plastic parts can be cleaned using a damp cloth. If this does not prove to be adequate, the parts can be treated with special solvent-free plastic cleaning products. Paint care products are not suitable for plastic parts.



Use soap and clean water to clean the plastic headlight lenses.

De-icing windows and exterior mirrors

CAUTION

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 174.

Never wipe the headlights dry and do not use any sharp objects to clean the plastic lenses, this may damage the protective paintwork and consequently cause the formation of cracks on the headlight lenses. ■ Do not use any aggressive cleaning or chemical solvent products to clean the  headlights - risk of damaging the headlight lenses.

■

Use a plastic ice scraper for removing snow and ice from the windows and mirrors. The ice scraper should not be moved forward and backward but in one direction to avoid any damage to the surface of the glass. Clean the windows from the inside on a regular basis. Dry the glass surfaces with a clean chamois leather or a cloth intended for this purpose.

Rubber seals

When drying the windows after washing the vehicle, do not use window leathers that have been used to polish the bodywork. Residues of preservatives in the window leather can dirty the window and reduce visibility.

CAUTION Never remove snow or ice from glass parts using warm or hot water - risk of formation of cracks in the glass! ■ When removing snow or ice from windows and mirror lenses ensure that the  paintwork of the vehicle is not to damage. ■

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 174.

Door lock cylinders First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 174.

Specific products must be used for de-icing door lock cylinders.

With factory-fitted radios and navigation systems, the aerial for the radio reception can be installed at different locations in the vehicle:

› on the inside of the rear window along with the rear window heater, › on the inside of the rear side windows, › on the inside of the windscreen, › on the roof.

The rubber seals on doors, folds, the sliding roof and other windows remain smoother and last longer if the seals are treated regularly with a suitable rubber care product. Premature wear of the seals and leakages are also prevented in this way. Rubber seals which are well cared for also do not stick together in cold win ter weather.

Radio reception and aerial

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 174.

Note



■ When washing your vehicle, ensure as little water as possible gets into the locking cylinders. ■ We recommend that suitable materials from ŠKODA Original Accessories are  used for maintaining the door lock cylinders.

Headlight lenses

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 174.

Taking care of and cleaning the vehicle

177

As damage to the protective layer when driving cannot be ruled out completely, we recommend that you inspect and touch up any damaged areas of the protective layer on the underside of your vehicle and on the chassis at certain intervals preferably at the beginning and end of the winter.

Wheels

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 174.

ŠKODA Service Partners have suitable spray products and the necessary equipment available, and are familiar with the instructions for use. We therefore recommend that touch-up work or additional corrosion protection measures are carried out by a ŠKODA Service Partner.

Wheel rims Also thoroughly wash the wheel rims when washing the vehicle on a regular basis. Regularly remove salt and brake abrasion from the wheel rims otherwise the material will be affected. Any damage to the paint layer on the wheel rims must be touched up immediately.

WARNING

Light alloy wheels After washing thoroughly and treat the wheel rims with a protective product for light alloy wheels. Products which cause abrasion must not be used to treat the wheel rims.

Never use additional underbody protection or anti-corrosion agents for exhaust pipes, catalytic converters, diesel particle filters or heat shields. When the engine reaches its operating temperature, these substances might ignite risk of fire!



WARNING Protection of hollow spaces

Water, ice and grit in the brake system can affect the braking efficiency - risk of accident!

CAUTION

All the cavities of your vehicle which are at risk from corrosion are protected for life by a layer of protective wax applied in the factory.

Severe layers of dirt on the wheels can also result in wheel imbalance. This may show itself in the form of a wheel vibration which is transmitted to the steering wheel which, in certain circ*mstances, can cause premature wear of the steering. This means it is necessary to remove the dirt.

This wax protection does not require to be inspected or re-treated. If any small amount of wax flow out of the cavities at high temperatures, these must be removed with a plastic scraper and the stains cleaned using a petroleum cleaner.

Note We recommend that any repairs to damaged paintwork are carried out by a ŠKODA Service Partner.

Underbody protection

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 174.

The underside of your vehicle is protected for life against chemical and mechanical influences.

178

General Maintenance

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 174. ings

WARNING 

Safety regulations should be observed when using petroleum cleaner to remove wax - risk of fire!



Dry off the leather with a soft, dry cloth.

Artificial leather and materials

Removing stains Remove fresh stains which are water-based (e.g. coffee, tea, juices, blood, etc.) with an absorbent cloth or household paper or use a suitable cleaner for a stain which has already dried in.

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 174.

The artificial leather can be cleaned using a damp cloth. If this does not prove to be adequate, these parts can only be treated with special solvent-free plastic cleaning and care products.

Remove fresh stains which are grease-based (e.g. butter, mayonnaise, chocolate, etc.) with an absorbent cloth or household cleaning paper or use a suitable cleaner if the stain has not yet penetrated into the surface.

Treat upholstery cloths and cloth trims on doors, the luggage compartment cover, headliner, etc. with special cleaning products, using if necessary a dry foam and a soft sponge, brush or a commercially available microfibre cloth. Some clothing materials, such as dark denim, do, in part, not have sufficient colour fastness. This can cause damage or clearly visible discolouration to seat covers (fabric or leather) even when used correctly. This particularly applies to light seat covers (fabric or leather). This is not a defect in the seat cover, but poor colour fastness of the clothing textiles.

Use a grease solvent for grease stains which have dried in. Remove specific stains (e.g. ball-point pens, marker pen, nail varnish, dispersion paint, shoe polish, etc.) with a special stain remover suitable for leather. Leather care Treat the leather roughly every six months with a suitable leather care product. 

Apply only a small amount of the cleaning and care product. Dry off the leather with a soft, dry cloth.

Fabric covers on electrically heated seats

CAUTION

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 174. ings

Do not clean the seat covers using moisture as this may damage the seat heating system. Clean the covers using special agents, such as dry foam, etc.

Avoid leaving the vehicle for lengthy periods in bright sunlight to avoid the leather from bleaching. If the vehicle is parked in the open for lengthy periods, protect the leather from direct sunlight by covering it. ■ Sharp-edged objects on items of clothing such as zip fasteners, rivets, sharpedged belts may leave permanent scratches or signs of rubbing on the surface. ■ The use of a mechanical steering wheel lock may damage the leather surface of the steering wheel.

■



Natural leather

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 174.

Depending on the amount of wear-and-tear, the leather should be cleaned on a regular basis. Normal cleaning Clean soiled areas of the leather with slightly moistened cotton or woollen cloth. Severe soiling Ensure that the leather is not soaked through at any point and that no water gets into the stitching of the seams.

Note Use a care cream with light blocker and impregnation effect on a regular basis and each time after cleaning. The cream nourishes the leather, allows it to breathe and keeps it supple and also provides moisture. It also creates surface protection. ■ Clean the leather every 2 to 3 months, remove any fresh stains as they occur. ■ Also look after the leather dye. Refresh any areas with a special coloured leather cream as required. ■ The leather is a natural material with specific properties. During the use of the vehicle, minor optical changes can occur on the leather parts of the covers (e. g wrinkles or creases as a result of the stress of the covers). ■

Taking care of and cleaning the vehicle

179



Seat belts

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 174.

Keep the seat belts clean! Clean dirty seat belts using a mild soapy solution and remove coarse dirt with a soft brush! Check the condition of all the seat belts on a regular basis. Belt webbing which has become severely soiled may prevent the inertia reel from reeling up the belt properly.

WARNING The seat belts must not be removed for cleaning. Never clean the seat belts chemically as chemical cleaning products could destroy the fabric. The seat belts must also not be allowed to come into contact with corrosive liquids (such as acids etc.). ■ Seat belts which have damage to the webbing, connections, inertia reel or lock should be replaced by a specialist garage. ■ Inertia reel belts must be completely dried before being reeled up. ■ ■

180

General Maintenance



Refuelling

Inspecting and replenishing Fuel

Introduction

This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Refuelling Unleaded petrol Diesel fuel

181 182 183 Fig. 158 Right rear side of the vehicle: Open fuel filler flap/fuel filler flap with cap unscrewed

The correct type of fuel for your vehicle and the tyre size and inflation pressure are specified on the inside of the fuel filler flap » Fig. 158 - .

WARNING The national legal requirements must be observed if carrying a spare canister in the vehicle. We do not recommend carrying any fuel canisters in your vehicle for safety reasons. In the event of an accident, the canister might be damaged and fuel may leak out - risk of fire!

The filler flap is automatically unlocked or locked with the central locking. Open fuel filler flap › Press in the middle of the left area of the fuel filler flap » Fig. 158 - . › Unscrew the filler cap by turning it to the left and place the cap onto the top of the fuel filler flap » Fig. 158 - .

CAUTION Never drive until the fuel tank is completely empty! The irregular supply of fuel can cause misfiring, which can result in considerable damage to parts of the engine and exhaust system. ■ Immediately remove any fuel that has spilled onto the vehicle's paintwork - risk of paint damage!

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 181. ings

Closing the filler cap › Turn the filler cap to the right until it clicks into place. › Close the fuel filler flap until it clicks into place.

■

CAUTION



Before refuelling it is necessary to switch off the auxiliary heating system (auxiliary heating and ventilation). ■ The fuel tank is full just as soon as the pump nozzle switches off for the first time, provided the nozzle has been operated properly. Do not continue filling the fuel tank otherwise the expansion volume is filled up. ■

Note The fuel tank has a capacity of about 60 litres, containing a reserve of approx. 10.5 litres.

Inspecting and replenishing



181

Unleaded petrol

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 181.

Your vehicle can only be operated with unleaded petrol, which complies with the standard EN 228 (In Germany: standard DIN 51626 - 1 or E10 for unleaded fuel with octane rating 95 RON and 91 RON or DIN 51626 - 2 or E5 for unleaded fuel with octane rating 95 RON and 98 RON). Prescribed fuel - unleaded petrol 95/91 RON Use unleaded fuel with the octane rating 95 RON. Unleaded petrol 91 RON can also be used but results in a slight loss in performance. If, in an emergency, the vehicle has to be refuelled with petrol of a lower octane number than the one prescribed, the journey must only be continued at medium engine speeds and a low engine load. Driving at high engine revs or a high engine load can severely damage the engine! Refuel using petrol of the prescribed octane number as soon as possible. Prescribed fuel - unleaded petrol min. 95 RON Use unleaded fuel with the octane rating 95 RON. In case of necessity, you can refuel with petrol with the octane rating 91 RON if petrol with the octane rating 95 RON is not available. The journey must only be continued at medium engine speeds and a minimum engine load. Driving at high engine revs or a high engine load can severely damage the engine! Refuel using petrol of the prescribed octane number as soon as possible. Even in the event of an emergency, petrol of a lower octane number than 91 RON must not be used, otherwise the engine can be severely damaged! Unleaded petrol with higher octane number Unleaded petrol that has a higher octane number than that required by the engine can be used without limitations. On vehicles with prescribed unleaded petrol 95/91 RON, the use of petrol with a higher octane number than 95 RON does not result in a noticeable power increase or a lower fuel consumption. On vehicles using prescribed unleaded petrol of min. 95 RON, the use of petrol with a higher octane number than 95 RON can increase the power and reduce fuel consumption.

182

General Maintenance

Prescribed fuel - unleaded petrol 98/95 RON Use unleaded fuel with the octane rating 98 RON. Unleaded petrol 95 RON can also be used but results in a slight loss in performance. In case of necessity, you can refuel with petrol with the octane rating91 RON of unleaded fuel with octane rating 98 RON or 95 RON is not available. The journey must only be continued at medium engine speeds and a minimum engine load. Driving at high engine revs or a high engine load can severely damage the engine! Refuel using petrol of the prescribed octane number as soon as possible. Even in the event of an emergency, petrol of a lower octane number than 91 RON must not be used, otherwise the engine can be severely damaged! Fuel additives Only use unleaded petrol, which complies with the standard EN 228 (in Germany: standard DIN 51626 - 1 or E10 for unleaded fuel with an octane rating of 95 RON and 91 RON or DIN 51626 - 2 or E5 for unleaded fuel with an octane rating of 95 RON and 98 RON), as these meet all of the requirements for fault-free engine operation. We therefore recommend that no fuel additives are used.

CAUTION All ŠKODA vehicles with petrol engines must only be operated with unleaded petrol. Just filling the tank with leaded petrol once will damage the exhaust system! ■ Engine parts can be damaged if petrol with a lower octane number than the one prescribed is used. ■ In no case may fuel additives with metal components be used, especially not with manganese and iron content. LRP (lead replacement petrol) fuels with metallic components may not be used. There is a risk of causing considerable damage to parts of the engine or exhaust system! ■ Fuels with metallic content may not be used. There is a risk of causing considerable damage to parts of the engine or exhaust system! ■ The use of unsuitable fuel additives can cause considerable damage to parts of  the engine or the exhaust system. ■

Diesel fuel

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 181.

Your vehicle can only be operated with diesel fuel, which complies with the standard EN 590 (standard DIN 51628 in Germany, standard ÖNORM C 1590 in Austria, GOST R 52368-2005/EN 590:2004 in Russia). Operation in winter - Winter-grade diesel fuel In the winter, only use diesel fuel, which complies with the standard EN 590 (standard DIN 51628 in Germany, standard ÖNORM C 1590 in Austria, GOST R 52368-2005/EN 590:2004 in Russia). “Winter-grade diesel fuel” will still operate properly even at a temperature of -20 °C. It is often the case in countries with different climatic conditions that diesel fuels available have a different temperature characteristic. The ŠKODA Service Partners and filling stations in the relevant country will be able to provide you with information regarding the diesel fuels available. Preheating fuel The vehicle is fitted with a fuel filter preheating system. This secures operation of a vehicle using diesel fuel down to an environmental temperature of -25 °C. Fuel additives Fuel additives, so-called “flow improvers” (petrol and similar products) must not be added to the diesel fuel.

Engine compartment

This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Opening and closing the bonnet Engine compartment overview Checking the engine oil level Replenishing the engine oil Changing engine oil Coolant Checking the coolant level Replenishing the coolant Radiator fan Checking the brake fluid Changing the brake fluid Windshield washer system

184 185 185 186 186 186 187 187 188 188 188 189

There is a risk of injuries, scalding, accidents and fire when working in the engine compartment, e.g. inspecting and replenishing oil and other fluids. For this reason, it is essential to comply with the warning instructions stated below and with the general applicable rules of safety. The vehicle's engine compartment is a hazardous area.

WARNING

CAUTION Just filling the tank once with diesel fuel that does not comply with the standard, can cause severe damage to parts of the engine, the fuel and exhaust system! ■ If a different fuel other than diesel fuel, which complies to the above mentioned standards (e.g. petrol) is used by mistake do not start the engine or switch on the ignition! Extensive damage to engine parts can occur! We recommend that the fuel system is cleaned by a ŠKODA Service Partner. ■ Water which has collected in the fuel filter can cause engine faults. ■ Your vehicle is not adapted for use of biofuel (RME), therefore this fuel must not be refuelled and driven. The use of biofuel (RME) can cause considerable damage  to parts of the engine or fuel system. ■

Introduction

Never open the bonnet if you can see steam or coolant flowing out of the engine compartment - risk of scalding! Wait until the steam or coolant has stopped escaping. ■ For safety reasons, the bonnet must always be properly closed when driving. This is why after closing the bonnet, the lock must always be checked to ensure it has engaged properly. ■ If you notice that the lock is not properly engaged while driving, stop the vehicle immediately and close the bonnet - risk of an accident! ■ Turn off the engine and withdraw the ignition key. ■ If the vehicle is fitted with a manual gearbox, move the gearshift lever into Neutral, or if the vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox, move the selec£ tor lever into position P. ■

Inspecting and replenishing

183

For the sake of the environment

WARNING (Continued) Firmly apply the handbrake. Allow the engine to cool. Keep children clear of the engine compartment. Do not touch any hot engine parts - risk of burns! Never spill fluids on the hot engine. Such fluids (e.g. the antifreeze contained in the coolant) may ignite! ■ Avoid short circuits in the electrical system - particularly on the vehicle's battery. ■ Never touch the radiator fan while the engine is still warm. The fan might suddenly start running! ■ Never open the end cover of the coolant expansion reservoir while the engine is still warm. The cooling system is pressurized! ■ When opening the end cover of the coolant expansion reservoir, cover it with a large cloth to protect your face, hands and arms from hot steam or hot coolant. ■ Do not leave any items such as cloths or tools in the engine compartment. ■ If you wish to work under the vehicle, you must secure the vehicle from rolling away and support it with suitable supporting blocks: the car jack is not sufficient for this - risk of injury! ■ If any inspection work has to be carried out when the engine is running, there is an additional risk from rotating parts (e.g. V-belt, alternator, radiator fan) and the high-voltage ignition system. The following must also be observed. ■ Never touch the electric wiring on the ignition system. ■ Always make sure that no jewellery, loose clothing or long hair can get caught in rotating engine parts - hazard! Always remove any jewellery, tie back long hair and wear tight fitting clothing before completing any work. ■ Additionally, the following warning instructions must be observed if work has to be carried out on the fuel or electrical system. ■ Always disconnect the vehicle battery from the electrical system. ■ Do not smoke. ■ Never work near open flames. ■ Always have a functioning fire extinguisher nearby. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

CAUTION Always top up using the correct specification of fluids. This may result in major operating problems and also vehicle damage! ■ Never open the bonnet using the locking lever - danger of causing damage. ■

184

General Maintenance

In view of the environmentally friendly disposal of fluids, the specials tools and knowledge required for such work, we recommend that fluids are changed by a Škoda Service Partner as part of the inspection service.

Note If you have any questions regarding the fluids, visit a ŠKODA Service Partner. Fluids with the correct specifications can be purchased from ŠKODA Original Accessories.

■ ■



Opening and closing the bonnet

Fig. 159 Bonnet release lever/radiator grille release lever

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 183.

Opening the bonnet › Pull the release lever under the dash panel 1 » Fig. 159. › The bonnet jumps out of its lock as a result of the spring force. › Before opening the bonnet, ensure that the arms of the windshield wipers are correctly in place against the windshield otherwise the paintwork could be damaged. › Press the release lever in the direction of the arrow 2 » Fig. 159 and the bonnet is unlocked. › Grasp the bonnet and lift up until it is held open by the pressurised gas spring. £

Closing the bonnet › Pull the bonnet down far enough to overcome the force of the pressurised gas spring. › Let the bonnet drop into the lock carrier lock from a height of around 30 cm – do not push it in! › Check whether the bonnet is closed properly.

Checking the engine oil level Fig. 161 Dipstick 

Engine compartment overview

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 183. ings

The dipstick indicates the level of oil in the engine » Fig. 161. Checking the oil level › Ensure that the vehicle is positioned on a level surface and the engine has reached its operating temperature. › Switch off the engine. › Open the bonnet. › Wait a few minutes until the engine oil flows back into the oil sump and remove the dipstick. › Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth and insert it again to the stop. › Then pull the dipstick out again and check the oil level.

Fig. 160 1.6 l/77 kW diesel engine

ä 1 2 3 4 5 6

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 183.

Coolant expansion reservoir Windshield washer fluid reservoir Engine oil filler opening Engine oil dipstick Brake fluid reservoir Battery (below a cover)

Oil level within range A › No oil must be refilled.

187 189 186 185 188 189

Oil level within range B › Oil can be refilled. It is possible that the oil level may then be within range A after doing this. Oil level within range C › Oil must be refilled » Fig. 161. It is sufficient, once this is done, to keep the oil level within range B .

Note The location of the inspection points in the engine compartment of petrol and diesel engines is practically identical.



It is normal for the engine to consume oil. The oil consumption may be as much as 0.5 l/1 000 km depending on your style of driving and the conditions under which you operate your vehicle. Consumption may be slightly higher than this during the £ first 5 000 kilometres.

Inspecting and replenishing

185

The engine oil must be changed at the intervals stated in the Service schedule or according to the service interval indicator » page 12.

One should therefore check the oil level at regular intervals, preferably every time after the fuel tank is filled or after driving for long stretches. We recommend maintaining the oil level within the range A , but not above, if the engine has been operating at high loads, for example, during a lengthy motorway trip during the summer months, towing a trailer or negotiating a high mountain pass.

CAUTION Additives must not be added to the engine oil - risk of causing considerable damage to parts of the engine! Damage, which results from such product, are excluded from the warranty.

The warning light in the instrument cluster will indicate whether the oil level is too low » page 26. In this case, check the oil level with the dipstick, as soon as possible. Add oil accordingly.

Note If your skin has come into contact with oil, it must be washed thoroughly.

CAUTION ■ The oil level must on no account extend beyond the range A . Risk of damaging the exhaust system! ■ Do not continue your journey if for some reason it is not possible to top up the engine oil under the prevailing conditions. Switch the engine off and obtain professional assistance from a specialist garage, otherwise it could cause severe engine damage.

Coolant

ä 

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 183.

If a higher concentration of antifreeze is required for climatic reasons, the amount of coolant additive can only be increased up to 60 % (antifreeze protection down to approx. -40 °C). The antifreeze protection tails off above that concentration.

› Check the engine oil level » page 185. › Unscrew the cap of the engine oil filler opening. › Replenish the oil in portions of 0.5 litres in accordance with the correct specifi-

cations » page 226. › Check the oil level » page 185. › Carefully screw on the oil filler opening cap and push the dipstick in fully.

Changing engine oil

ä 186

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 183.

General Maintenance

The coolant consists of water with a concentration of coolant additive of 40 %. This mixture provides antifreeze protection down to -25 °C and also protects the cooling and heating system from corrosion. It also prevents the formation of scale and significantly increases the boiling point of the coolant. The concentration of coolant must therefore not be reduced by adding water during the summer months or in countries with a warm climate. The concentration of coolant additive in the coolant must be at least 40 %.

Replenishing the engine oil

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 183.

The cooling system is filled with a coolant in the factory.

Note Engine oil specifications » page 226.



Vehicles exported to countries with a cold climate are already factory-filled with a coolant which offers antifreeze protection down to about -35 °C. In these countries the concentration of coolant additive should be at least 50 %. 

Coolant capacity Petrol engines

Filling level

1.4 ltr./92 kW TSI - EU5

7.7

1.8 ltr./118 kW TSI - EU5 1.8 ltr./112 kW TSI - EU2/BS4

8.6

Petrol engines 2.0 l/147 kW TSI - EU5

8.6

3.6 ltr./191 kW FSI - EU5/EU2/(BS4)

9.0

Diesel engines

› Open the bonnet » page 184. › Check the level of coolant in the coolant expansion bottle. » Fig. 162. When the

Filling level

engine is cold, the coolant level must be between the b (MIN) and a (MAX) markings. The level may also rise slightly above the a (MAX) marking when the engine is warm.

Filling level

1.6 ltr./77 kW TDI CR - EU5

8.4

2.0 ltr./103 kW TDI CR DPF - EU5

8.4

2.0 ltr./103 kW TDI CR DPF - EU4/BS4

8.4

2.0 ltr./125 kW TDI CR DPF - EU5

8.4

If the coolant level in the expansion bottle is too low, this is indicated by the indicator light in the instrument cluster  » page 27. We still recommend inspecting the coolant level directly at the reservoir from time to time. Loss of coolant A loss of coolant is first and foremost an indication of a leak in the system. Do not merely top up the coolant. Have the cooling system checked by a specialist garage immediately.

CAUTION Other coolant additives that do not comply with the correct specifications can above all significantly reduce the anticorrosion effect. ■ Any faults resulting from corrosion may cause a loss of coolant and can consequently result in major engine damage! ■

CAUTION If a fault causes the engine to overheat, we recommend visiting a ŠKODA Service Partner immediately, otherwise serious engine damage may occur.

Note On vehicles that are fitted with an auxiliary heater (auxiliary heating and ventilation), the coolant capacity is approx. 1 l larger.

Checking the coolant level Fig. 162 Engine compartment: Coolant expansion reservoir



Replenishing the coolant 

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 183.

› Switch off the engine. › Allow the engine to cool. › Place a cloth over the cap of the coolant expansion reservoir » Fig. 162 and unscrew the cap carefully.

› Replenish the coolant. › Turn the cap until it clicks into place. Do not use an alternative additive if the specified coolant is not available in an emergency. In this case, just use water and have the correct mixing ratio of water and the coolant additive restored by a specialist garage as soon as possible. Only use new coolant to top up the system.

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 183.

Do not fill the coolant above the mark a (max.) » Fig. 162! Excess coolant heats up and then is forced out of the cooling system through the pressure relief valve £ in the cap.

The coolant expansion bottle is located in the engine compartment. › Switch off the engine.

Inspecting and replenishing

187

WARNING The coolant additive and thus all of the coolant is harmful to your health. Avoid contact with the coolant. Coolant vapours are also harmful to health. Therefore always safely store the coolant additive in its original container out of the reach of children - risk of poisoning! ■ If any coolant splashes into your eyes, immediately rinse out your eyes with clear water and contact a doctor as soon as possible. ■ You should also consult a doctor without delay if you have inadvertently swallowed coolant. ■

The brake fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment. › Switch off the engine. › Open the bonnet » page 184. › Check the level of brake fluid in the reservoir » Fig. 163. The level must be between the “MIN” and “MAX” markings. When driving, a slight drop in the fluid level is caused by the wear-and-tear and automatic adjustment of the brake pads, and is therefore perfectly normal. There may be an indication of a leak in the brake system, however, if the fluid level drops significantly within a short time or if it drops below the “MIN” marking. If the brake fluid level is too low, this is indicated by the warning light  lighting up in the instrument cluster » page 30.

CAUTION Do not continue your journey, if for some reason it is not possible to top up the coolant under the prevailing conditions. Switch off the engine and contact a ŠKODA Service Partner, otherwise serious engine damage may occur.



WARNING If the fluid level has dropped below the MIN marking, do not continue your journey - risk of accident! Get professional assistance.

Radiator fan

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 183.

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 183. ings

The radiator fan is driven by an electric motor and controlled according to the coolant temperature. After switching off the ignition, the radiator fan can intermittently continue to op erate for approx. 10 minutes.

Checking the brake fluid Fig. 163 Engine compartment: Brake fluid reservoir



Changing the brake fluid

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 183.

Brake fluid absorbs moisture. Over time it therefore absorbs moisture from the environment. Excessive water in the brake fluid may be the cause of corrosion in the brake system. The water content also lowers the boiling point of the brake fluid. The brake fluid must comply with one of the following standards or specifications:

› VW 50114 › FMVSS 116 DOT4 WARNING

Using old brake fluid can result in severe stress on the brakes because of the formation of vapour bubbles in the brake system. This greatly impairs the braking efficiency and thus also the safety of your vehicle.

188

General Maintenance

CAUTION

Brake fluid damages the paintwork of the vehicle.

Windshield washer system Fig. 164 Engine compartment: Windshield washer fluid reservoir



Under no circ*mstances must radiator antifreeze or other additives be added to the windshield washer fluid. ■ If the vehicle is fitted with a headlight cleaning system, only cleaning products which do not attack the polycarbonate coating of the headlights must be added to the windshield washer fluid.

■

Note Do not remove the filter from the windshield washer fluid reservoir when replenishing it with liquid otherwise the liquid transportation system can be contaminated, which can cause the windshield washer system to malfunction.



Vehicle battery

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 183.

The windshield washer fluid reservoir contains the cleaning fluid for the windshield or rear window and for the headlamp cleaning system. The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment. The filling level of the container is about 3 litres and about 5.5 litres on vehicles that have a headlight washing system. Clear water is not sufficient to intensively clean the windshield and headlights. We therefore recommend using clean water with a screen cleaner (including antifreeze in the winter) that is able to remove stubborn dirt. Antifreeze should always be added to the cleaning water in the winter even if the vehicle is fitted with heated windshield washer nozzles. Under exceptional circ*mstances, methylated spirits can also be used if no screen cleaner with antifreeze is available. The concentration of methylated spirits must not be more than 15 %. However, it must be noted that the antifreeze protection in this concentration is only adequate down to -5 °C.

Introduction

This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Battery cover Checking the battery electrolyte level Operation in winter Charging a vehicle battery Disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery Replacing the vehicle battery Automatic load deactivation

191 191 192 192 192 193 193

Improper handling of the vehicle battery can cause damage. We therefore recommend that any work on the vehicle battery is carried out by a ŠKODA Service Partner. There is a risk of injuries, scalding, accidents and burns when carrying out any work on the battery and on the electrical system. For this reason, it is essential to comply with the warning instructions stated below and with the general applica£ ble rules of safety.

Inspecting and replenishing

189

WARNING The battery acid is strongly corrosive and must, therefore, be handled with the greatest of care. Always wear protective gloves, eye and skin protection when handling the vehicle battery. Corrosive fumes in the air irritate the air passages and lead to conjunctivitis and inflammation of the air passages in the lungs. Battery acid corrodes dental enamel and creates deep wounds after contact with the skin which take a long time to heal. Repeated contact with diluted acids causes skin diseases (inflammations, ulcers, slin cracks). Acids coming into contact with water are diluted accompanied by significant development of heat. ■ Do not tilt the battery otherwise battery electrolyte may flow out of the battery vent openings. Protect the eyes with safety glasses or a shield! There is the danger of suffering blindness! If any battery electrolyte comes into contact with your eyes, rinse the relevant eye immediately with clear water for several minutes. Then consult a doctor immediately. ■ Splashes of acid on your skin or clothes should be neutralised as soon as possible using soap suds and then rinsed with plenty of water. If acid was swallowed, seek immediate medical attention. ■ Keep children away from the vehicle battery. ■ When you charge a battery, hydrogen is released, and a highly explosive gas mixture is also produced. An explosion can be caused through sparkling over during unclamping or loosening of the cable plug while the ignition is on. ■ Bridging of the poles will create a short circuit (e.g. through metal objects, cables). Possible consequences of a short circuit: Melting of lead struts, explosion and burning of the battery, jets of acid spurting out. ■ It is prohibited to work with a naked flame and light, to smoke or to carry out any activities which produce sparks. Avoid creating sparks when working with cables and electrical devices. Strong sparking represents a risk of injury. ■ Before carrying out any work on the electrical system, switch off the engine, the ignition and all of the electrical components and disconnect the negative terminal (-) on the battery. If you wish to replace a bulb it suffices to switch off the relevant light. ■ Never charge a frozen or thawed vehicle battery - risk of explosion and caustic burns! Replace a frozen vehicle battery. ■ Never jump-start vehicle batteries with an electrolyte level that is too low risk of explosion and caustic burns! ■ Never use a damaged vehicle battery - risk of explosion! Replace a damaged vehicle battery immediately. ■

190

General Maintenance

CAUTION The vehicle battery must only be disconnected if the ignition is switched off, otherwise the vehicle's electrical system (electronic components) can be damaged. When disconnecting the battery from the electrical system, first of all disconnect the negative terminal (-) of the battery. Then disconnect the positive terminal (+). ■ When reconnecting the battery, first connect the positive terminal (+) and then the negative terminal (-) of the battery. Under no circ*mstances must the battery cables be connected incorrectly - risk of a cable fire. ■ Ensure that battery acid does not come into contact with the bodywork otherwise the paintwork could be damaged. ■ Do not place the battery in direct daylight in order to protect the vehicle battery housing from the effects of ultra-violet light. ■ If the vehicle has not been driven for more than 3 to 4 weeks, the battery will discharge This is because certain electrical components consume electricity (e. g. control units) also in idle state. Prevent the battery from discharging by disconnecting the battery's negative terminal or continuously charging the battery with a very low charging current. ■ If the vehicle is frequently used for making short trips, the vehicle battery will not have time to charge up sufficiently and may discharge. ■

For the sake of the environment A vehicle battery that has been removed is a special type of hazardous waste. It must therefore be disposed of in accordance with environmental regulations.

Note You should replace batteries older than 5 years.



Battery cover

Checking the battery electrolyte level Fig. 166 Vehicle battery: Electrolyte level indicator

Fig. 165 Engine compartment: Polyester cover of the vehicle battery/plastic cover of the vehicle battery

We recommend that the electrolyte level is checked by a specialist garage on a regular basis, especially in the following cases:

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 189. ings

› High outside temperatures. › Long daily drives › After each charge » page 192.

The battery is located in the engine compartment in a polyester cover 1 » Fig. 165, in a plastic cover 2 » Fig. 165 or in the left side of the luggage compartment » Fig. 102.

On vehicles with a vehicle battery fitted with a colour indicator, the so-called magic eye » Fig. 166, the electrolyte level can be determined by looking at the change in colour.

Battery in the engine compartment › Open the battery cover in the direction of the arrow 1 or press the interlock on the side of the battery cover in the direction of the arrow 2 » Fig. 165, fold the cover up and remove. › The battery cover is installed in reverse order.

Air bubbles can influence the colour of the indicator. For this reason carefully knock on the indicator before carrying out the check. › Black colour - electrolyte level is correct. › Colourless or light yellow colour - electrolyte level too low, the battery must be replaced.

Battery in the luggage compartment › Open the compartment with the symbol  by turning the locks e.g with a coin or flat screwdriver in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 102. When working on the battery, the edge of the polyester battery cover 1 » Fig. 165 is inserted between the battery and the side wall of the battery cover.

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 189.

Note 

The battery electrolyte level is periodically checked by a ŠKODA Service Partner as part of the Inspection Service. ■ For technical reasons, on vehicles with the description “AGM”, the electrolyte level cannot be checked. ■ Vehicles with a “START-STOP” system are fitted with a battery control unit for checking the energy level for the recurring engine start. ■

Inspecting and replenishing

191



Operation in winter

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 189.

At low temperatures, the vehicle battery only has part of the initial power output that it has at normal temperatures. A discharged vehicle battery may already freeze at temperatures just below 0 °C. We therefore recommend that you have the battery checked and, if necessary, re charged by a ŠKODA Service Partner before the start of the winter.

Charging a vehicle battery

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 189. ings

A properly charged vehicle battery is essential for reliably starting the engine. › Switch off the ignition and all of the electrical components. › Only for “quick-charging”: Disconnect both battery cables (first of all “negative”, then “positive”). › Attach the terminal clamps of the charger to the battery terminals (red = “positive”, black = “negative”). › Only now plug the mains cable of the charger into the power socket and switch on the device. › When charging is completed: Switch off the charger and remove the mains cable from the power socket. › Only then disconnect the charger's terminal clamps. › Reconnect the cables to the battery, if necessary (first of all “positive”, then “negative”). It is not normally necessary to disconnect the cables of the battery if you recharge the vehicle battery using low amperages (as for example from a minicharger). In any case, refer to the instructions from the charger manufacturer. A charging current of 0.1 of the total vehicle battery capacity (or lower) is that which should be used until full charging is achieved. It is, however, necessary to disconnect both cables before charging the battery with high amperages, so-called “quick-charging”.

192

General Maintenance

“Quick-charging” the vehicle battery is dangerous and requires a special charger and specialist knowledge. We therefore recommend that vehicle batteries are quick-charged by a specialist garage. The vent plugs of the vehicle battery should not be opened for charging.

CAUTION On vehicles with the “START/STOP” system, the pole terminal of the charger must not be connected directly to the negative terminal of the vehicle battery, but only  to the engine earth » Fig. 182.

Disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 189.

On disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery the following functions are initially deactivated or are no longer able to operate fault-free. Operation

Operating measure

Electrical power window (operational faults)

» page 49

Enter the radio/navigation system code num- refer to the Operating Instrucber tions for the radio or navigation system Setting the clock

» page 13

Data in the multi-functional indicator are deleted.

» page 14

Note We recommend having the vehicle checked by a ŠKODA Service Partner to ensure the full functionality of all electrical systems.



Replacing the vehicle battery

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 189.

When replacing a battery, the new vehicle battery must have the same capacity, voltage, amperage and be the same size. Suitable types of vehicle batteries can be purchased from a ŠKODA Service Partner. We recommend that the battery is replaced by a ŠKODA Service Partner, where the new vehicle battery will be installed properly and the original battery will be disposed of in accordance with national regulations.



Automatic load deactivation

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 189.

An intelligent vehicle power management system automatically takes various measures at high loads on the vehicle battery to prevent discharging of the battery: This manifests itself by the following.

› The idling speed is raised to allow the generator to deliver more electricity to the electrical system.

› Where appropriate large consumers of power, e.g. seat heaters, rear window

heaters, voltage supply to the 12V power socket, have their power limited or in case of emergency shut off completely.

Note Despite such intervention by the vehicle electric system management, the vehicle battery may be drained. For example, when the ignition is switched on a long time with the engine turned off or the side or parking lights are turned on during longer parking. Driving comfort is not put at risk by any shutting off of consumers.  Often the driver is not aware of it having taken place.

Inspecting and replenishing

193

WARNING (Continued)

Wheels and Tyres

Do not, where possible, replace individual tyres but at least replace them on both wheels of a given axle at the same time. Always fit the tyres with the deeper tread depth to the front wheels. ■ Never use tyres if you do not know anything about the condition and age. ■ You must have your tyres replaced with new ones at the latest when the wear indicators have been worn down. ■ Worn tyres do not provide the necessary adhesion to the road surface at high speeds on wet roads. One could experience “aquaplaning” (uncontrolled movements of the vehicle - “swimming” on a wet road surface). ■ Immediately replace damaged wheel rims or tyres. ■ Do not use summer or winter tyres that are older than 6 years or 4 years respectively. ■ The wheel bolts must be clean and must turn easily. However, they must never be treated with grease or oil. ■ If the wheel bolts are tightened to a too low tightening torque, the rim can come loose when the car is moving - risk of accident! A tightening torque which is too high can damage the bolts and threads and this can result in permanent deformation of the contact surfaces on the rim. ■ In case of incorrect treatment of the wheel bolts, the wheel can loosen when the car is moving - risk of accident! ■

Wheels

Introduction

This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Service life of tyres Handling wheels and tyres New wheels and tyres Unidirectional tyres Spare wheel Full wheel trim Wheel bolts Wheel trim caps Tyre control display Wheel bolts Winter tyres Snow chains

195 196 196 197 197 198 198 198 199 200 200 200

WARNING During the first 500 km, new tyres do not offer optimum grip and appropriate care should therefore be taken when driving - risk of accident! ■ Never drive with damaged tyres - risk of accident! ■ Only use those tyres or wheel rims which have been approved by ŠKODA for your model of vehicle. Failure to observe this instruction will adversely affect the road safety of your vehicle - risk of accident! ■ The maximum permissible speed for your tyres must not be exceeded under any circ*mstances - risk of an accident resulting from tyre damage and loss of control of the vehicle. ■ If the inflation pressure is too low, the tyre must perform a higher rolling resistance. At higher speeds the tyre will warm up as a result of this. This can result in tread separation and even a tyre blowout. ■

CAUTION If a spare wheel is used that is not identical to the fitted tyres, the following must be observed » page 197, Spare wheel. ■ The prescribed tightening torque of the wheel bolts for steel and light alloy wheels is 120 Nm. ■ Protect the tyres from contact with oil, grease and fuel. ■ Replace any lost valve caps immediately. ■

For the sake of the environment Tyres which are insufficiently inflated increase your fuel consumption.

Note The national legal requirements must be observed when using the wheels. We recommend that any work on the wheels or tyres is carried out by a ŠKODA Service Partner. ■ We recommend that you use wheel rims, tyres, full wheel trims and snow chains  from ŠKODA Original Accessories. ■

■

194

General Maintenance

Service life of tyres

Always check the inflation pressure when the tyres are cold. Do not reduce the higher pressure of warm tyres. If the load varies greatly, adjust the tyre inflation pressure accordingly. Driving style Fast cornering, sharp acceleration and braking increase the wear of your tyres. Balancing wheels The wheels of a new vehicle are balanced. There are a wide range of influences when driving which may result in an imbalance and which makes themselves felt through vibration in the steering. Have the wheels rebalanced after replacing the tyres.

Fig. 167 Tyre tread with wear indicators/Open fuel filler flap with a table detailing the tyre size and tyre inflation pressure

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 194. ings

Wear indicators The base of the tread of the tyres has 1.6 mm high wear indicators installed at right angles to the direction of travel. These wear indicators are located multiple times depending on the make and are evenly spaced around the circumference of the tyre » Fig. 167. Markings on the walls of the tyres through the letters “TWI”, triangular symbols or other symbols identify the position of the wear indicators. The life of your tyres very much depends on the following points: Tyre pressure The working life of tyres will be shortened considerably if the tyres are insufficiently or over-inflated and this will have an adverse effect on the handling of your vehicle. Therefore check the tyre pressure, including that of the spare wheel, at least once a month and also before setting off on a long journey.

Wheel alignment errors Incorrect wheel alignment at the front and rear will not only increase wear-andtear on the tyres but will also has an adverse effect on vehicle safety. In the event of any unusual tyre wear, visit a specialist garage. Tyre damage Drive over curbs on the side of the road and other such obstacles slowly and, where possible, at a right angle in order to avoid damage to tyres and wheel trims. We recommend checking your tyres and wheel rims for damage (punctures, cuts, splits and bulges, etc.) on a regular basis. Remove foreign bodies from the tyre profile. Unusual vibrations or pulling of the vehicle to one side could be a sign of tyre damage. If there is any doubt that a wheel is damaged, immediately reduce your speed and stop! Check the tyres for signs of damage (bulges, splits, etc.). If no external damage is evident, drive slowly and carefully to the nearest specialist ga rage to have the vehicle checked.

The tyre inflation pressures for summer tyres are indicated on the inside of the fuel filler flap » Fig. 167. The inflation pressures for winter tyres are 20 kPa (0.2 bar) higher than those for summer tyres. The tyre inflation pressure for tyres of the tyre size 205/50 R17 that are designed to be used with snow chains, is identical to the tyre inflation pressure for tyres of the tyre size 225/45 R17. The tyre pressure should be at the highest pressure specified for your vehicle at all times. The tyre inflation pressure of the spare wheel R 18 is 420 kPa.

Wheels and Tyres

195

Proper knowledge of the tyre data makes it easier for you to select the correct type of tyre. Tyres, for example, have the following inscription on their walls:

Handling wheels and tyres

205 / 55 R 16 94 V

Fig. 168 Changing wheels around

What this means is: 205

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 194. ings

Tyre width in mm

Height/width ratio in %

Code letter for the type of tyre - Radial

Diameter of wheel in inches

Load index

Speed symbol

The following speed restrictions apply to tyres.

Changing wheels around If significantly greater wear is present on the front tyres, we recommend changing the front wheels around with the rear wheels as shown in the diagram » Fig. 168. You will then obtain approximately the same life for all the tyres.

Speed symbol

Permissible maximum speed

180 km/h

190 km/h

200 km/h

We recommend that you change the wheels around every 10 000 km in order to achieve even wear on all wheels and to obtain optimal tyre life.

210 km/h

240 km/h

Storing tyres Mark wheels before removing them so that their previous direction of running can be maintained when mounted them again.

270 km/h

300 km/h

Always store wheels or tyres which been removed in a cool, dry and, where possible, dark place. Tyres which are not fixed to a wheel trim should be stored upright.

New wheels and tyres

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 194. ings

Only fit tyres of the same type, size (rolling circumference) and the same tread pattern on one axle on all 4 wheels. The tyre/wheel combinations which are approved for your vehicle are indicated in your vehicle documents.

196

General Maintenance

The date of manufacture is also stated on the tyre wall (possibly only on the inside of wheel): 

DOT ... 20 12... means, for example, that the tyre was manufactured in the 20th week of the year 2012. The following must be observed if only one temporary spare wheel is available » page 197, Spare wheel.



Unidirectional tyres

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 194.

The direction of rotation of the tyres is marked by arrows on the wall of the tyre. The so specified running direction must absolutely be complied with. Only then are the tyres able to provide the optimal properties in terms of grip, low noise, wear-and-tear and aquaplaning. If, in the event of a puncture, it is necessary to fit a spare wheel with a tyre without a dedicated running direction or the opposite running direction, drive carefully as the optimum characteristics of the tyre are no longer applicable in this situa tion.

Spare wheel Fig. 169 Luggage compartment: Spare wheel

If the dimensions or design of the spare wheel differ from the tyres fitted to the vehicle (e.g. winter tyres or low-profile tyres), it must only be used briefly in the event of a puncture and if an appropriately cautious style of driving is adopted » . Replace it with a wheel having the appropriate mode and dimensions as soon as possible Temporary spare wheel A warning label is displayed on the wheel rim of the spare wheel to indicate that your vehicle is equipped with a temporary spare wheel. Please observe the following when driving with a temporary spare wheel:

› The warning label must not be covered after installing the wheel. › Do not drive faster than 80 km/h with the temporary spare wheel and pay par-

ticular attention while driving. Avoid accelerating at full throttle, sharp braking and fast cornering. › The inflation pressure for this spare wheel is identical to the inflation pressure of the standard tyres. The temporary spare wheel R 18 must have an inflation pressure of 420 kPa! › Only use this temporary spare wheel to reach the nearest specialist garage as it is not intended for continuous use. › No other summer or winter tyres must be mounted on the rim of the temporary spare wheel R 18.

WARNING Never use the temporary spare wheel if it is damaged. If the dimensions or design of the temporary spare wheel differ from the fitted tyres, never drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph). Avoid accelerating at full throttle, sharp braking and fast cornering.

■ ■

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 194.

The spare wheel is located in a well under the floor covering in the luggage compartment and is fixed in place with a special bolt » Fig. 169. Before removing the spare wheel, the box containing the vehicle tool kit must be removed » Fig. 175. It is important to check the inflation pressure in the spare wheel (preferably every time the tyre air pressure is checked - see sticker on the fuel filler flap » page 195) to ensure it is always ready to use.

CAUTION Observe the instructions on the sticker on the temporary spare wheel.

Note The tyre pressure should be at the highest pressure specified for your vehicle at all times.

Wheels and Tyres

197



Full wheel trim

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 194.

Pulling off › Push the plastic clip sufficiently far onto the cap until the inner catches of the clip are positioned at the collar of the cap and detach the cap » Fig. 170.

Pulling off › Hook the clamp found in the vehicle tool kit into the reinforced edge of the full wheel trim. › Push the wheel wrench through the clamp, support on the tyre and pull off the wheel trim.

Install › Push the caps onto the wheel bolts up to the stop. The caps are located in the well of the luggage compartment.

Install › First press the full wheel trim onto the wheel rim at the valve opening provided. Then press the full wheel trim into the wheel rim until its entire circumference locks correctly in place.



Wheel trim caps Fig. 171 Pull off the wheel trim cap on light alloy wheels

CAUTION Use the pressure of your hand, do not knock the full wheel trim! Heavy knocks mainly on the points where the full wheel trim has not been inserted into the wheel, can result in damage to the guide and centring elements of the full wheel trim. ■ First of all check that the theft-deterrent wheel bolt is located in the hole near the valve before fitting the full wheel trim onto a steel wheel which is attached with a theft-deterrent wheel bolt » page 206, Securing wheels against theft. ■ If wheel trims are retrofitted it must be ensured that an adequate flow of air is assured to cool the brake system.

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 194.

■

Fig. 170 Remove the cap

General Maintenance

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 194. ings

Pulling off › Carefully remove the wheel trim cap using the wire clamp from the vehicle tool kit » Fig. 171.

Wheel bolts

198



› Press and hold the button

Tyre control display Fig. 172 Button for setting the tyre inflation pressure control value

  » Fig. 172 for longer than 2 seconds. While pressing the button, the indicator light  illuminates. At the same time the memory of the system is erased and the new calibration is started, which is confirmed with an audible signal and then the warning light  goes out. › If the indicator light  does not go out after the basic setting, this indicates a system fault. Visit a specialist garage.

The indicator light  is lit If the tyre inflation pressure of at least one wheel is insufficiently inflated in comparison to the stored basic value, the warning light  » lights up.

The indicator light  flashes If the warning light flashes, there is a system fault. Visit a specialist garage and have the fault rectified. First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 194.

The tyre control display compares the speed and thus the rolling circumference of the individual wheels with the help of the ABS sensors. If the rolling circumference of a wheel is changed, the warning light  in the instrument cluster » page 28 and an acoustic signal sounds. The rolling circumference of the tyre can change if: › the tyre inflation pressure is too low, › the structure of the tyre is damaged, › the vehicle is loaded on one side, › the wheels of an axle are loaded heavily (e.g. when towing a trailer or when driving uphill or downhill), › snow chains are mounted, › the temporary spare wheel is mounted, › one wheel per axle was changed. Basic setting of the system After changing the tyre inflation pressures, after changing one or several wheels, the position of a wheel on the vehicle (e.g. exchanging the wheels between the axles) or when the warning light lights up while driving, a basic setting of the system must be carried out as follows: › Inflate all of the tyres to the specified inflation pressure » page 195. › Switch on the ignition.

WARNING When the indicator light  illuminates, immediately reduce the speed and avoid sudden steering and brake manoeuvres. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and inspect the tyres and their inflation pressures. ■ Under certain circ*mstances (e.g. sporty style of driving, wintry or unpaved roads) the warning light  can be delayed or does not light up at all. ■ The tyre control display does not absolve the driver of the responsibility to ensure the correct tyre inflation pressure. For this reason, the tyre inflation pressures must be checked regularly. ■

Note ■ The tyre control display does therefore not replace the regular tyre inflation pressure control, as the system cannot detect an even loss of pressure. ■ The tyre control display cannot provide a warning in the event of very rapid tyre inflation pressure loss, e.g. in the case of sudden tyre damage. In this case carefully bring the vehicle to a standstill without sudden steering movements or sharp braking. ■ To ensure a proper functioning of the tyre control display, it is necessary to repeat the basic setting every 10 000 km or once a year.

Wheels and Tyres

199



Snow chains must only be mounted on the front wheels.

Wheel bolts

When driving on wintry roads, snow chains improve not only traction, but also the braking performance.

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 194.

Wheels and wheel bolts are matched to each other in terms of design. Each time you fit other wheels - e.g. light alloy wheels or wheels with winter tyres - you must therefore also use the matching wheel bolts of the correct length and shape of spherical cap. This is essential to ensure that the wheels are tightly fitted and that the brake system operates properly.

For technical reasons, it is only permissible to fit snow chains with the following wheel/tyre combinations.



Winter tyres

Wheel size

Depth (D)

Tyre size

7J x 16a)

45 mm

205/55

6J x 16a)

50 mm

205/55

6J x 17

45 mm

205/50

Not valid for vehicles with 3.6 l/191 kW FSI engine.

Only use fine-link snow chains. They must not project more than 9 mm - including the chain lock.

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 194.

Remove the full wheel trims before installing the snow chains.

The handling of your vehicle will be significantly improved when driving on wintry roads if you fit winter tyres. Summer tyres do not offer the same grip on ice, snow and at temperatures below 7 °C because of their construction (width, rubber blend, tread pattern). This particularly applies to vehicles which are equipped with low-profile tyres or high-speed tyres (code index H or V on wall of tyre).

Observe the national legal regulations relating to the use of snow chains and the maximum vehicle speed with snow chains.

To achieve the best possible handling properties, winter tyres must be fitted on all 4 wheels, the minimum tread depth must be 4 mm and tyres must be no older than 4 years.

The chains must be removed when driving on roads which are free of snow. They adversely affect the handling of your vehicle, damage the tyres and are rapidly destroyed.

CAUTION

Winter tyres of a lower speed category can be used provided that the permissible maximum speed of these tyres is not exceeded even if the possible maximum speed of the vehicle is higher.

For the sake of the environment Fit the summer tyres on again in good time as they provide better handling properties, a shorter braking distance, less tyre noise, reduced tyre wear and lower fuel consumption on roads which are free of snow and ice as well as at temperatures above 7 °C.

Snow chains

ä 200

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 194.

General Maintenance



Accessories, changes and replacement of parts Introductory information If you want to retrofit the vehicle with accessories, if a vehicle part is to be replaced with a new one, or when needing to make technical changes, the following instructions must be observed:

› Always seek advice from a ŠKODA Service Partner before purchasing any accessories or parts and before making any technical changes »

WARNING Work or modifications on your vehicle, which have been carried out unprofessionally, can cause operational faults - risk of accident! ■ We advise you, in your own interest, to only use ŠKODA Original Accessories and ŠKODA Original Parts which have been expressly approved for use on your vehicle. Reliability, safety and suitability have been established for ŠKODA Original Accessories and ŠKODA Original Parts. ■ Although we constantly monitor the market, we are not able to assess or warrant the parts even though in some instances such parts may have a type approval or may have been approved by a nationally recognised testing laboratory. ■

› The guidelines and instructions issued by ŠKODA must be observed when mak-

Note

ing technical changes.

Adhering to the prescribed procedures will prevent any kind of damage to the vehicle, and its travelling and operating safety will be maintained. The vehicle also complies with German road transport regulations (StVZO). More information is available from a ŠKODA Service Partner who can also perform the necessary work correctly. Vehicles with special built-on types Technical documents regarding changes carried out on the vehicle must be kept by the vehicle user, in order to hand over later to the old car user. This ensures the recycling in accordance with environmental regulations. Interference on the electronic components and their software can lead to operational faults. This interference can also impair not directly affected systems because of the networking of the electronic components. In other words, the vehicle's roadworthiness may be put at risk and increased wear on parts may arise. Any damage caused by technical changes made without consent by ŠKODA is excluded from the warranty – see the warranty certificate.

ŠKODA Original Accessories and ŠKODA Original Parts can be purchased from ŠKODA Service Partners who will also professionally undertake the assembly of the purchased parts.



Changes and impairments of the airbag system Repairs and technical modifications must comply with ŠKODA guidelines. We recommend that any modifications and repairs to the front bumper, doors, front seats, headliner or bodywork are carried out by a ŠKODA Service Partner. These vehicle parts may include system components for the airbag system.

WARNING Airbag modules can not be repaired, but must be replaced. Never install any airbag parts into the vehicle that have been removed from old cars or have been recycled. ■ A modification to the suspension of the vehicle including the use of non-approved rim-tyre combinations can alter the functioning of the airbag and increase the risk of serious or fatal injuries in an accident. ■ Parts of the airbag system may be damaged when working on the airbag system or removing and installing system parts due to other repairs. This may mean that the airbags will not deploy properly or not at all in the event of an accident.

■ ■

Accessories, changes and replacement of parts

201



Warning triangle

Do-it-yourself

Fig. 174 Placing of the warning triangle

Do-it-yourself First-aid box

The warning triangle can be attached to the rear wall trim panel with rubber straps » Fig. 174.

WARNING The warning triangle must always be secured safely so that it does not come loose in the event of emergency braking or a vehicle collision and cause injuries to occupants.

Fig. 173 Compartment for stowing first-aid box/compartment for stowing first-aid box (Combi)

Note

The compartment for stowing the first-aid box is located in the right of the luggage compartment » Fig. 173.

We recommend using a warning triangle from ŠKODA Original Accessories available from a ŠKODA Service Partner.

WARNING The first-aid box must always be secured safely so that it does not come loose in the event of emergency braking or a vehicle collision and cause injuries to occupants.



Fire extinguisher The fire extinguisher is attached with straps in a holder under the driver seat.

Note Pay attention to the expiration date of the first-aid kit. We recommend using a first-aid box from ŠKODA Original Accessories available from a ŠKODA Service Partner.

Please read carefully the instructions which are attached to the fire extinguisher.

■ ■

202

Do-it-yourself



The fire extinguisher must be checked by an authorised person on an annual ba£ sis (the national legal provisions must be observed).

Before placing the lifting jack back into its storage area, screw in the arm of the lifting jack fully.

WARNING The fire extinguisher must always be secured safely so that they do not come loose when making an emergency braking or in a vehicle collision which could cause injuries to occupants.

Note The fire extinguisher must comply with the relevant applicable national legal requirements. ■ Pay attention to the expiration date of the fire extinguisher. If the fire extinguisher is used after the expiration date, its proper function is no longer assured.  ■ The fire extinguisher is part of the scope of delivery in certain countries only. ■

Vehicle tool kit

WARNING The factory-supplied lifting jack is only intended for your model of vehicle. Under no circ*mstances attempt to lift heavier vehicles or other loads - risk of injury! ■ Ensure that the vehicle tool kit is safely secured in the luggage compartment. ■

Note Ensure that the box is always secured with the strap.



Changing a wheel Fig. 175 Luggage compartment: Storage compartment for vehicle too kit

The vehicle tool kit and the lifting jack with sticker are housed in a plastic box in the spare wheel » Fig. 175 or in the storage space for the spare wheel. There is also space here for the removable ball for the trailer towing device. The box is attached with a strap on the spare wheel. The vehicle tool kit contains the following parts (depending on equipment fitted): › Wire clamp for removing the full wheel trims or wheel bolt covers, › Plastic clip for a wheel bolt cover, › Wheel wrench, › Towing eye, › Adapter for anti-theft wheel bolts, › Replacement lamp, › Torx wrench.

Introduction

This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Preliminary work Changing a wheel Subsequent steps Slackening and tightening wheel bolts Raising the vehicle Securing wheels against theft

204 204 205 205 206 206

WARNING If you are in flowing traffic, switch on the hazard warning light system and set up the warning triangle at the prescribed distance! The national legal requirements must be observed. In this way you are not only protecting yourself but other road users as well. ■ If the wheel is damaged or in the event of a puncture, park the vehicle as far away as possible from the flow of traffic. Park on as flat and firm a surface as possible. ■

Do-it-yourself

203

› In the event of a puncture, park the vehicle as far away as possible from the

WARNING (Continued)

flow of traffic. The place you choose should be level.

› Let all of the occupants get out. While changing a tyre, the occupants of the

If the wheel has to be changed on a slope, first of all block the opposite wheel with a stone or similar object to prevent the vehicle from unexpectedly rolling away. ■ It is necessary to observe the guidelines given on » page 196 if the vehicle is subsequently fitted with tyres which are different to those it was fitted with at the works. ■ Always raise the vehicle with the doors closed. ■ Never position any body parts, such as arms or legs under the vehicle, while the vehicle is raised with a lifting jack. ■ Secure the base plate of the lifting jack with suitable means to prevent possible moving. A soft and slippery ground under the base plate may move the lifting jack, causing the vehicle to fall down. It is therefore always necessary to place the lifting jack on a solid surface or use a wide and stable base. Use a non-slip base (e.g. a rubber foot mat) if the surface is smooth, such as cobbled stones, tiled floor, etc. ■ Never start the engine with the vehicle sitting on the raised jack - danger of suffering injury. ■ Only attach the lifting jack to the attachment points provided for this purpose. ■

vehicle should not stand on the road (instead they should remain behind a crash barrier). › Switch off the engine and move the gearshift lever into Neutral or move the selector lever for the automatic gearbox into position P. › Firmly apply the handbrake. › If a trailer is connected, remove it. › Remove the vehicle tool kit » page 203 and the spare wheel » page 197 from  the luggage compartment.

Changing a wheel

Always change a wheel on a level surface as far as possible. › Remove the full wheel trim » page 198 or caps » page 198. › In the case of light alloy wheel rims remove the wheel trim cap » page 198. › First of all slacken the anti-theft wheel bolt and then the other wheel bolts » page 205. › Jack up the vehicle until the wheel that needs changing is clear of the ground » page 206. › Unscrew the wheel bolts and place them on a clean surface (cloth, paper, etc.). › Remove the wheel. › Attach the spare wheel and slightly screw on the wheel bolts. › Lower the vehicle. › Alternately tighten the wheel bolts opposite each other using the wheel wrench (crosswise) and then tighten the anti-theft wheel bolt » page 205. › Install the full wheel trim/wheel trim cap or the caps.

CAUTION Steel and light alloy wheels must be tightened to a tightening torque of 120 Nm. ■ If the anti-theft wheel bolt is fastened too tightly, it can cause damage to the anti-theft wheel bolt and adapter.

■

Note ■ The anti-theft wheel bolt set or adapter set can be purchased from a ŠKODA Service Partner. ■ The national legal requirements must be observed.

Preliminary work

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 203.

The following steps must be carried out before actually changing the wheel:

204

Do-it-yourself

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 203.

Note



All bolts must be clean and must turn easily. Under no circ*mstances grease or oil the wheel bolts! When fitting unidirectional tyres, ensure that the direction of rotation is correct » page 197.

■ ■ ■



Slackening wheel bolts › Push the wheel wrench onto the wheel bolt up to the stop1). › Grasp the end of the wrench and turn the bolt about one turn to the left » Fig. 176.

Subsequent steps

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 203.

Tightening wheel bolts › Push the wheel wrench onto the wheel bolt up to the stop1). › Grasp the end of the wrench and turn the bolt to the right until it is tight.

The following steps must also be performed after changing the wheel. › Stow and attach the replaced wheel in the spare wheel well using a special screw » Fig. 169. › Stow the vehicle tool kit in the space provided. › Check the tyre pressure on the installed spare wheel as soon as possible. › Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked with a torque wrench as soon as possible. › Change the damaged wheel or consult a specialist garage about repair possibilities.

WARNING Slacken the wheel bolts only a little (about one turn) as long as the vehicle has not yet been jacked up - risk of an accident!

Note

Note ■ If it is determined that the wheel bolts are corroded and difficult to turn when changing the wheel, the bolts must be replaced before checking the tightening torque. ■ Drive cautiously and only at a moderate speed until the tightening torque has been checked.

If it proves difficult to slacken the bolts, carefully apply pressure to the end of the wrench with your foot. Keep hold of the vehicle when doing so, and make sure you keep your footing.



Slackening and tightening wheel bolts Fig. 176 Changing a wheel: Slackening wheel bolts

ä 1)

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 203. ings

Use the appropriate adapter for slackening and tightening the anti-theft wheel bolts » page 206.

Do-it-yourself

205



Raising the vehicle

Securing wheels against theft Fig. 177 Changing a wheel: Jacking points for positioning lifting jack

Fig. 179 Principle sketch: Anti-theft wheel bolt with adapter

The anti-theft wheel bolts on vehicles fitted with them (one anti-theft wheel bolt per wheel) can only be loosened or tighten up by using the adapter provided. › Pull off the full wheel trim from the wheel rim or the cap from the anti-theft wheel bolt. › Insert the adapter B with its toothed side fully into the inner toothing of the safety wheel bolt A until the stop so that only the outer hexagon is jutting out » Fig. 179. › Push the wheel wrench onto the adapter B up to the stop. › Loosen or tighten the wheel bolt » page 205. › After removing the adapter, reinstall the full wheel trim or place the cap onto the anti-theft wheel bolt. › Have the tightening torque checked with a torque wrench as soon as possible.

Fig. 178 Attach lifting jack

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 203. ings

Position the lifting jack by selecting the jacking point that is closest to the faulty wheel » Fig. 177. The jacking point is located directly below the engraving in the lower sill. › Position the lifting jack below the jacking point and move it up until its claw is positioned directly below the vertical web of the lower sill. › Align the lifting jack so that its claw grasps the web » Fig. 178 -  below the embossing in the side surface of the lower sill. › Ensure that the entire surface of the lifting jack base plate rests on level ground and is located in a vertical position to the area » Fig. 178 where the claw grasps the web. › Continue turning up the jack until the wheel is just about lifted off the ground.

206

Do-it-yourself

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 203.

It is advisable to make a note of the code number hammered into the rear side of the adapter or the rear side of the anti-theft wheel bolt. This number can be used to purchase a replacement adapter from a ŠKODA Service Partner, if necessary. We recommend that you always carry the adapter for the wheel bolts with you in the vehicle. It should be stowed in the vehicle tool kit.



WARNING (Continued)

Breakdown kit

A tyre filled with sealant has the same driving characteristics as a standard tyre. ■ Do not drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph). ■ Avoid accelerating at full throttle, sharp braking and fast cornering. ■ Check the tyre inflation pressure after driving for 10 minutes! ■ The sealant is hazardous to heath. Remove immediately if it comes into contact with the skin. ■

Introduction

This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Components of the breakdown kit Preparing to use the breakdown kit Seal and inflate tyres Check after driving for 10 minutes

208 208 208 209

The breakdown kit is located in a box under the floor covering in the luggage compartment. Use the breakdown kit to reliably repair tyre damage caused by foreign bodies or a puncture with diameters up to 4 mm. Do not remove foreign bodies, e.g. screws or nails, from the tyre! The repair can be undertaken on the vehicle immediately. Repairs with the breakdown kit do not in any way replace a permanent repair of the tyre, it only serves to reach the next specialist garage.

For the sake of the environment Used sealant or sealant whose expiry date has passed must be disposed of in accordance with environmental protection regulations.

Note Observe the manufacturer's usage instructions for the breakdown kit. A new bottle of sealant can be purchased from ŠKODA Original Accessories. Immediately replace the wheel that was repaired using the breakdown kit or consult a specialist garage about repair possibilities. ■ ■ ■

The breakdown kit must not be used under the following circ*mstances: › if there is damage to the wheels, › in outside temperatures of less than -20 °C (-4 °F), › with tears or punctures greater than 4 mm in size, › if there is damage to the tyre wall, › when driving with very low tyre pressure or with a completely flat tyre, › if the use-by-date (see inflation bottle) has passed.

Do-it-yourself

207



Components of the breakdown kit

Preparing to use the breakdown kit

The following preparatory work must be carried out before using the breakdown kit. › In the event of a puncture, park the vehicle as far away as possible from the flow of traffic. Park on as flat and firm a surface as possible. › Let all of the occupants get out. While changing a tyre, the occupants of the vehicle should not stand on the road (instead they should remain behind a crash barrier). › Switch off the engine and move the gearshift lever into Neutral or move the selector lever for the automatic gearbox into position P. › Firmly apply the handbrake. › Check whether you can carry out the repairs with the breakdown kit » page 207. › If a trailer is connected, remove it. › Remove the breakdown kit from the luggage compartment. › Stick the sticker 2 » Fig. 180 on the dash panel in view of the driver. › Do not remove the foreign body, e.g. screw or nail, from the tyre. › Unscrew the valve cap. › Use the valve remover 1 to unscrew the valve core and place it on a clean sur face.

Fig. 180 Components of the breakdown kit

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 207.

The breakdown kit contains the following parts: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Valve remover Sticker with speed designation “max. 80 km/h”/“max. 50 mph” Inflation hose with plug Air compressor Tyre inflation hose Tyre inflation pressure indicator Air release valve ON and OFF switch 12 volt cable connector Tyre inflator bottle with sealing agent Replacement valve core

The valve remover 1 has a slot at its lower end which fits into the valve core. This is the only way in which you can remove and re-install the valve core from the tyre valve. The same also applies to the replacement valve core 11 .

208

Do-it-yourself

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 207.

Seal and inflate tyres



First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 207.

Sealing tyres › Forcefully shake the tyre inflator bottle 10 » Fig. 180 several times. › Firmly screw the inflation hose 3 onto the tyre inflator bottle 10 in a clockwise direction. The film on the cap is pierced automatically. › Remove the plug from the inflation hose 3 and plug the open end fully onto the tyre valve. › Hold the bottle 10 with the bottom facing upwards and fill all of the sealing agent from the tyre inflator bottle into the tyre. › Remove the empty tyre inflator bottle from the valve. £ › Screw the valve core back into the tyre valve using the valve remover 1 .

Pumping up the tyres › Screw the tyre inflation hose 5 » Fig. 180 of the air compressor firmly onto the tyre valve. › Check whether the air release valve 7 is closed. › Start the engine and run it in idle. › Plug the connector 9 into 12 Volt socket » page 91. › Switch on the air compressor with the ON and OFF switch 8 . › Allow the air compressor to run until a pressure of 2.0 - 2.5 bar is achieved. Maximum run time of 8 minutes » ! › Switch off the air compressor. › If you cannot reach an air pressure of 2.0 – 2.5 bar, unscrew the tyre inflation hose 5 from the tyre valve. › Drive the vehicle 10 metres forwards or backwards to allow the sealing agent to “distribute” in the tyre. › Firmly screw the tyre inflation hose 5 back onto the tyre valve and repeat the inflation process. › If you cannot reach the required tyre inflation pressure here either, this means the tyre has sustained too much damage. You cannot seal with tyre with the breakdown kit » . › Switch off the air compressor. › Remove the tyre inflation hose 5 from the tyre valve.

Check after driving for 10 minutes

Check the tyre inflation pressure after driving for 10 minutes! If the tyre inflation pressure is 1.3 bar or less: › Do not drive the vehicle! You cannot properly seal with tyre with the breakdown kit. › Get professional assistance. If the tyre inflation pressure is 1.3 bar or more: › Adjust the tyre inflation pressure to the correct value (see inside of fuel filler cap). › Continue driving carefully to the nearest specialist garage at a maximum speed of 80 km/h (50 mph).



Jump-starting

Once a tyre inflation pressure of 2.0 – 2.5 bar is achieved, continue the journey at a maximum speed of 80 km/h (50 mph).

Introduction

This chapter contains information on the following subjects:

Check the tyre inflation pressure after driving for 10 minutes » page 209, Check after driving for 10 minutes.

Jump-starting Jump-starting in vehicles with the “START-STOP” system Jump-starting vehicles with the vehicle battery in the luggage compartment

WARNING

210 211 211

The battery of another vehicle can be used to jump-start your vehicle if the engine will not start because the battery is flat. Jump-start cables are required for this purpose.

During inflation, the tyre inflation hose and air compressor may get hot- risk of injury! ■ Do not place the hot tyre inflation hose or hot air compressor on flammable materials - risk of fire! ■ If you cannot inflate the tyre to at least 2.0 bar, this means the damage sustained was too serious. The sealing agent cannot be used to seal the tyre. Do not drive the vehicle. Get professional assistance! ■

Both batteries must have a rated voltage of 12 V. The capacity (Ah) of the battery supplying the power must not be significantly less than the capacity of the discharged battery in your vehicle. Jump-start cables Only use jump-start cables which have an adequately large cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. Observe the manufacturer's instructions.

CAUTION Switch off the air compressor after running 8 minutes at the latest - danger of overheating! Allow the air compressor to cool a few minutes before switching it on again.

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 207.

Positive cable - colour coding in the majority of cases is red. 

Negative cable - colour coding in the majority of cases is black.

Do-it-yourself

209

WARNING

Jump-starting

A discharged vehicle battery may already freeze at temperatures just below 0 °C. In case of frozen battery carry out no jump-starting - risk of explosion! ■ Pay attention to the warning instructions relating to working in the engine compartment » page 183, Engine compartment. ■ The non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps must never make contact with each other. In addition, the jump-start cable connected to the positive terminal of the battery must not come into contact with electrically conducting parts of the vehicle - risk of short circuit! ■ Do not clamp the jump-start cable to the negative terminal of the discharged battery. There is the risk of detonating gas seeping out the battery being ignited by the strong spark which results from the engine being started. ■ Route the jump-start cables so that they cannot be caught by any rotating parts in the engine compartment. ■ Do not bend over the battery - risk of caustic burns! ■ The vent screws of the battery cells must be tightened firmly. ■ Keep any sources of ignition (naked flame, smouldering cigarettes, etc.) away from the battery - risk of an explosion! ■ Never jump-start vehicle batteries with an electrolyte level that is too low risk of explosion and caustic burns! ■

Fig. 181 Jump-starting using the battery from another vehicle: A - flat vehicle battery, B - battery providing current

The jump-start cables must be attached in the following sequence: Connecting positive terminals › Attach one end 1 » Fig. 181 to the positive terminal of the discharged battery A. › Attach the other end 2 to the positive terminal of the battery supplying the power B .

Note There must not be any contact between the two vehicles otherwise current may flow as soon as the negative terminals are connected. ■ The discharged battery must be properly connected to the system of the vehicle. ■ Switch off the car phone or refer to the operating instructions for the car phone on how to proceed in these circ*mstances. ■ We recommend you buy jump-start cables from a car battery specialist.

Connecting negative terminal and engine block › Attach one end 3 to the negative terminal of the battery supplying the power B. › Attach the other end 4 to a solid metal part which is connected firmly to the engine block, or to the engine block itself.

■

210

Do-it-yourself

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 209.



Starting engine › Start the engine on the vehicle providing the power and allow it to idle. › Now start the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery. › If the engine does not start, terminate the attempt to start the engine after 10 seconds and wait for about 30 seconds before repeating the process. › Disconnect the cables in exactly the reverse order to the one described above.



› Connect the positive terminal of the battery supplying the power with the

Jump-starting in vehicles with the “START-STOP” system

jump-starting point.

› Attach the negative terminal of the battery supplying the power to a solid metal part firmly connected to the engine block or to the engine block itself.

Fig. 182 Jump-starting - START-STOP system

› Start the engine » page 210. › After starting the engine, close the protective cap of the jump-starting point.



Towing the vehicle

This chapter contains information on the following subjects:

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 209.

On vehicles with the “START-STOP” system, the jump-start cable of the charger must never be connected directly to the negative pole of the vehicle battery, but only to the engine earth » Fig. 182.

Jump-starting vehicles with the vehicle battery in the luggage compartment Fig. 183 Detail of the engine compartment: Jump-starting point

Introduction

Front towing eye Rear towing eye Vehicles a towing device 

212 213 213

Vehicles with manual transmission can be towed in with a tow bar or a tow rope or with the front or rear wheels raised. Vehicles with automatic transmission can be towed in with a tow bar or a tow rope or with the front wheels raised. If the vehicle is raised at rear, the automatic gearbox is damaged! A tow bar is the safest way of towing a vehicle and also minimises any shocks. Only use a tow rope if a suitable tow bar is not available. When towing, the following guidelines must be observed: Driver of the tow vehicle › Release the clutch particularly gently when starting off or depress the accelerator particularly gently if the vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox. › On vehicles with a manual transmission, only push down on the accelerator pedal once the rope is taught. The maximum towing speed is 50 km/h.

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 209.

On vehicles with the vehicle battery in the luggage compartment, the positive terminal of the battery supplying the power can only be connected to the jumpstarting point in the engine compartment of the vehicle being started by means of a jump-start cable » Fig. 183! › Open the protective cap of the jump-starting point in the direction of the arrow.

Driver of the towed vehicle › Switch the ignition on so that the steering wheel is not blocked and so that the turn signal lights, horn, windshield wipers and windshield washer system can be switched on. › Take the vehicle out of gear or move the selector lever into position N if the £ vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox.

Do-it-yourself

211

Please note that the brake servo unit and power steering only operate if the engine is running. If the engine is not running, significantly more physical force is required to depress the brake pedal and steer the vehicle.

Front towing eye

If using a tow rope, ensure that it is always kept taught.

CAUTION Do not tow start the engine - danger of damaging the engine! On vehicles with a catalytic converter, unburnt fuel may get into the catalytic converter where it may ignite. This in turn may damage or destroy the catalytic converter. The battery from another vehicle can be used as a jump-start aid » page 209, Jump-starting. ■ If the gearbox of your vehicle no longer contains any oil because of a defect, your vehicle must only be towed in with the driven wheels raised clear of the ground, or on a special vehicle transporter or trailer. ■ The vehicle must be transported on a special vehicle or trailer if it is not possible to tow in the vehicle in the way described or if the towing distance is greater than 50 km. ■ To protect both vehicles when tow-starting or towing, the tow rope should be elastic. Thus one should only use plastic fibre rope or a rope made out of a similarly elastic material. ■ One should be constantly vigilant not to allow impermissibly high towing forces or jerky loadings. There is always a risk of excessive stresses and damage resulting at the points to which you attach the tow rope or tow bar when you attempt to tow a vehicle which is not standing on a paved road. ■ Attach the tow rope or the tow bar to the towing eyes or to the detachable ball head of the towing device » page 212, Front towing eye or » page 213, Rear towing eye, » page 213, Vehicles a towing device. ■

Fig. 184 Front bumper: Removing the cap/installing the towing eye

› Remove the cap from the front bumper » Fig. 184 - . › Screw in the towing eye by turning to the left up to the stop » Fig. 184 -  and

tighten as much as possible. For tightening purposes, we recommend, for example, using the wheel wrench, towing eye from another vehicle or a similar object that can be pushed through the eye. › After unscrewing the towing eye, put the cap on and press into place. The cap must engage firmly.

CAUTION The towing eye must always be screwed in fully and firmly tightened, otherwise the towing eye can tear when towing in or tow-starting!

Note ■ We recommend using a tow rope from ŠKODA Original Accessories available from a ŠKODA Service Partner. ■ Towing another vehicle requires a certain amount of practice. Both drivers should be familiar with the particular points about towing a vehicle. Unskilled drivers should not attempt to tow in another vehicle or to be towed in. ■ When towing, respect the national legal provisions, especially those which relate to the identification of the towing vehicle and the vehicle being towed. ■ The tow rope must not be twisted as it may in certain circ*mstances result in the front towing eye being unscrewed out of your vehicle.

212

Do-it-yourself

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 211. ings



Use the detachable ball head for towing purposes - for the installation of the detachable ball head refer to the operating instructions for the towing device.

Rear towing eye

Towing the vehicle using the towing device is a viable alternative solution to using the towing eye. If the towing device is removed completely, it must be replaced with the standard reinforcement of the rear bumper which is part of the mount for the towing eye. If this procedure is not observed, the vehicle may not meet the national legal provisions.

CAUTION The detachable ball head and the vehicle can be damaged if an unsuitable tow bar is used.

Fig. 185 Rear bumper: Removing the cap/installing the towing eye

Note

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 211. ings

The detachable ball head must always be in the vehicle so that it can be used for towing, if necessary.

› Press onto the bottom part of the cap in the rear bumper » Fig. 185 -  and re-

move it. › Screw in the towing eye by turning to the left up to the stop » Fig. 185 -  and tighten as much as possible. For tightening purposes, we recommend, for example, using the wheel wrench, towing eye from another vehicle or a similar object that can be pushed through the eye. › After unscrewing the towing eye, put the cap on and press into place. The cap must engage firmly. On vehicles with a factory-fitted towing device, there is no mount for the screwin towing eye behind the cap » page 213, Vehicles a towing device.

CAUTION The towing eye must always be screwed in fully and firmly tightened, otherwise the towing eye can tear when towing in or tow-starting!



Vehicles a towing device

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 211. ings

On vehicles with a factory-fitted towing device, there is no mount for the screwin towing eye behind the cap.

Do-it-yourself

213



CAUTION

Fuses and light bulbs Fuses

Introduction

This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Fuses in the dash panel Fuses in the engine compartment

215 216

Individual electrical circuits are protected by fuses.

› Before replacing a fuse, switch off the ignition and the appropriate consumer › Find out which fuse belongs to the component that is not operating » page 215, Fuses in the dash panel or » page 216, Fuses in the engine compartment.

› Take the plastic clip out of its fixture in the cover of the fuse box, place it on the relevant fuse and pull it out.

› A blown fuses is recognisable by the molten metal strip. Replace the faulty fuse with a new one of the same amperage.

Colour coding of fuses Colour

214

Maximum amperage

light brown

dark brown

7.5

red

blue

yellow

white

green

orange

red

Do-it-yourself

Never “repair” fuses and also do not replace them with a fuse of a higher amperage - risk of fire! This may also cause damage at another part of the electrical system. ■ Have the electrical system checked as quickly as possible by a specialist garage if a newly inserted fuse blows again after a short time. ■ When unlocking and locking the cover for the fuse box in the engine compartment, it must be pressed on the sides of the box, otherwise the locking mechanism can be damaged. ■ The cover for the fuse box in the engine compartment must always be applied correctly. Water can penetrate and cause damage to the vehicle if the cover was not applied correctly! ■

Note ■ We recommend always carrying replacement fuses in the vehicle. A box of replacement fuses can be purchased from ŠKODA Original Accessories. ■ Multiple fuses may exist for a single power consuming device. ■ Multiple power consuming devices can share a single fuse. ■ Electrically adjustable seats are protected by automatic circuit breakers, which switch on again automatically after a few seconds after the overload has been eliminated.



Fuses in the dash panel

No.

Power consumer

Adaptive right main headlight

Not assigned

Diagnostic socket, light switch, rain sensor, clock

Central locking system and bonnet lid

Central control unit - interior lights

The air conditioning system

Not assigned

Phone

Instrument cluster, windshield wiper lever and turn signal lever

KESSY

KESSY ELV

Air blower for Climatronic

Front power window, central locking of the front doors

The fuses are located on the left side of the dash panel behind a cover.

Selector lever lock, AG

› Remove the cover for the fuse box using a screwdriver » Fig. 186. › Replace the cover once the fuse has been changed.

Rear window heater, relay for auxiliary heating and ventilation

Power socket in the luggage compartment

Fuel pump relay, control unit for fuel pump, injection valves

Electric boot lid

AG, Haldex

Ventilated front seats

Fig. 186 Fuse box cover/Schematic diagram of the fuse box

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 214. ings

Fuse assignment in the dash panel No. Power consumer 1

Diagnostic socket, engine control unit, fuel pump relay, fuel pump control unit

Control unit for ABS, ESC, switch for the tyre control display, brake sensor

DVD pre-installation

Front power window, central locking system of the rear doors

Switch and airbag control unit

Electric sliding/tilting roof

WIV, tail lights, dimming mirrors, pressure sensor, telephone preinstallation

Alarm, spare horn

Control unit for headlamp beam adjustment and headlight swivel, control unit for parking aid, control unit for park assist

front and rear lighter

Headlight cleaning system Heated front seats

Instrument cluster, control unit for electromechanical power steering, Haldex, selector lever lock, power supply for data bus, AG

37 38

Heated rear seats

Valve heating, air mass meter

Rear window wiper

Control unit for trailer detection

Fan air-conditioning system, relay for auxiliary heating and ventilation

Relay for auxiliary heating and ventilation

Not assigned

Adaptive left main headlight

Light switch

Fuses and light bulbs

215

No.

Power consumer

On some vehicles, the battery cover must be removed before removing the cover for the fuse box » page 191.

Control unit for trailer detection

Switch for seat heating

Telephone preinstallation

Preparation for the aftermarket radio

Not assigned

› The cover for the fuse box is removed by pushing the circlips

A » Fig. 188 upwards as far as the stop. The symbol  is displayed behind the clip. Now remove the cover. › Once the fuse has been removed, place the cover on the fuse box and push the circlips A back as far as the stop. The symbol  is displayed behind the clip. The cover is locked into position. 

Fuses in the engine compartment

Fuse assignment in the engine compartment - version A No. Power consumer F1

Front right main headlight, right tail light

Valves for ABS

F3-4 F5 F6-12

Fig. 187 Schematic diagram of the fuse box - version A/version B

ä 216

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 214. ings

Do-it-yourself

Horn Not assigned

F13

Control unit for automatic gearbox

F14

Not assigned

F15

Coolant pump

F16

Not assigned

F17

Instrument cluster, windshield wiper lever and turn signal lever

F18

Audio amplifier (sound system)

F19

Radio

F20-22 Fig. 188 Cover for the fuse box in the engine compartment

Not assigned

F23

Engine control unit

F24

Data bus control unit

F25-26

Not assigned

F27

Fuel dosage valve

F28

Engine control unit

F29

Main relay

F30

Auxiliary heating and ventilation control unit

F31

Windscreen wipers

F32-37

Not assigned

F38

Radiator fan, valves

F39

Clutch/brake pad sensor

No.

Power consumer

No.

Power consumer

F40

Lambda probe

F16

Front right main headlight, right tail light

F41

AKF valve

F17

Horn

F42

Lambda probe

F18

Audio amplifier (sound system)

F43

Ignition

F19

Windscreen wipers

F20

Valve for fuel dosing Coolant pump

F44-46 Not assigned F47

Front left main headlight, left tail light

F48

Pump for ABS

F21

Lambda probe

F49

Power supply for terminal 15 (ignition on)

F22

Clutch pedal switch

Not assigned

F23

Relay, valves, high pressure pump

F52

Power supply relay - terminal X a)

F24

Radiator fan

F53

Accessories

F25

Pump for ABS

F54

Not assigned

F26

Left main headlight

F27

Control unit for glow plug system

F28

Windscreen heater

F29

Accessories

F30

Power supply relay - terminal X a)

F50-51

In order not to drain the battery unnecessarily when starting the engine, the electrical components of this terminal are automatically switched off.

Fuse assignment in the engine compartment - version B No. Power consumer F1

Not assigned

Control unit for automatic gearbox DSG

Measuring circuit

Valves for ABS

Control unit for automatic gearbox DSG

Not assigned

Power supply for terminal 15 (ignition on)

Radio

Not assigned

F10

Engine control unit, Main relay

F11

Auxiliary heating and ventilation control unit

F12

Data bus control unit

F13

Engine control unit

F14

Ignition

F15

Lambda probe (petrol engine), glow plug system relay and fuel pump (diesel engine)

In order not to drain the battery unnecessarily when starting the engine, the electrical components of this terminal are automatically switched off.



Bulbs

Introduction

This chapter contains information on the following subjects: Headlights Fog lights and daylight driving lights Tail light assembly Tail light (Combi) Licence plate light Licence plate light (Combi)

218 219 220 221 221 222

Some manual skills are required to change a bulb. For this reason, if uncertain, we recommend that bulbs are replaced by a specialist garage or other expert help is £ sought.

Fuses and light bulbs

217

› Switch off the ignition and all of the lights before replacing a bulb. › Faulty bulbs must only be replaced with the same type of bulbs. The designa-

Headlights

tion is located on the light socket or the glass bulb. › A stowage compartment for replacement bulbs is located in a plastic box in the spare wheel or underneath the floor covering in the luggage compartment.

WARNING Accidents can be caused if the road in front of the vehicle is not sufficiently illuminated and the vehicle cannot or can only be seen with difficulty by other road users. ■ Always read and observe the warnings before completing any work in the engine compartment » page 183, Engine compartment. ■ Bulbs H7 and H3 are pressurised and may burst when changing the bulb risk of injury! We therefore recommended wearing gloves and safety glasses when changing a bulb. ■ Gas discharge bulbs (xenon bulbs) operate with a high voltage, professional knowledge is required - danger to life! ■

Fig. 189 Headlights: Location of the bulbs/Removing bulbs for the parking light and main beam Fig. 190 Removing the bulb for the low beam

CAUTION Do not take hold of the glass bulb with naked fingers (even the smallest amount of dirt reduces the working life of the light bulb). Use a clean cloth, serviette or something similar. ■ When removing and installing the tail light make sure that the paintwork of the vehicle and the tail light are not damaged.

■

Note This Owner's Manual only describes the replacement of bulbs where it is possible to replace the bulbs on your own without any complications arising. Other light bulbs should be changed by your specialist garage. ■ We recommend that a box of replacement bulbs is always carried in the vehicle. Replacement bulbs can be purchased from ŠKODA Original Accessories. ■ We recommend that the headlight settings are checked by a Škoda Service Partner after replacing a bulb in the main or low beam. ■ Gas discharge bulbs and LED diodes are replaced by a specialist garage. ■

218

Do-it-yourself

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 217.

Overview of the location of the bulbs » Fig. 189. 1 - parking light and main beam 2 - low beam light 3 - front turn signal light 

Change the light bulb for the parking light › Open the bonnet. › Remove the rubber cover 1 » Fig. 189. › Remove the holder A » Fig. 189. › Remove the faulty bulb from the holder and insert a new one.

› Replace the lamp, insert the connector with the new bulb and turn in a clock-

Changing the bulb for the main beam › Open the bonnet. › Remove the rubber cover 1 . › Push the circlips B together and unhook to the side. › Remove the holder C . › Remove the faulty bulb from the holder and insert a new one.

wise direction to the the stop.

› To re-install the fog light, first of all place the fog light with the lug on the side opposite the license plate.

› Press in the fog lamp on the side closest to the license plate. The lug must engage firmly.

› To reinstall the cover, first of all insert part of the cover starting on the side fac-

Installation is carried out in the reverse order. Changing the bulb for the low beam › Open the bonnet. › Remove the rubber cover 2 . › Turn the connector with the bulb in an anti-clockwise direction up to the stop and remove » Fig. 190. › Replace the lamp, insert the connector with the new bulb and turn in a clockwise direction to the the stop. › Insert the rubber cover.

ing the fog light. Then press the cover on the side closest to the license plate. The cover must engage firmly.



Fog lights and daylight driving lights

Fig. 191 Front bumper: Cover/fog lights with daylight driving lights

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 217.

Replacing bulbs › Grasp the cover in the areas marked by the arrows » Fig. 191 -  and remove it. › Insert your hand into the opening left by the cover and press the lug 3 » Fig. 191 - . › Remove the front fog lamp. › Turn the connector 1 (daylight driving light) or 2 (fog light) with the bulb in an anti-clockwise direction up to the stop and remove.

Fuses and light bulbs

219



Tail light assembly

Removing and installing the outer part of the tail light

› Open the boot lid. › Remove the plug » Fig. 192 -  and unscrew the tail light with a torx wrench » page 203, Vehicle tool kit.

› Carefully remove the light. Do not pull the grommet with the cables out of the bodywork.

› To re-install the tail light, first of all guide it with the support

A °» Fig. 193 towards the front onto a bolt on the bodywork. › Carefully press the tail light onto the bodywork. › Screw the tail light into place and push in the plugs » Fig. 192 - .

Fig. 192 Outer part of the tail light/Removing the internal part of the tail light

Changing bulbs in the outer part of the tail light › To replace the bulb, turn the bulb holder anti-clockwise up to the stop and remove it from the housing. › Replace the lamp, insert the holder with the bulb into the housing and turn in a clockwise direction to the the stop. Removing and installing the inner part of the tail light › Open the boot lid. › Remove the tail light cover on the inner side of the boot lid » Fig. 192 - . › Press the lug » Fig. 192 -  and remove the lamp holder from the tail light housing. › To re-install, insert the lamp holder into the tail light housing. › Press the lug until it clicks into place. › Insert the tail light cover on the inner side of the boot lid.

Fig. 193 Outer part of the tail light: Bulbs/Inner part of the tail light: Bulbs

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 217.

Overview of the location of the bulbs » Fig. 193. 1 - Turn signal lights 2 - Parking lights/Brake light 3 - parking lights 4 - Reversing light 5 - Rear fog light

220

Do-it-yourself

Changing bulbs in the inner part of the tail light › Remove the faulty bulb 4 » Fig. 193 from the holder and insert a new bulb. › Turn the bulb 5 in an anti-clockwise direction up to the stop and remove. Insert a new bulb into the holder and turn in a clockwise direction to the the stop.



Tail light (Combi)

› Insert the holder with the new bulb into the housing and turn in a clockwise direction to the the stop.

Changing bulbs 2 and 4 › Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwise up to the stop and remove it from the housing. › Push in the bulb, turn in an anti-clockwise direction up to the stop and remove. › Insert a new bulb into the holder, push in and turn in a clockwise direction to the the stop. › Insert the holder with the new bulb into the housing and turn in a clockwise  direction to the the stop.

Fig. 194 Installing a tail light (Combi)

Licence plate light Fig. 195 Rear bumper: Licence plate light

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnon page 217. ings

Overview of the location of the bulbs » Fig. 194. 1 - Parking light/rear fog light 2 - Reversing light 3 - Turn signal lights 4 - Parking lights/Brake light 5 - parking lights

Removing and installing the tail light › Open the boot lid. › Remove the plug » Fig. 194 and unscrew the tail light with a torx wrench » page 203, Vehicle tool kit. › Carefully remove the light. Do not pull the grommet with the cables out of the bodywork. › To re-install the tail light, first of all guide it with the openings A °» Fig. 194 on to the bolts on the bodywork. › Carefully press the tail light onto the bodywork until it clicks into place. › Screw the tail light into place and push in the plugs.

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 217.

› Unscrew the glass cover of the light » Fig. 195. › Remove the faulty bulb from the holder and insert a new one. › Re-insert the glass cover of the light and press it down to the stop - ensure that the glass cover is installed correctly.

› Screw the glass cover of the light into place.



Changing bulbs 1 , 3 and 5

› Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwise up to the stop and remove it from the housing.

› Remove the faulty bulb from the holder and insert a new bulb. Fuses and light bulbs

221

Licence plate light (Combi) Fig. 196 Luggage compartment door Licence plate light

First read and observe the introductory information and safety warnings on page 217.

› Insert a flat screwdriver into the opening in the area of the arrow » Fig. 196 and carefully press towards the centre of the lamp, by doing so the lamp jumps out slightly. › Remove the lamp. › Remove the faulty bulb from the holder and insert a new one. › Re-insert the glass cover of the light and press it down to the stop - ensure that the glass cover is installed correctly.

222

Do-it-yourself



› Roof load including roof luggage rack system, › Trailer drawbar load when towing a trailer (max. 80 kg).

Technical data

The following specifications are listed on the type plate » Fig. 197:

Technical data

1 2 3

Introductory information

The type plate is located on the lower part of the column between the front and rear doors on the driver's side.

The details given in the official vehicle registration documents always take precedence over the details in the Owner's Manual. Please refer to the official vehicle registration documents or consult a ŠKODA Service Partner to determine which engine your vehicle is equipped with. The listed performance values were determined without performance-reducing equipment, e.g. air conditioning system.

Maximum permissible gross weight Maximum permissible towed weight (towing vehicle and trailer) Permissible front axle load Permitted rear axle load

WARNING The maximum permissible overall weight must not be exceeded - risk of accident and damage to the vehicle!



Weights



Vehicle identification data Fig. 197 Type plate

The indicated unloaded weight is for orientation purposes only. This roughly corresponds to the basic equipment variant of the vehicle not including special features or accessories. The kerb weight contains a fuel tank topped up to 90 % and a driver weight of 75 kg. It is possible to calculate the approximate loading capacity from the difference between the permissible total weight and the unloaded weight. The payload consists of the following components: › Passengers. › all items of luggage and other loads,

Fig. 198 Vehicle data sticker

Vehicle data sticker The vehicle data sticker » Fig. 198 is located on the floor of the luggage compartment and is also stated in the Service schedule. The vehicle data sticker contains the following data: 1 2 3 4 5

Vehicle identification number (VIN). Vehicle type. Gearbox code/paint number/interior equipment/engine output/engine code. Partial vehicle description. £ 7GG, 7MB, 7MG - vehicles with DPF » page 24.

Technical data

223

Vehicle identification number (VIN) The vehicle identification number - VIN (vehicle body number) is stamped into the engine compartment on the right hand suspension strut dome. This number is also located on a sign on the lower left hand edge below the windshield (together with a VIN bar code). Engine number The engine number is stamped into the engine block. Sticker on inside of fuel filler flap The stickers are affixed to the inside of the fuel filler flap. They contain the following data: › Specified fuel type, › Tyre sizes, › Tyre pressure.



Fuel consumption according to the ECE standards and EU guidelines Depending on the range of the special equipment, style of driving, traffic situation, weather influences and vehicle condition, the consumption values which in practice result when using the vehicle can deviate from the indicated values. Intra-urban The measurement of the intra-urban cycle begins with a cold start of the engine. Afterwards urban driving is simulated. Ex-urban In the extra-urban driving cycle, the vehicle is accelerated and decelerated in all gears, corresponding to daily routine driving conditions. The driving speed varies between 0 and 120 km/h. Combined The calculation of the combined fuel consumption considers a weighting of about 37 % for the intra-urban cycle and 63 % for the extra-urban cycle.

224

Technical data



Dimensions Dimensions (mm) Superb

Superb GreenLine

Estate car

Combi GreenLine

Length

4838/4849a)

Width

1817

Width including exterior mirror

2009

1462/1482b) /1447c)

1464/1449c)

1510/1529b) /1497c) /1495d)

1511/1496c)

139/158b) /123c)

140/125c)

141/159b) /127c) /126d)

141/126c)

2761

1545/1521

1545/1517 1537/1510e)

1545/1521

Height Clearance Wheel base Track gauge front/rear a) b) c) d) e)

1545/1518 1537/1510e)

The value corresponds to the status with the visual appearance package. The value corresponds to the status with the rough road package. The value corresponds to the status with the sport chassis. The value corresponds to the status with the sport chassis - valid for vehicles with 3.6 l/191 kW FSI engine. Valid for vehicles with 3.6 l/191 kW FSI engine.



Technical data

225

Specifications and engine oil capacity

Specification

Filling level

2.0 l/147 kW TSI - EU5

VW 502 00

4.6

3.6 ltr./191 kW FSI - EU5/EU2/(BS4)

VW 502 00

5.5

Petrol engines

The engine has been factory-filled with a high-grade oil that can be use throughout the year - except in extreme climate zones. Various oils can be mixed together when refilling. However, this does not apply to vehicles with flexible service intervals.

If the oils specified above are not available, oils according to ACEA A2 or ACEA A3 can be used once for refilling.

Engine oils are, of course, undergoing continuous further development. Thus the information stated in this Owner's Manual is only correct at the time of publication.

Diesel engines

ŠKODA Service Partners are informed about the latest changes by ŠKODA. We therefore recommend that the oil change is completed by a ŠKODA Service Partner. The specifications (VW standards) stated in the following must be indicated separately or together with other specifications on the bottle. The oil capacities include oil filter change. Check the oil level when filling; do not over fill. The oil level must be between the markings » page 185. Specifications and capacity (in l) for vehicles with flexible service intervals Petrol engines Specification Filling level 1.4 ltr./92 kW TSI - EU5

VW 504 00

3.6

1.8 l/118 kW TSI - EU5 1.8 l/112 kW TSI - EU5/EU4/EU2/(BS4)

VW 504 00

4.6

2.0 l/147 kW TSI - EU5

VW 504 00

4.6

3.6 ltr./191 kW FSI - EU5/EU2/(BS4)

VW 504 00

5.5

Specification

Filling level

1.6 ltr./77 kW TDI CR - EU5

VW 507 00

4.3

2.0 ltr./103 kW TDI CR DPF - EU5

VW 507 00

4.3

2.0 ltr./103 kW TDI CR - EU5/EU4/BS4

VW 507 00

4.0

2.0 ltr./125 kW TDI CR DPF - EU5

VW 507 00

4.3

Diesel engines

Specifications and capacity (in l) for vehicles with fixed service intervals Filling levPetrol engines Specification el 1.4 ltr./92 kW TSI - EU5

VW 502 00

3.6

1.8 l/118 kW TSI - EU5 1.8 l/112 kW TSI - EU5/EU4/EU2/(BS4)

VW 502 00

4.6

226

Technical data

Specification

Filling level

1.6 ltr./77 kW TDI CR - EU5

VW 507 00

4.3

2.0 ltr./103 kW TDI CR DPF - EU5

VW 507 00

4.3

2.0 ltr./103 kW TDI CR - EU5/EU4/BS4

VW 507 00

4.0

2.0 ltr./125 kW TDI CR DPF - EU5

VW 507 00

4.3

If the oils specified above are not available, oils according to ACEA B3 or ACEA B4 can be used once for refilling.

CAUTION Only the above-mentioned oils can be used on vehicles with flexible service intervals. We recommend always refilling with oil of the same specification since this will maintain the properties of the oil. In exceptional cases, a maximum of 0.5 l of specification VW 502 00 (only for petrol engines) or specification VW 505 01 (only for diesel engines) engine oil can be used to refill once. Other engine oils must not be used - risk of engine damage!

Note Before a long drive we recommend that you purchase and carry with you engine oil which complies with the specification for your vehicle. ■ We recommend that you use oils from ŠKODA Original Accessories.  ■ For further information - see Service schedule. ■

1.4 l/92 kW TSI engine - EU5 Output (kW per rpm)

Max. torque (Nm at rpm)

Number of cylinders/Displacement (cm3)

92/5000

200/1500-4000

4/1390

Performances

Superb MG6

Combi MG6

Top speed (km/h)

201/204a)

199/202a)

Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (s)

10,5/10,6

10,6/10,7a)

Fuel consumption (in l/100 km) and CO2 (in g/km) Intra-urban

9,0/7,8a)

Ex-urban

5,4/4,9

5,6/5,1a)

Combined

6,8/5,9a)

6,9/6,1a)

CO2 emissions combined

157/139a)

159/141a)

2040/2040b) /2045a)

2062/2062b) /2067a)

Weight (in kg) Maximum permissible gross weight Curb weight

1477/1477b) /1482a)

Permissible trailer loads, braked Permissible trailer loads, unbraked a) b) c) d)

1499/1499b) /1504a) 1400 /1500 c)

730/740a)

740/750a)

The value corresponds to the status with the Green tec-package. Class N1 vehicles. Uphills up to 12 % Uphills up to 8 %



Technical data

227

1.8 l/112 kW TSI engine - EU5/EU4/EU2/(BS4) Output (kW per rpm)

Max. torque (Nm at rpm)

Number of cylinders/Displacement (cm3)

112/4300 - 6200

250/1500 - 4200

4/1798

Performances

Superb MG6

Superb AG6

Superb MG6 4x4

Combi MG6

Combi AG6

Combi MG6 4x4

Top speed (km/h)

216

212

213

214

210

211

Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (s)

8.9

9.4

9.0

9.5

9.1

Intra-urban

9.4

11.2

10.6

9.5

11.4

10.7

Ex-urban

5.9

6.4

6.6

6.0

6.4

6.7

Combined

7.2

8.1

7.3

8.2

CO2 emissions combined

169

189

171

191

Maximum permissible gross weight

2074

2092

2165

2096

2114

2187

Curb weight

1511

1529

1602

1533

1551

1624

Fuel consumption (in l/100 km) and CO2 (in g/km)

Weight (in kg)

Permissible trailer loads, braked Permissible trailer loads, unbraked a) b)

Uphills up to 12 % Uphills up to 8 %

228

Technical data

1500a) /1700b)

1600a) /1800b)

1500a) /1700b)

1600a) /1800b)

750 

1.8 l/118 kW TSI engine - EU5 Output (kW per rpm)

Max. torque (Nm at rpm)

Number of cylinders/Displacement (cm3)

118/4500 - 6200

250/1500 - 4500

4/1798

Performances

Superb MG6

Superb DSG7

Superb MG6 4x4

Combi MG6

Combi DSG7

Top speed (km/h)

220

217

218

Combi MG6 4x4 215

Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (s)

8.6

8.5

8.7

8.6

8.8

Intra-urban

9.4

10.6

9.5

10.7

Ex-urban

5.9

5.7

6.6

6.0

5.9

6.7

Combined

7.2

7.1

8.1

7.3

8.2

CO2 emissions combined

169

168

189

171

170

191

Maximum permissible gross weight

2074

2086

2165

2096

2108

2187

Curb weight

1511

1523

1602

1533

1545

1624

Fuel consumption (in l/100 km) and CO2 (in g/km)

Weight (in kg)

Permissible trailer loads, braked Permissible trailer loads, unbraked a) b)

1500a) /1700b)

1600a) /1800b)

1500a) /1700b)

1600a) /1800b)

750

Uphills up to 12 % Uphills up to 8 %



Technical data

229

2.0 l/147 kW TSI engine - EU5 Output (kW per rpm)

Max. torque (Nm at rpm)

Number of cylinders/Displacement (cm3)

147/5100 - 6000

280/1700 - 5000

4/1984

Performances

Superb DSG6

Combi DSG6

Top speed (km/h)

236

234

Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (s)

7.8

7.9

Intra-urban

10.6

10.7

Ex-urban

6.3

6.4

Combined

7.9

8.0

CO2 emissions combined

178

180

Maximum permissible gross weight

2118

2140

Curb weight

1555

Fuel consumption (in l/100 km) and CO2 (in g/km)

Weight (in kg)

Permissible trailer loads, braked Permissible trailer loads, unbraked a) b)

Uphills up to 12 % Uphills up to 8 %

230

Technical data

1577 1600a) /1800b) 750 

3.6 l/191 kW FSI engine - EU5/EU2/(BS4) Output (kW per rpm)

Max. torque (Nm at rpm)

Number of cylinders/Displacement (cm3)

191/6000

350/2500 - 5000

6/3597

Performances

Superb DSG6 4x4

Combi DSG6 4x4

Top speed (km/h)

250

247

Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (s)

6.5

6.6

14.7/16.4a)

14.4

Fuel consumption (in l/100 km) and CO2 (in g/km) Intra-urban Ex-urban

7.4/8.2a)

7.8

Combined

10.1/11.2a)

10.2

CO2 emissions combined

235/261a)

237

Maximum permissible gross weight

2275

2297/2291b)

Curb weight

1714

Weight (in kg)

Permissible trailer loads, braked Permissible trailer loads, unbraked a) b)

1736 2000 750

BS4 model. Class N1 vehicles.



Technical data

231

1.6 l/77 kW TDI CR engine - EU5 Output (kW per rpm)

Max. torque (Nm at rpm)

Number of cylinders/Displacement (cm3)

77/4400

250/1500 - 2500

4/1598

Performances

Superb MG5

Superb MG5 GreenLine

Combi MG5

Top speed (km/h)

189

192

187

Combi MG5 GreenLine 190

Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (s)

12.5

12.6

Fuel consumption (in l/100 km) and CO2 (in g/km) Intra-urban

6.2/6.0a)

5.4

6.3/6.1a)

5.4

Ex-urban

4.4/4.1

3.8

4.6/4.2a)

3.8

Combined

5.0/4.8a)

4.4

5.2/4.9a)

4.4

CO2 emissions combined

130/124a)

114

133/126a)

114

2080

2087

2102

2109

1517

1524

1539

1546

Weight (in kg) Maximum permissible gross weight Curb weight Permissible trailer loads, braked Permissible trailer loads, unbraked a) b) c)

The value corresponds to the status with the Green tec-package. Uphills up to 12 % Uphills up to 8 %

232

Technical data

1500b)/1700c) 750



2.0 l/103 kW TDI CR DPF engine - EU5, (EU4/BS4) Output (kW per rpm)

Max. torque (Nm at rpm)

Number of cylinders/Displacement (cm3)

103/4200

320/1750-2500

4/1968

Performances Top speed (km/h) Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (s)

Superb MG6

Superb DSG6

Superb DSG6 4x4

Combi MG6

208/211

206

204

205/209

203

201

10.1

10.2

10.7

10.2

10.3

10.8 7.8

Combi DSG6

Combi DSG6 4x4

Fuel consumption (in l/100 km) and CO2 (in g/km) Intra-urban

6.9/6.1a)

7.5

7.8

6.9/6.1a)

7.7/7.5b)

Ex-urban

4.6/4.2

5.0

5.2

4.7/4.2

5.1/5.0b)

5.5

Combined

5.4/4.9a)

5.9

6.2

5.5/4.9a)

6.0/5.9b)

6.3

CO2 emissions combined

143/128a)

154

162

145/128a)

158/154b)

166 2230

Weight (in kg) Maximum permissible gross weight

2110/2114a)

2132

2208

2132/2136a)

2154

Curb weight

1547/1551a)

1569

1645

1569/1573a)

1591

Permissible trailer loads, braked Permissible trailer loads, unbraked a) b)

1800

2000

1800

1667 2000

750

The value corresponds to the status with the Green tec-package. Applies to France.



Technical data

233

2.0 l/125 kW TDI CR DPF engine - EU5 Output (kW per rpm)

Max. torque (Nm at rpm)

Number of cylinders/Displacement (cm3)

125/4200

350/1750-2500

4/1968

Superb MG6

Superb DSG6

Superb MG6 4x4

Combi MG6

Combi DSG6

Combi MG6 4x4

Top speed (km/h)

222

220

219

220

218

217

Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (s)

8.8

9.0

8.9

9.1

Intra-urban

7.5

7.6

8.0

7.5

8.0

Ex-urban

4.7

5.1

5.2

4.8

5.2

5.3

Combined

5.7

6.0

6.2

5.8

6.1

6.3

CO2 emissions combined

149

157

163

151

159

165

Maximum permissible gross weight

2118

2135

2195

2140

2157

2217

Curb weight

1555

1572

1632

1577

1594

1654

Performances

Fuel consumption (in l/100 km) and CO2 (in g/km)

Weight (in kg)

Permissible trailer loads, braked

1800

2000

1800

2000

Permissible trailer loads, unbraked

750

234

Technical data



Multi-purpose vehicles (AF) Weight (in kg) Engine 1.4 ltr./92 kW TSI 1.8 ltr./118 kW TSI

Maximum permissible gross weight MG6

MG6

2042

2047a)

MG6

DSG7

2076

2088 2120 4x4 DSG6

3.6 ltr./191 kW FSI

2.0 ltr./103 kW TDI CR 2.0 ltr./125 kW TDI CR a) b)

2167 DSG6

2.0 l/147 kW FSI

1.6 ltr./77 kW TDI CR

4x4 MG6

2277 MG5

MG5

2082

2089b)

MG6

DSG6

MG6

2112

2134

2116a)

MG6

DSG6

4x4 MG6

2120

2137

2197

The value corresponds to the status with the Green tec-package. GreenLine

4x4 DSG6 2210



Technical data

235

Index A ABS Function Warning light Accessories Active driver-steering recommendation (DSR) Adjusting Exterior mirror Adjusting seats Adjustment Seat Aerial refer to Radio reception Airbag Deployment Front airbag Head airbag Knee airbag Side airbag Airbag system Air conditioning system Air outlet vents Climatronic Manual air conditioning system Alarm Anti-theft alarm system Antilock brake system Armrest Front rear Ashtray ASR Function Indicator light

236

Index

117 29 201 116 70 147 73 175 177 154 154 155 159 156 157 154 99 100 103 100 37 37 117 94 79, 95 90 117 28

Assist systems ABS 29, 117 ASR 28, 117 Cruise control systems (CCS) 122 EDL 117 ESC 28, 116 Park assist 119 Parking aid 118 START-STOP 124 Auto-Computer see Multifunctional indicator 14 Auto Check Control 21 Automatic driving lamp control 55 Automatic gearbox 126 Dynamic shift programme 129 Emergency programme 130 126 Information for driving Kickdown 129 Manual shifting of gears on the multifunction 128 steering wheel Parking 127 Selector lever-emergency unlocking 130 Selector lever lock 129 Selector lever positions 127 Starting off 127 Stopping 127 Tiptronic 128 Automatic load deactivation 193 Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation) 105 Avoiding damage to your vehicle 170

B Before setting off Belt tensioners Bonnet Closing Opening Warning light

146 153 184 184 29

Boot lid automatic locking Combi Twindoor Warning light Brake Warning light Brake assist Brake booster Brake fluid Checking Brake pads Indicator light Brakes Brake assist systems Handbrake Running in Braking Brake fluid Breakdown kit Bulbs - Replacing Button in the driver's door Electric power windows

41 41 42 42 30 30 116 115 188 30 114 115 166 188 207 217 46

C Car jack Housing Carrier Car state Catalytic converter CD changer Central locking button Central locking system Changes Changing Engine oil Wheel Charging a vehicle battery

203 88 21 166 144 35 33 201 186 203 192

Checking Battery electrolyte level Brake fluid Coolant level Engine oil Oil level Windshield washer fluid Children and safety Child safety Side airbag Child safety lock Child safety seat on the front passenger seat Child seat Classification ISOFIX TOP TETHER Use of child safety seats Chrome parts refer to Taking care of your vehicle Cigarette lighter Cleaning Artificial leather Headlight lenses Material coverings Materials Natural leather Plastic parts Wheels Clock Clothes hooks co*ckpit 12-volt power socket Ashtray Cigarette lighter General view Light Storage compartments Compartments Computer see Multi-functional indicator

191 188 187 185 185 189 162 163 33 163 164 164 165 164 176 91 174 179 177 179 179 179 176 178 13 98 91 90 91 9 60 92 92 14

Coolant Checking the coolant level Replenishing Coolant temperature gauge display Correct seated position Counter for distance driven Cruise control system (CCS) Cup holder front rear

187 187 11 147 12 122 89 90

D Dash panel insert Daylight driving light De-icing the windshield and rear window Deactivating an airbag Deactivating an airbag Delayed locking of the boot lid see boot lid Diesel refer to Fuel Diesel fuel Operation in winter Diesel particle filter Digital clock Dipstick Display Service interval Distance driven Door Child safety lock Indicator light for an open door Doors Emergency locking Driving Abroad Driving through water on the street

10 55 64 160 160 41 183 183 24 13 185 12 12 33 30 40 170 171

economically environmentally aware DVD-preinstallation

167 168 145

E Economical and environmentally friendly driving EDL Electrical power windows Button in the driver's door Electric boot lid (Combi) Operation Operational faults Setting the top position of the lid Electric power windows Button on the front passenger door Button on the rear doors Central locking system Electric sliding/tilting roof Electronic differential lock (EDL) Electronic immobiliser Emergency Automatic gearbox Changing a wheel Hazard warning light system Jump-starting locking of the doors Locking of the driver's door Panoramic sliding roof (Combi) Selector lever-unlocking Sliding roof Towing the vehicle Tyre repair Unlocking of the boot lid Unlocking of the driver's door Engine Running in Starting and stopping the engine Engine compartment Brake fluid Coolant

Index

167 117 46 44 44 44 48 48 48 49 117 110 130 203 59 209 40 40 52 130 50 211 207 43 40 166 109 188 186

237

Overview Vehicle battery Engine oil Changing Checking Replenishing Engine revolutions counter Environment Environmental compatibility Environmentally friendly driving ESC Function Indicator light Explanations

185 189 186 185 186 11 167 169 167 116 28 6

F Fire extinguisher First-aid-box Footmats Front airbag Front seats Fuel Diesel Fuel gauge gauge refer to Fuel Refuelling Unleaded petrol Fuel consumption Fuses Assignment Replacing

202 202 118 155 72 181 183 12 12 181 181 182 167 214 214

27 134, 137

H Handbrake Head airbag Headlight cleaning system Headlight cleaning system Headlights Converting Driving abroad Headlight cleaning system Head restraint Heating Exterior mirror Seats Windshield and rear window Horn

115 159 68 170 170 68 76 70 75 64 9

I Ignition Ignition lock Immobiliser Information display see MAXI DOT Instrument cluster Instrument lighting Interior monitor Internet connection ISOFIX

111 111 110 18 10 59 37 140 164

G gear Recommended gear General view co*ckpit

238

Glow plug system - indicator light GSM

Index

14 9

Jacking points Raise vehicle Jump-starting

206 209

K KESSY see Kessy system Starting KESSY system Starting Unlocking the vehicle Knee airbag

38 112 112 38 156

L Lever Main beam Turn signal Windshield wipers Light Adaptive headlights (AHL) Automatic driving lamp control co*ckpit COMING HOME/LEAVING HOME function Daylight driving light Fog lights Fog lights with the function CORNER Hazard warning light system headlamp beam adjustment Headlight flasher Low beam Main beam Parking light Rear fog lights Replacing bulbs Tourist light Turn signal Lights switching on and off Loads Locking Emergency locking Remote control Locking and unlocking from inside

60 60 66 57 55 60 56 55 58 58 59 59 60 55 60 55, 56 58 217 57 60 55 223 40 36 35

Luggage compartment Class N1 vehicles Combi emergency unlocking Cover Emergency unlocking Extendable variable loading floor Fastening elements Fixing nets Fixing of the floor covering foldable luggage compartment cover (Combi) Folding hooks Light Removable lamp (Combi) see boot lid Unlocking of the boot lid (Combi) Variable loading floor

80 43 82 43 84 80 81 81 83 81 62 63 41 43 83

M MAXI DOT Main menu Settings Mirror Automatic dimming interior mirror Exterior mirror Manual dimming interior mirror Vanity Mobile phone Connecting to the hands-free system Multi-functional display Operation Multi-functional indicator Functions Memory Multimedia AUX-IN MDI

18 19 20 69 70 69 64 132, 134, 137 135, 138 16 14 15 143 144 144

N Net partition

O Oil refer to Engine oil Onboard computer see Multifunctional indicator Operation in winter De-icing windows Diesel fuel Vehicle battery Outside temperature Overview Engine compartment Warning lights

R 185 14 177 183 192 16 185 22

P Paint see Paint damage Paint damage Panoramic sliding roof (Combi) Closing Opening Sun screen Parking Park assist Parking aid Parking ticket holder Passive Safety Pedals Periodic wiping Petrol refer to Fuel Polishing the paintwork refer to Taking care of your vehicle Power steering Power windows Operational faults Preservation refer to Taking care of your vehicle

176 176 51 51 51 119 118 98 146 118 66 182 176 110 49

Radiator fan Radio reception Aerial Functional fault Raise vehicle Rear mirror Automatic dimming interior mirror Exterior mirror Manual dimming interior mirror Rear window - heating Recirculated air mode Climatronic Manual air conditioning system Recommended gear Refuelling Fuel Regulation Headlamp beam Remote control Synchronisation process Remote control key Replacing the battery Removable lamp (Combi) Replacement of parts Replacing Bulbs Fuses Vehicle battery Windscreen wiper blade Replenishing Coolant Engine oil Windshield washer fluid Roof luggage rack Attachment points Roof rack system Roof load

188 177 177 206 69 70 69 64 104 102 14 181 181 59 35 37 32 63 201 217 214 193 68 187 186 189 89 89

176

Index

239

Running in Brake pads Engine Tyres Running in the car the first 1 500 kilometres

166 166 166 166

S Safe securing system Safety Child safety Child safety seats Head restraints ISOFIX TOP TETHER Save electrical energy Seat Adjusting Seat belt Indicator light Seat belt height adjuster Seat belts Belt tensioners Cleaning fastening and unfastening Height adjustment Seats folding forward Head restraints Heating Ventilated front seats Selector lever see selector lever positions Selector lever positions Service display Setting Automatic dimming interior mirror Manual air conditioning system Manual dimming interior mirror Steering wheel

240

Index

34 146 162 162 76 164 165 167 73 29 153 153 180 152 153 78 76 75 76 127 127 12 69 102 69 110

Setting the clock Clock Shifting Diving economically Gearshift lever Side airbag Sliding roof See electric sliding/tilting roof Snow chains Spare wheel Speedometer Stabilisation Control (ESC) START-STOP Function Starting engine Jump-starting Starting the engine START STOP Jump-starting Steering force assistance Steering wheel Stopping off the engine Storage Storage compartments Sun visors Switching lights on and off

13 167 118 157 49 200 197 11 116 124 209 109 211 110 110 109 92 92 64 55

T Taking care of the vehicle Artificial leather Material coverings Materials Natural leather Seat belts Taking care of your vehicle Automatic car wash system Chrome parts Cleaning the wheels Door lock cylinders

179 179 179 179 180 174 175 176 178 177

Headlight lenses High-pressure cleaner Plastic parts Polishing the paintwork Preservation Rubber seals Washing Washing by hand Wash system Telephone Through-loading bag Through-loading channel Tilting roof See electric sliding/tilting roof Tiptronic see automatic gearbox Tool TOP TETHER Towing Towing a trailer Towing eye Towing protection monitoring Traction control system (ASR) Trailer Towing a trailer Transport Luggage compartment Roof luggage rack Transporting children safely Twindoor see boot lid Two-way radio systems Tyre repair Tyres see Wheels and tyres

177 175 176 176 176 177 175 175 175 134, 137 96 96 49 126 128 203 165 211 172 212 37 117 172 172 79 88 162 41 132 207 196

U Underbody protection

178

Unlocking Remote control Uphill start assist

36 116

V Vehicle battery Automatic load deactivation Charging Checking the electrolyte level Operation in winter Replacing Safety instructions Vehicle key Vehicle tool kit Visors

193 192 191 192 193 189 32 203 64

W Warning lights Warning lights Warning symbols Warning triangle Washing Automatic car wash system by hand Chrome parts High-pressure cleaner Weights Wheel bolts Anti-theft wheel bolt Caps slackening and tightening Wheels Wheels and tyres Changing a wheel Full wheel trim Handling wheels and tyres new tyres Service life of tyres Snow chains

22 22 22 202 174 175 175 176 175 223 206 198 205 194

Spare wheel Wheel bolts Wheels - general information Winter tyres Window convenience operation Windows De-icing See electric power windows Windscreen wiper Replacing the windscreen wiper blades Windscreen wipers Cleaning the windscreen wiper blades Windshield heating Radio reception Windshield washer fluid Checking the water level Indicator light Replenishing Winter Windshield washer system Windshield wipers Windshield wiper Automatic rear window wiper (Combi) Replacing the rear window wiper blade Windshield wipers Activating Windshield washer fluid Winter operation Snow chains Winter tyres see Wheels and tyres

197 200 194 200 48 177 46 68 68 64 177 189 30 189 189 189 66 67 69 66 189 200 200

203 198 196 196 195 200

Index

241

ŠKODA pursues a policy of constant product and model development. We trust that you will understand that changes to models in terms of shape, equipment and engineering, may be introduced at any time. The information about scope of delivery, appearance, performances, dimensions, weight, fuel consumption, standards and functions of the vehicle is only correct at the time of publication. Certain items of equipment might only be installed at a later date (information provided by your local ŠKODA Service Partner) or are only offered in particular markets. It is therefore not possible for legal claims to be made based on the data, illustrations and descriptions contained in this Owner's Manual.

Reprinting, reproduction or translation, either in whole or in part, is not permitted without the written consent of ŠKODA. ŠKODA expressly reserves all rights relating to copyright laws. Subject to change. Issued by: ŠKODA AUTO a.s. © ŠKODA AUTO a.s. 2012

www.skoda-auto.com You also can do something for the environment! The fuel consumption of your ŠKODA and the related pollutant emissions are determined crucially on how you drive. The noise and the wear of the vehicle depend on the way how you deal with your vehicle. This Owner's Manual shows you how to use your ŠKODA vehicle with utmost care for the environment while driving economically at the same time. Also please pay attention to those parts in the Owner's Manual that are marked  below. Work with us – for the sake of the environment.

Návod k obsluze Superb anglicky 05.2012 S74.5610.06.20 3T0 012 003 HC

[PDF] SIMPLY CLEVER. ŠKODA Superb Owner\\\'s Manual - Free Download PDF (2024)